Home

User's Guide to the Beamer Class, Version 3.00

Contents

1. 0 3 6 The Table of Contents miss a A A le i 3 7 Sections and Subsections a eega aaa e a aa AR AR a ee 3 9 Creating a Simple Frames tecate YA ARETE a de ea ee ee 3 9 Creating Simple Overlays ee 3 10 Using Overlay Specifications 2 e o eee 3 11 Structuring a Framme Lite hb 2 oA A ok bee eS big alate Be Adie A aS 3 12 Adding References 2 0 A ee Cee be ee eee Sak Alo sVEr babii E hey alte a as Renesas Bhat Ghai Be Rechte Ma ie Saar ge eh ake chy gh 3 14 Changing the Way Things Look I Theming e e e 3 15 Changing the Way Things Look II Colors and Fonts o o 4 Workflow For Creating a Beamer Presentation 4 1 Step One Setup the Files e 4 2 Step Two Structure Your Presentation a 4 3 Step Three Creating a PDF or PostScript File o o 43 1 Creating PODES o e do ee A atest e a 4 3 2 Creating PostScript sis ma o a a A A ae wd 4 4 Step Four Create Frames aia a ee A eee ee 4 5 Step Five Test Your Presentation e 4 6 Step Six Optionally Create a Handout or an Article Version o 5 Guidelines for Creating Presentations 5 1 Structuring a Presentation 2 ee eee 5 1 1 Know the Time Constraimts e KLZ Global Structure ei A A A AA Dale Frame Structure coeds A o RE eee a ee we aa teed 5 1 4 Interactive Elements pee ee 5 2
2. o o eee ee 11 9 Abstract 11 10Verse Quotations Quotes 11 11Footnotes 12 Graphics 12 1 Including External Graphic Files Versus Inlines Graphics 12 2 Including Graphic Files Ending eps or PpS e 12 3 Including Graphic Files Ending pdf jpg jpeg or png 12 4 Including Graphic Files Ending mps e 12 5 Including Graphic Files Ending mmp ooa a 13 Animations Sounds and Slide Transitions 13 1 Animations 13 1 1 Including External Animation Files 2 0 o o ee 13 1 2 Animations Created by Showing Slides in Rapid Succession 0 13 1 3 Including External Animations Residing in Multiple Image Files 13 2 Sounds 13 3 Slide Transitions 14 Managing Non Presentation Versions and Material 14 1 Creating Handouts 14 2 Creating Transparencies 14 3 Adding Notes 14 3 1 Specifying Note Contents a eee ee 14 3 2 Specifying Which Notes and Frames Are Shown 00 0000 000 14 4 Creating an Article Version 14 4 1 Starting the Article Mode ee 14 4 2 Workflow 14 4 3 Including Slides from the Presentation Version in the Article Version 14 5 Details on Modes II Changing the Way Things Look 74 74 76 78 79 80 82 83 85 85 88 89 91 91 96 97 103 105 106 107 107 1
3. midpoint factor specifies at which point of the sidebar the middle color is used A factor of 0 is the left of the sidebar a factor of 1 is the right The default which is 0 5 is in the middle 50 Example Adds two pillars setbeamersize sidebar width left 0 5cm sidebar width right 0 5cm usebeamercolor sidebar setbeamertemplate sidebar canvas left horizontal shading left white middle sidebar bg right white setbeamertemplate sidebar canvas right horizontal shading left white middle sidebar bg right white Beamer Template sidebar canvas right Works exactly as for the left side 7 2 3 Navigation Bars Many themes install a headline or a sidebar that shows a navigation bar Although these navigation bars take up quite a bit of space they are often useful for two reasons e They provide the audience with a visual feedback of how much of your talk you have covered and what is yet to come Without such feedback an audience will often puzzle whether something you are currently introducing will be explained in more detail later on or not e You can click on all parts of the navigation bar This will directly jump you to the part you have clicked on This is particularly useful to skip certain parts of your talk and during a question session when you wish to jump back to a particular frame someone has asked about Some navigation bars can be compressed using the following option Xdocumen
4. onslide lt 3 gt Same effect as the following command only lt 3 gt Same effect as the previous command end frame only lt overlay specification gt text lt overlay specification gt If either overlay specification is present though only one may be present the text is inserted only into the specified slides For other slides the text is simply thrown away In particular it occupies no space 63 Example only lt 3 gt Text inserted from slide 3 on Since the overlay specification may also be given after the text you can often use only to make other commands overlay specification aware in a simple manner Example newcommand myblue only color blue begin frame myblue lt 2 gt This text is blue only on slide 2 end frame uncover lt overlay specification gt text If the overlay specification is present the text is shown uncovered only on the specified slides On other slides the text still occupies space and it is still typeset but it is not shown or only shown as if transparent For details on how to specify whether the text is invisible or just transparent see Section 17 6 Example uncover lt 3 gt Text shown from slide 3 on ARTICLE This command has the same effect as only visible lt overlay specification gt text This command does almost the same as uncover The only difference is that if the text is not shown it is never shown in a transpa
5. ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode LYX Ina Column style the width of the column must be given as normal text not in T X mode 11 8 Positioning Text and Graphics Absolutely Normally BEAMER uses T X s normal typesetting mechanism to position text and graphics on the page In certain situation you may instead wish a certain text or graphic to appear at a page position that is specified absolutely This means that the position is specified relative to the upper left corner of the slide The package textpos provides several commands for positioning text absolutely and it works together with BEAMER When using this package you will typically have to specify the options overlay and perhaps absolute For details on how to use the package please see its documentation 11 9 Abstract The abstract environment is overlay specificiation aware in BEAMER beginfabstract lt action specification gt environment contents end abstract You can use this environment to typeset an abstract Beamer Color Font abstract These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the abstract If a background color is set this background color is used as background for the whole abstract by default Beamer Template Color Font abstract title Color parents titlelike This template is used for the title By default this inserts the word abstractname centered The background color is ignored 107 Beamer Template abstract beg
6. Example subsection Applications Applications to the Reduction of Pollution Beamer Template Color Font subsection in toc Like section in toc only for subsection In addition to the inserts for the section in toc template the following commands are available for this template e inserttocsubsection inserts the table of contents version of the current subsection name e inserttocsubsectionnumber inserts the number of the current subsection in the table of contents Beamer Template Color Font subsection in toc shaded Like section in toc shaded only for subsections 76 subsection lt mode specification gt f subsection name Starts a subsection without an entry in the table of contents No heading is created but the subsection name is shown in the navigation bar except if subsection name is empty In this case neither a table of contents entry nor a navigation bar entry is created but any frames in this empty subsection are shown in the navigation bar Example section Summary frame This frame is not shown in the navigation bar subsection frame This frame is shown in the navigation bar but no subsection entry is shown subsection A subsection frame Normal frame shown in navigation bar The subsection name is also shown in the navigation bar but not in the table of contents Often you may want a certain type of frame to be shown directly after a section or subsection starts
7. In some cases the theme will honour background color specifications for elements For example if you set the background color for block titles to green block titles will have a green background The background specifications are currently honoured for the following elements e Title author institute and date fields in the title page 144 e Block environments both for the title and for the body This list may increase in the future useinnertheme circles Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Eds Atala There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria O Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p O Results Proof of the Main Theorem In this theme itemize and enumerate items start with a small circle Likewise entries in the table of contents start with circles useinnertheme rectangles Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem EnkichonAlexandric There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symp
8. There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem uchidlenAlerandea There is no largest prime number Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme causes all text to be typeset using the default serif font except if you specify certain options You might wish to consult Section 5 6 2 on whether you should use serif fonts The following options may be given e stillsansserifmath causes mathematical text still to be typeset using sans serif This option only makes sense if you also use the stillsansseriftext option since sans serif math inside serif text look silly e stillsansserifsmall will cause small text to be still typeset using sans serif This refers to the text in the headline footline and sidebars Using this options is often advisable since small text is often easier to read in sans serif e stillsansseriflarge will cause large text like the presentation title or the frame title to be still typeset using sans serif Sans serif titles with serif text are a popular combination in typography e stillsansseriftext will cause normal text none of the above three to be still typeset usi
9. begin columns t column 5cm Two lines column 5cm One line but aligned end columns ARTICLE This environment is ignored in article mode LYX Use Columns or ColumnsTopAligned to create a columns environment To pass options insert them in T X mode right at the beginning of the environment in square brackets To create a column you can either use the column environment or the column command begin column placement column width 106 environment contents end column Creates a single column of width column width The vertical placement of the enclosing columns environment can be overruled by specifying a specific placement t for top c for centered and b for bottom Example The following code has the same effect as the above examples begin columns begin column t 5cm Two lines end column begin column t 5cm One line but aligned end column end columns ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode LYX The Column styles insert the command version see below column placement 4 column width Starts a single column The parameters and options are the same as for the column environment The column automatically ends with the next occurrence of column or of a column environment or of the end of the current columns environment Example begin columns column t 5cm Two lines column t 5cm One line but aligned end columns
10. e Usually you might wish to copy code from an existing template The code often takes care of some things that you may not yet have thought about The default inner and outer themes might be useful starting points Also the file beamerbaseauxtemplates sty contains interesting auxilliary templates e When copying code from another template and when inserting this code in the preamble of your document not in another style file you may have to switch on the at character To do so add the command makeatletter before the setbeamertemplate command and the command makeatother afterward e Most templates having to do with the frame components headlines sidebars etc can only be changed in the preamble Other templates can be changed during the document 152 e The height of the headline and footline templates is calculated automatically This is done by typeset ting the templates and then having a look at their heights This recalculation is done right at the beginning of the document after all packages have been loaded and even after these have executed their AtBeginDocument initialization e Getting the boxes right inside any template is often a bit of a hassle You may wish to consult the TEX book for the glorious details on Making Boxes If your headline is simple you might also try putting everything into a pgfpicture environment which makes the placement easier 16 3 2 Using Beamer s Templates
11. usecolortheme crane Example Euklid of Alexandria University of Alexandria a d 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 2 Let q be the product of the first p numbers 3 Then q 1 is not divisible by any of them 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p mj There is no largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme uses the colors of the Lufthansa whose logo is a crane It is not an official theme by that company however usecolortheme dove Example 160 There Is No Leer wame There Is No Largest Prime Number Number Numer The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid Results There Is No Largest Prime Number neame ii With an introduction to a new proof technique est Theorem EUkidiofAlexandrial There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Froot University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem M 2 2 M 2 2 This theme is nearly a black and white theme and useful for creating presentations that are easy to print on a black and white printer The theme uses grayscale in certain unavoidable cases but never color It also changes the font of alerted text to boldface When using this theme you should consider using
12. This is mapped to enumerate with the option lt gt hiddenitem This is mapped to addtocounter beamerpauses 1 prosperpart options text This command has the same effect as PROSPER s part command BEAMER s normal part command retains its normal semantics Thus you might wish to replace all occurrences of part by prosperpart tsection section name Creates a section named section name The star if present is ignored tsectionandpart part texrt Mapped to a section command followed by a prosperpart command ARTICLE In article mode no part page is added dualslide x y z options left column HA right column This command is mapped to a columns environment The left column text is shown in the left column the right column text is shown in the right column The options z y and z are ignored Also all options are ignored except for 1colwidth and rcolwidth These set the width of the left or right column respectively PDForPS PostScript text H PDF text Inserts either the PostScript text or the PDF text depending on whether latex or pdflatex is used When porting the PDF text will most likely be incorrect since in PROSPER the PDF text is actually PostScript text that is later transformed to PDF by some external program If the PDF text contains an includegraphics command which is its usual use you should change the name of the graphic fil
13. article version of your presentation coexist in your main file All special versions are created by specifying different class options and rerunning TFX on the main file 14 1 Creating Handouts A handout is a version of a presentation in which the slides are printed on paper and handed out to the audience before or after the talk See Section 4 3 2 for how to place numerous frames on one page which is very useful for handouts For the handout you typically want to produce as few slides as possible per frame In particular you do not want to print a new slide for each slide of a frame Rather only the last slide should be printed In order to create a handout specify the class option handout If you do not specify anything else this will cause all overlay specifications to be suppressed For most cases this will create exactly the desired result documentclass handout beamer Create a version that uses the handout overlay specifications In some cases you may want a more complex behaviour For example if you use many only commands to draw an animation In this case suppressing all overlay specifications is not such a good idea since this will cause all steps of the animation to be shown at the same time In some cases this is not desirable Also it might be desirable to suppress some alert commands that apply only to specific slides in the handout For a fine grained control of what is shown on a handout you can use
14. begin figure begin center includeslide slide2 end center caption The second slide original size Now the second item is also shown end figure The exact effect of passing the option page page of label name to the command pgf image is explained in the documentation of pgf In essence the following happens e For old version of pdflatex and for any version of latex together with dvips the pgf package will look for a file named filename page page of label name extension For each page of your pdf or ps file that is to be included in this way you must create such a file by hand For example if the PostScript file of your presentation version is named main beamer ps and you wish to include the slides with page numbers 2 and 3 you must create single page files main beamer page2 ps and main beamer page3 ps by hand or using some script If these files cannot be found pgf will complain e For new versions of pdflatex pdflatex also looks for the files according to the above naming scheme However if it fails to find them because you have not produced them it uses a special mechanism to directly extract the desired page from the presentation file main beamer pdf 14 5 Details on Modes This subsection describes how modes work exactly and how you can use the mode command to control what part of your text belongs to which mode When BEAMER typesets your text it is always in one of the following four m
15. 20 3 FoilT X The package beamerfoils maps a subset of the commands of the FOILS package to BEAMER Since this package defines only few non standard T X commands and since BEAMER implements all the standard commands the emulation layer is pretty simple A copyright notice The FoilT X package has a restricted license For this reason no example from the FOILS package is included in the BEAMER class The emulation itself does not use the code of the FOILS package rather it just maps FOILS commands to BEAMER commands For this reason my understanding is that the emulation offered by the BEAMER class is free and legally so IBM has a copyright on the FOILS class not on the effect the commands of this class have At least that s my understanding of things The workflow for the migration is the following 189 1 Use the document class beamer not foils Add a usepackage beamerfoils to start the emulation Possibly add commands to install themes and templates gt Ww N If the command foilhead is used inside a frame command or frame environment it behaves like frametitle If it used outside a frame it will start a new frame with the allowframebreaks option thus no overlays are allowed This frame will persist till the next occurrence of foilhead or of the new command endfoil Note that a frame command will not end a frame started using foilhead 5 If you rely on automatic frame creation based on foilhead yo
16. For example you may wish every subsection to start with a frame showing the table of contents with the current subsection hilighted To facilitate this you can use the following two commands AtBeginSection special star text text The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every section If the special star text parameter is specified this text will be used for starred sections instead Different calls of this command will not add up the given texts like the AtBeginDocument command does but will overwrite any previous text Example AtBeginSection Do nothing for section begin frame lt beamer gt frametitle Outline tableofcontents currentsection end frame ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode LYX You have to insert this command using a T X mode text AtBeginSubsection special star text 14 text The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every subsection If the special star text parameter is specified this text will be used for starred subsections instead Different calls of this command will not add up the given texts Example AtBeginSubsection Do nothing for subsection begin frame lt beamer gt frametitle Outline tableofcontents currentsection currentsubsection end frame 77 9 3 Adding Parts If you give a long talk like a lecture you may wish to break up your talk into several parts Each such part acts lik
17. PaloAlto presentation theme 137 parstepwise 192 part 78 part page template color font 78 partpage 78 pause 61 PDForPS 186 prosper class 14 prosperpart 186 pstricks package 14 qed symbol template color font 101 quotation color font 108 quotation environment 108 quotation begin template 108 quotation end template 108 quote color font 108 quote environment 108 quote begin template 108 quote end template 108 rebstep 193 rectangles inner theme 145 red 189 redstep 193 renewcommand 69 renewenvironment 69 resetcounteronoverlays 70 resetcountonoverlays 70 restep 193 reswitch 193 revstep 193 Rochester presentation theme 135 rose color theme 162 rotatefoilhead 191 rounded inner theme 145 seagull color theme 161 seahorse color theme 163 section 76 pdfpages package 13 PDFtransition 185 Pittsburgh presentation theme 135 Presentation themes section section section in in in head foot template color font 52 head foot shaded template 52 sidebar template color font 53 Antibes 135 Bergen 134 Berkeley 137 Berlin 139 boxes 133 Copenhagen 141 Darmstadt 140 default 133 Dresden 140 Frankfurt 140 Goettingen 138 Hannover 138 Ilmenau 139 JuanLesPins 136 Luebeck 142 Madrid 134 Malmoe 142 Marburg 138 Montpellier 136 PaloAlto 137 Pittsburgh 135 Rochester 135 Singapore 141 Szeged 141 Warsaw 142 professionalfonts f
18. cirlcel 3pt New a circle is used BEAMER colors are explained in Section 17 Here is the essence To change the foreground of the color to say red use setbeamercolor some beamer element fg red To change the background to say black use setbeamercolor some beamer element bg black You can also change them together using fg red bg black The background will not always be hon oured since it is difficult to show a colored background correctly and an extra effort must be made by the templates while the foreground color is usually used automatically BEAMER fonts are explained in Section 18 Here is the essence To change the size of the font to say large use setbeamerfont some beamer element size large In addition to the size you can use things like series bfseries to set the series shape itshape to change the shape family sffamily to change the family and you can use them in conjunction Add a star to the command to first reset the font PRESEN As next to this paragraph you will sometimes find the word PRESENTATION in blue next to some paragraph TATION This means that the paragraph applies only when you normally typeset your presentation using TFX or pdfATRXx ARTICLE Opposed to this a paragraph with ARTICLE next to it describes some behaviour that is special for the article mode This special mode is used to create lecture notes out of a presentation the two can coexist in one file LY
19. depending on whether this command is used inside a stepwise environment or inside a parstepwise environment steponce tezt This is either mapped to only lt 1 gt tezt or to Nuncover lt 1 gt tert depending on whether this command is used inside a stepwise environment or inside a parstepwise environment switch alternate text H text This is mapped to alt lt 1 gt text alternate text Note that the arguments are swapped bstep text This is always mapped to uncover lt 1 gt text 192 dstep This just advances the counter beamerpauses by one It has no other effect vstep Same as dstep restep text Same as step but the text is shown one the same slide as the previous step command This is implemented by first decreasing the countern beamerpauses by one before calling step reswitch alternate tert text Like restep only for the switch command rebstep teat Like restep only for the bstep command redstep This command has no effect revstep This command has no effect boxedsteps Temporarily for the current TEX group changes the effect of step to issue an uncover even if used inside a stepwise environment nonboxedsteps Temporarily for the current TEX group changes the effect of step to issue an only even if used inside a parstepwise environment code text Typesets the argument using a boldface typewriter font codeswi
20. will jump to the last slide of the presentation However this does not include the appendix Clicking on the left side of the appendix icon will jump to the first slide of the appendix clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the appendix If supported by the viewer application clicking on the back and forward symbols jumps to the previ ously visited slides If supported by the viewer application clicking on the search icon pops up a window that allows you to enter a search string If found the viewer application will jump to this string You can reduce the number of icons that are shown or their layout by adjusting the navigation symbols template Beamer Template Color Font navigation symbols This template is invoked in three star mode by themes at the place where the navigation symbols should be shown Three star mode means that the command usebeamertemplate is used Note that although it may look like that the symbols are part of the footline they are more often part of an invisible right sidebar The following template options are predefined 54 e default Organizes the navigation symbols horizontally e horizontal This is an alias for the default e vertical Organizes the navigation symbols vertically e only frame symbol Shows only the navigational symbol for navigating frames Example The following command suppresses all navigation symbols setbeamertemplate n
21. win it should hence be the smallest one If you do not wish to have the frame title shown on a zoomed slide you can add an overlay specification to the frametitle command that simply suppresses the title for the slide Also by using the plain option you can have the zoomed slide fill the whole page Example A simple case begin frame frametitle A Complicated Picture 89 framezoom lt 1 gt lt 2 gt Ocm 0cm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 3 gt icm 3cm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 4 gt 3cm 2cm 3cm 2cm pgfimage height 8cm complicatedimagefilename end frame Example A more complicate case in which the zoomed parts completely fill the frames begin frame lt 1 gt label zooms frametitle lt 1 gt A Complicated Picture framezoom lt 1 gt lt 2 gt border Ocm 0cm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 3 gt border 1cm 3cm 2cm 1 5cm framezoom lt 1 gt lt 4 gt border 3cm 2cm 3cm 2cm pgfimage height 8cm complicatedimagefilename end frame againframe lt 2 gt plain zooms 90 11 Structuring a Presentation The Local Structure IAT X provides different commands for structuring text locally for example via the itemize environment These environments are also available in the BEAMER class although their appearance has been slightly changed Furthermore the BEAMER class also defines some new commands and environments see below that may help you to structure
22. 140 date 75 default color theme 157 default font theme 171 default inner theme 144 default outer theme 146 default presentation theme 133 defbeamertemplate 154 defbeamertemplatealias 155 defbeamertemplateparent 156 definition environment 100 defverb 59 defverbatim 60 deluxetable package 12 description environment 94 description item template color font 95 dove color theme 160 draft class option 28 DraTex package 12 Dresden presentation theme 140 dstep 193 dualslide 186 Elements see Beamer templates colors and fonts email 184 endfoil 191 enumerate environment 92 enumerate package 12 enumerate item template color font 93 items parent template 93 mini template template color font 94 subitem template color font 93 subsubitem template color font 94 enumstep environment 186 envcountsect class option 100 Environments abstract 107 actionenv 71 alertblock 98 alertenv 97 enumerate enumerate enumerate enumerate 197 altenv 66 beamerboxesrounded 105 beamercolorbox 103 block 98 boldequation 191 column 107 columns 106 definition 100 description 94 enumerate 92 enumstep 186 example 100 exampleblock 99 frame 42 Itemize 185 itemize 91 itemstep 186 notes 186 onlyenv 66 overlayarea 67 overprint 67 proof 101 quotation 108 quote 108 slide 189 slides 184 structureenv 96 thebibliography 82 theorem 100 verse 108 example environme
23. If you really want a line break to apply in all versions say lt all gt Note that the command is often redefined by certain environments so it may not always be overlay specification aware In such a case you have to write something like only lt presentation gt 14 4 2 Workflow The following workflow steps are optional but they can simplify the creation of the article version e In the main file main tex delete the first line which sets the document class e Create a file named say main beamer tex with the following content documentclass ignorenonframetext beamer input main tex e Create an extra file named say main article tex with the following content documentclass article usepackage beamerarticle setjobnamebeamerversion main beamer input main tex e You can now run pdflatex or latex on the two files main beamer tex and main article tex The command set jobnamebeamerversion tells the article version where to find the presentation version This is necessary if you wish to include slides from the presentation version in an article as figures setjobnamebeamerversion filename without extension Tells the BEAMER class where to find the presentation version of the current file An example of this workflow approach can be found in the examples subdirectory for files starting with beamerexample2 14 4 3 Including Slides from the Presentation Version in the Article Version If you use the p
24. It thus does not need to have any correlation with the actual height of say the letter x or even the letter M The letter x of an 11pt Times from Adobe will have a different height than the letter x of an 11pt Times from U TCs and it will have a totally different height than the letter x of an 11pt Helvetica from Adobe Summing up the font size has little to do with the actual size of letters Rather these days it is a convention that 10pt or 11pt is the size a font should be printed for normal reading Fonts are designed so that they can optimally be read at these sizes In a presentation the classical font sizes obviously loose their meaning Nobody could read a projected text if it were actually 11pt Instead the projected letters need to be several centimeters high Thus it does not really make sense to specify font sizes for presentations in the usual way Instead you should try to think of the number of lines that will fit on a slide if you were to fill the whole slide with line by line text you are never going to do that in practice though Depending on how far your audience is removed from the projection on on large the projection is between 10 and 20 lines should fit on a slide The less lines the more readable your text will usually be In BEAMER the default sizes of the fonts are chosen in a way that makes it difficult to fit too much onto a slide Also it will ensure that your slides are readable even under bad c
25. The use of this option evil In a good presentation you prepare each slide carefully and think twice before putting something on a certain slide rather than on some different slide Using the 43 allowframebreaks option invites the creation of horrible endless presentations that resemble more a paper projected on the wall than a presentation Nevertheless the option does have its uses Most noticeably it can be convenient for automatically splitting bibliographies or long equations Example begin frame allowframebreaks frametitle References begin thebibliography XX bibitem bibitem bibitem end thebibliography end frame Example begin frame allowframebreaks allowdisplaybreaks frametitle A Long Equation begin align zeta 2 amp 1 1 4 1 9 cdots amp MM amp pi72 6 end align end frame b c t will cause the frame to be vertically aligned at the bottom center top This overrides the global placement policy which is governed by the class options t and c containsverbatim tells BEAMER that the frame contains verbatim commands In this case only one slide of the frame is typeset unless all slides are suppressed by the overlay specification If you wish to use verbatim text in a frame with several slides a more roundabout approach is necessary see Section 7 5 This option cannot be used together with the label option label name causes the frame
26. Using Graphics lt i ta yer sa gh kee Bede ee A a BRS da a Metairie hoe 5 3 Using Animations and Transitions 2 daa ee ede a a ee 5 4 Choosing Appropriate Themes 2 2 2 2 0000 ee 5 5 Choosing Appropriate Colors ooo e 5 6 Choosing Appropriate Fonts and Font Attributes o e biG FORZOSA Bs Aha an ere e GPRD 5 6 2 Font Families 20 ici ds e A a Stn ee A Se a A 5 6 3 Font Shapes Italics and Small Capitals oaoa JOA Font Weis btang a ana O aaa Oh a A aay eee ee 6 Solution Templates II Building a Presentation 7 Creating Frames 7 1 1 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 The Frame Environment e il 444 aa a ado le rr as Components of a Brame co eee a ee E ta da dd EES 7 2 1 The Headline and Footline 12 2 Mhe Sidebars i scarii ar e E ora ot dede Boe AA a i 7 233 Navigation Bars de aii ee A al e a as Dn 1 2 4 The Navigation Symbols cea a A a A ASA NAS E O 2 0 Ehe Brame Title ains to a O o A AA oe AA td TAC Whe Background A a a de ee AA ta Margin Sizeso a AS E ee a AR AA A i es eae Restricting the Slides of a Frame o 0 Verbatim Commands and Listings inside Frames o o e e 8 Creating Overlays 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 The Pause Commands sas masna TEA A A BE a AA EE a The General Concept of Overlay Specifications o o e e Commands with Overlay Specifications
27. e Environments with Overlay Specifications o Dynamically Changing Text or Images e Advanced Overlay Specifications a a 8 6 1 Making Commands and Environments Overlay Specification Aware 8 6 2 Mode Specifications e 8 6 3 Action Specifications1 s eama 48 eae ea ee AERA EEA DRE ee wa 8 6 4 Incremental Specifications a 9 Structuring a Presentation The Static Global Structure Oil Adding a Title Page dl eee ie amp Y A A a daa la dar da 9 2 Adding Sections and Subsections ee ee O73 Adding Parto dica at PtSi A Gh ene a A Aids 9 4 Splitting a Course Into Lectures e 9 5 Adding a Table of Contents ce ecaa madee t e Da a araa a ee 9 67 Adding a Bibllography tri A a EE A rs 9 7 Adding an Appendix 0 0 0000 a a a D aa a e EE Eae da a 10 Structuring a Presentation The Interactive Global Structure 10 1 Adding Hyperlinks and Buttons ee a a a a a eh 10 2 Repeating a Frame at a Later Point aaa a 10 3 Adding Anticipated Zooming 11 Structuring a Presentation The Local Structure 11 1 Itemizations Enumerations and Descriptions ooa a a 11 2 Hilighting 11 3 Block Environments 11 4 Theorem Environments 11 5 Framed and Boxed Text 11 6 Figures and Tables 11 7 Splitting a Frame into Multiple Columns 0 2 00000000000 11 8 Positioning Text and Graphics Absolutely
28. gt block title lt overlay specification gt environment contents end exampleblock Inserts a block that is supposed to be an example Behaves like the block environment otherwise Example In the following example the block is completely suppressed on the first slide it does not even occupy any space begin exampleblock Example lt only 2 gt The set 1 2 3 5 has four elements end exampleblock ARTICLE The block name is typeset in italics LYX Same applies as for block Beamer Template block example begin Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Template block example end Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Color Font block title example Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Color Font block body example Same applies as for normal blocks LYX Overlay specifications must be given right at the beginning of the environments and in T X mode 11 4 Theorem Environments The BEAMER class predefines several environments like theorem or definition or proof that you can use to typeset things like well theorems definitions or proofs The complete list is the following theoren corollary definition definitions fact example and examples The following German block en vironments are also predefined Problem Loesung Definition Satz Beweis Folgerung Lemma Fakt Beispiel and Beispiele Here is a typical example on how to use them begin frame frametitle A Theorem on I
29. inner and outer themes However they may or may not honour color themes and they will not be supported in the future The following list shows which of the new themes should be used instead of the old themes When switching you may want to use the font theme structurebold with the option onlysma11 Old theme Replacement options none Use compatibility bars Try Dresden instead classic Try Singapore instead lined Try Szeged instead plain Try none or Pittsburgh instead sidebar Try Goettingen for the light version and Marburg for the dark version shadow Try Warsaw instead split Try Malmoe instead tree Try Montpellier and for the bars version Antibes or JuansLesPins 143 16 Inner Themes Outer Themes and Templates This section discusses the inner and outer themes that are available in BEAMER These themes install certain templates for the different elements of a presentation The template mechanism is explained at the end of the section Before we plunge into the details let us agree on some terminology for this section In BEAMER an element is part of a presentation that is potentially typeset in some special way Examples of elements are frame titles the author s name or the footnote sign The appearance of every element is governed by a template for this element Appropriate templates are installed by inner and outer themes where the inner themes only install templates for elements that are typically inside t
30. label lt overlay specification gt label name If the overlay specification is present the label is only inserted on the specified slide Inserting a label on more than one slide will cause a multiple labels warning However if no overlay specification is present the specification is automatically set to just 1 and the label is thus inserted only on the first slide This is typically the desired behaviour since it does not really matter on which slide the label is inserted except if you use an only command and except if you wish to use that label as a hyperjump target Then you need to specify a slide Labels can be used as target of hyperjumps A convenient way of labelling a frame is to use the label name option of the frame environment However this will cause the whole frame to be kept in memory till the end of the compilation which may pose a problem Example begin frame begin align a amp b c label first no specification needed c amp d e label second no specification needed end align Blah blah uncover lt 2 gt more blah blah only lt 3 gt Specification is needed now label lt 3 gt mylabel end frame 65 8 4 Environments with Overlay Specifications Environments can also be equipped with overlay specifications For most of the predefined environments see Section 11 3 adding an overlay specification causes the whole environment to be uncovered only on the specified
31. presentation other than the color of normal text See also the related color local structure and the related font tiny structure Inside the structure command the background of the color is ignored but this is not necessarily true for elements that inherit their color from structure There is no template structure use structure begin and structure end instead Beamer Color local structure This color should be used to typeset structural elements that change their color according to the local environment For example the color of an item button in an itemize environment changes its color according to circumstances If it is used inside an example block it should have the example text color if it is currently alerted it should have the alerted text color This color will setup by certain environments to have the color that should be used to typset things like item buttons Since the color used for items item inherits from this color by default items automatically change their color according to the current situation If you write your own environment in which the item buttons are similar structural elements should have a different color you should change the color local structure inside these environments Beamer Font tiny structure This special font is used for tiny structural text Basically this font should be used whenever a structural element uses a tiny font The idea is that the tiny versions of the structu
32. s Template Management If you only wish to modify the appearance of a single or few elements you do not need to create a whole new inner or outer theme Instead you can modify the appropriate template A template specifies how an element of a presentation is typeset For example the frametitle template dictates where the frame title is put which font is used and so on As the name suggests you specify a template by writing the exact TEX code you would also use when typesetting a single frame title by hand Only instead of the actual title you use the command insertframetitle Example Suppose we would like to have the frame title typeset in red centered and boldface If we were to typeset a single frame title by hand it might be done like this begin frame begin centering color red textbf The Title of This Frame par end centering Blah blah end frame In order to typeset the frame title in this way on all slides in the simplest case we can change the frame title template as follows 151 ARTICLE setbeamertemplate frametitle begin centering color red textbf insertframetitle par end centering We can then use the following code to get the desired effect begin frame frametitle The Title of This Frame Blah blah end frame When rendering the frame BEAMER will use the code of the frame title template to typeset the frame title and it will replace every occurrence of
33. showcontrols duration 5s cells avi hyperlinkmovie start 5s duration 7s cells beamerbutton Show the middle stage hyperlinkmovie start 12s duration 5s cells beamerbutton Show the late stage A movie can serve as the destination of a special kind of hyperlink namely a hyperlink introduced using the following command hyperlinkmovie options movie label text Causes the text to become a movie hyperlink When you click on the text the movie with the label movie label will start to play or stop or pause or resume depending on the options The movie must be on the same page as the hyperlink The following options may be given many of which are the same as for the movie command if a different option is given for the link than for the movie itself the option for the link takes precedence 13 1 2 You can duration time s As for movie this causes the movie to be played only for the given number of seconds loop and repeat As for movie this causes the movie to loop once As for movie this causes the movie to played only once palindrome As for movie this causes the movie to be played forth and back pause Causes the playback of the movie to be paused if the movie was currently playing If not nothing happens play Causes the movie to be played from whatever start position is specified If the movie is already playing it will be stopped and restarted at the starting position This i
34. ues between 0 and 1 When you press the button created in this way the viewer application will hyperjump to the first of the frames specified by the zoomed overlay specification For the slides to which this overlay specification applies the following happens The exact same area as the one specified before is zoomed out to fill the whole normal text area of the frame Everything else including the sidebars the headlines and footlines and even the frame title retain their normal size The zooming is performed in such a way that the whole specified area is completely shown The aspect ratio is kept correct and the zoomed area will possibly show more than just the specified area if the aspect ratio of this area and the aspect ratio of the available text area do not agree Behind the whole text area which contains the zoomed area a big invisible Back button is put Thus clicking anywhere on the text area will jump back to the original unzoomed picture You can specify several zoom areas for a single frame In this case you should specify different zoomed overlay specification but you can specify the same button overlay specification You cannot nest zoomings in the sense that you cannot have a zoom button on a slide that is in some zoomed overlay specification However you can have overlapping and even nested button overlay specification When clicking on an area that belongs to several buttons the one given last will
35. useful options are left center and right As a special case the right option causes the left border of the frame title to be somewhat larger than normal so that the frame title is more in the middle of the frame e shadow theme This option is available if the outer theme shadow is loaded It draws the frame title on top of a horizontal shading between the background colors of frametitle and frametitle right A subtitle is if present also put on this bar Below the bar a shadow is drawn e sidebar theme This option is available if the outer theme sidebar is loaded and if the headline height is not set to Opt which can be done using and option of the sidebar theme With this option the frame title is put inside a rectangular area that is part of the headline some negative space is used to raise the frame title into this area The background of the color frametitle is not used this is the job of the headline template in this case e smoothbars theme This option is available if the outer theme smoothbars is loaded It typesets the frametitle on a colored bar with the background color of frametitle The top and bottom of the bar smoothly blend over to backgrounds above and below e smoothtree theme Like smoothbars theme only for the smoothtree theme The following commands are useful for this template e insertframetitle yields the frame title e insertframesubtitle yields the frame subtitle framesubtitle lt overl
36. But then I do not want to press my taste on other people When using this option it is probably a very good idea to also use the lily color theme Example The overlystylish option together with the lily color theme There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem 159 usecolortheme beetle Example There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number Theorem Proof Results The main theme behing this theme is to use white and black text on gray background The white text is used for special emphasis the black text for normal text The outer stuff like the headline and the footline use however a bluish color To change this color change the background of palette primary Great care must be taken with this theme since both the white gray and the black gray contrasts are much lower than with other themes Make sure that the contrast is high enough for the actual presentation You can change the grayish background by changing the background of normal text
37. Definition For example the first is defined using newtheorem Theorem Theorem The following commands are parsed by BEAMER but have not effect e leftheader Xrightheader e leftfooter e rightfooter e MRestriction and e Wmarginpar 191 20 4 Trex Power The package beamertexpower maps a subset of the commands of the TEXPOWER package due to Stephan Lehmke to BEAMER This subset is currently rather small so a lot of adaptions may be necessary Note that TEXPOWER is not a full class by itself but a package that needs another class like seminar or prosper to do the actually typesetting It may thus be necessary to additionally load an emulation layer for these also Indeed it might be possible to directly use TEXPOWER inside BEAMER but I have not tried that Perhaps this will be possible in the future Currently the package beamertexpower mostly just maps the stepwise and related commands to appropriate BEAMER commands The pause command need not be mapped since it is directly implemented by BEAMER anyway The workflow for the migration is the following 1 Replace the document class by beamer If the document class is seminar or prosper you can use the above emulation layers that is you can include the files beamerseminar or beamerprosper to emulate the class All notes on what to do for the emulation of SEMINAR or PROSPER also apply here 2 Additionally add usepackage beamertexpower to start the emulat
38. However to make the canvas transparent only set the background of the canvas empty leave the background of normal text white e vertical shading color options installs a vertically shaded background Use with care Background shadings are often distracting The following color options may be given top color specifies the color at the top of the page By default 25 of the foreground of the BEAMER color palette primary is used 57 bottom color specifies the color at the bottom of the page By default the background of normal text at the moment of invocation of this command is used middle color specifies the color for the middle of the page Thus if this option is given the shading changes from the bottom color to this color and then to the top color midpoint factor specifies at which point of the page the middle color is used A factor of 0 is the bottom of the page a factor of 1 is the top The default which is 0 5 is in the middle The main background is drawn on top of the background canvas It can be used to add say a grid to every frame or a big background picture or whatever Beamer Template Color Font background Color parents background canvas The template is inserted behind everything but on top of the background canvas Use it for pictures or grids or anything that does not necessarily fill the whole background When this template is typeset the BEAMER color and font backg
39. Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem The color theme is a dark or inverted theme using yellow on blue as the main colors The color theme also installs a slightly darker background color for blocks which is necessary for presentation themes that use shadows but which in my opinion is undesirable for all other presentation themes By using the lily color theme together with this theme the backgrounds for blocks can be removed When using a light on dark theme like this one be aware that there are certain disadvantages e If the room in which the talk is given has been darkened using such a theme makes it more difficult for the audience to take or read notes e Since the room becomes darker the pupil becomes larger thus making it harder for the eye to focus This can make text harder to read e Printing such slides is difficult at best On the other hand a light on dark presentation often appears to be more stylish than a plain black on white one The following options may be given installs a background canvas that is in my opinion way too stylish
40. Line breaks are still suppressed by default center centers the text inside the minipage created using the width option rather than having it left aligned respectlinebreaks causes line breaks introduced by the command to be honored Example insertauthor width 3cm center respectlinebreaks insertshortdate options Inserts the short version of the date into a template The same options as for insertshortauthor may be given insertshortinstitute options Inserts the short version of the institute into a template The same options as for insertshortauthor may be given insertshortpart options Inserts the short version of the part name into a template The same options as for Ninsertshortauthor may be given Vinsertshorttitle options Inserts the short version of the document title into a template Same options as for Ninsertshortauthor may be given insertshortsubtitle options Inserts the short version of the document subtitle Same op tions as for Ninsertshortauthor may be given Vinsertsubsection Inserts the current subsection into a template insertsubsectionnavigation width Inserts a vertical navigation bar containing all subsec tions of the current section with the current subsection hilighted insertsubsectionnavigationhorizontal width left insert H right insert See insertsectionnavigationhorizontal insertverticalnavigation width Inserts a vertical navigation bar of the
41. Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally 2 7 3 No Warranty 10 Because the program is licensed free of charge there is no warranty for the program to the extent permitted by applicable law Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and or other parties provide the program as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied 17 11 including but not limited to t
42. This caption is placed below the figure end figure begin figure caption This caption is placed above the figure pgfuseimage myotherfigure end figure end frame Beamer Template Color Font caption This template is used to render the caption The following template options are predefined e default typesets the caption name a word like Figure or Abbildung or Table depending on whether a table or figure is typeset and depending on the currently installed language before the caption text No number is printed since these make little sense in a normal presentation e numbered adds the figure or table number to the caption Use this option only if your audience has a printed handout or printed lecture notes that follow the same numbering e caption name own line As the name suggests this options puts the caption name like Fig ure on its own line Inside the template you can use the following inserts 105 e insertcaption Inserts the text of the current caption e insertcaptionname Inserts the name of the current caption This word is either Table or Figure or if the babel package is used some translation thereof e insertcaptionnumber Inserts the number of the current figure or table Beamer Color Font caption name These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the caption name a word like Figure The caption template must directly use them they ar
43. Thus this template should install the correct colors and fonts for the title and the body itself Beamer Template block end This template is inserted at the end of a block Beamer Color Font block title This BEAMER color font should be used to typeset the title of the block Since neither the color nor the font are setup automatically the template block begin must do so itself The default block template and also the rounded version honor the background of this color Beamer Color Font block body This BEAMER color font should be used to typeset the body of the block that is the environment contents As for block title the color and font must be setup by the template block begin begin alertblock lt action specification gt block title action specification gt environment contents end alertblock ARTICLE LYX Inserts a block whose title is hilighted Behaves like the block environment otherwise Example begin alertblock Wrong Theorem 1 2 end alertblock The block name is typeset in bold and is emphasized Same applies as for block Beamer Template block alerted begin Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Template block alerted end Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Color Font block title alerted Same applies as for normal blocks Beamer Color Font block body alerted Same applies as for normal blocks 98 begin exampleblock lt action specification
44. Titles like Review of the Definition of Partially Ordered Sets Posets or A Partial Ordering on the Columns of the Genotype Matrix are much more informative Ideally titles on consecutive frames should tell a story all by themselves 66 99 In English you should either always capitalize all words in a frame title except for words like a or the as in a title or you always use the normal lowercase letters Do not mix this stick to one rule The same is true for block titles For example do not use titles like A short Review of Turing machines Either use A Short Review of Turing Machines or A short review of Turing machines Turing is still spelled with a capital letter since it is a name In English the title of the whole document should be capitalized regardless of whether you capitalize anything else In German and other languages that have lots of capitalized words always use the correct upper lowercase letters Never capitalize anything in addition to what is usually capitalized How Much Can I Put On a Frame A frame with too little on it is better than a frame with too much on it A usual frame should have between 20 and 40 words The maximum should be at about 80 words Do not assume that everyone in the audience is an expert on the subject matter Even if the people listening to you should be experts they may last have heard about things you consider obvious several years
45. a background but not always Third sometimes element somehow should not have any special color but should simply run along with the color of their surrounding Finally giving a special color to every element makes it very hard to globally change colors like changing all the different kind of blue things into kind of red things and it makes later extensions even harder For all these reasons the color of an element in BEAMER is a structured object which I call a BEAMER color Every BEAMER color has two parts a foreground and a background Either of these may be empty which means that whatever foreground or background was active before should remain active when the color is used BEAMER colors can inherit from other BEAMER colors and the default themes make extensive use of this feature For example their is a BEAMER color called structure and all sorts of elements inherit from this color Thus if someone changes structure the color of all these elements automatically change accordingly When a color inherits from another color it can nevertheless still override only the foreground or the background It is also possible to inherit from another BEAMER color in a more sophisticated way which is more like using the other BEAMER color in an indirect way You can specify that say the background of the title should be a 90 of the background of normal text and 10 of the foreground of structure Inheritance and using of other BE
46. a sound that should be played on after the page has been closed In this case the sound command must be used borderwidth T X dimension Causes a border of thickness TX dimension to be drawn around the movie Some versions of the Acrobat Reader seem to have a bug and do not display this border if is smaller than 0 5bp about 0 51pt depth T X dimension Overrides the depth of the poster text box and sets it to the given dimension duration time s Specifies in seconds how long the movie should be shown The time may be a fractional value and must be followed by the letter s For example duration 1 5s will show the movie for one and a half seconds In conjunction with the start option you can cut out a part of a movie for display externalviewer As explained above this causes an external application to be launched for displaying the movie in a separate window Most options like duration or loop have no effect since they are not passed along to the viewer application height T X dimension Overrides the height of the poster text box and sets it to the given dimension label movie label Assigns a label to the movie such that it can later be referenced by the command hyperlinkmovie which can be used to stop the movie or to show a different part of it The movie label is not a normal label It should not be too fancy since it is inserted literally into the PDF code In particular it should not contain closing
47. ago You should always have the time for a quick reminder of what exactly a semantical complexity class or an w complete partial ordering is Never put anything on a slide that you are not going to explain during the talk not even to impress anyone with how complicated your subject matter really is However you may explain things that are not on a slide Keep it simple Typically your audience will see a slide for less than 50 seconds They will not have the time to puzzle through long sentences or complicated formulas Lance Forthnow claims PowerPoint users give better talks His reason Since PowerPoint is so bad at typesetting math they use less math making their talks easier to understand There is some truth in this in my opinion The great math typesetting capabilities of TeX can easily lure you into using many more formulas than is necessary and healthy For example instead of writing Since Hx 0 1 aC y lt co we have use Since y has only finitely many prefixes we have You will be surprised how much mathematical text can be reformulated in plain English or can just be omitted Naturally if some mathematical argument is what you are actually talking about as in a math lecture make use of TRX s typesetting capabilities to your heart s content 32 Structuring a Frame Use block environments like block theorem proof example and so on Prefer enumerations and itemize environme
48. always to be at the same horizontal position independently of whether a background is present or not In this case using colsep 4pt is a good option e shadow true or false draws a shadow behind the box Currently this option only has an effect if used together with the rounded option but that may change e rounded true or false causes the borders of the box to be rounded off if there is a background installed This command internally calls beamerboxesrounded e ignorebg causes the background color of the beamer color to be ignored that is to be treated as if it were set to transparent or empty e vmode causes TEX to be in vertical mode when the box starts Normally T X will be in horizontal mode at the start of the box a leavevmode is inserted automatically at the beginning of the box unless this option is given Only T Xperts need this option so if you use it you will probably know what you are doing anyway begin beamerboxesrounded options head environment contents 104 end beamerboxesrounded The text inside the environment is framed by a rectangular area with rounded corners For the large rectangular area the BEAMER color specified with the lower option is used Its background is used for the background its foreground for the foreground If the head is not empty head is drawn in the upper part of the box using the BEAMER color specified with the upper option for the fore and backg
49. and color inherit from the item font and color which are explained at the end of this section Beamer Template Color Font itemize subitem Color font parents subitem Like itemize item only for second level items An item of an itemize inside an enumerate counts a second level item Beamer Template Color Font itemize subsubitem Color font parents subsubitem Like itemize item only for third level items begin enumerate lt default overlay specification gt mini template environment contents end enumerate Used to display a list of items that are ordered Inside the environment use an item command for each topic By default before each item increasing Arabic numbers followed by a dot are printed as in 1 and 2 This can be changed by specifying a different template see below The first optional argument default overlay specification has exactly the same effect as for the itemize environment It is detected by the opening lt sign in the default overlay specification Thus if there is only one optional argument and if this argument does not start with lt then it is considered to be a mini template 92 The syntax of the mini template is the same as the syntax of mini templates in the enumerate package you do not need to include the enumerate package this is done automatically Roughly spoken the text of the mini template is printed before each item but any occurrence of a 1 in
50. argument is read and setbeamertemplate is called for all children for this template If there is a predefined template option set BEAMER evaluates the argument for children It may contain parameters like 1 or 2 These parameters are filled with the arguments that follow the call of setbeamertemplate for the parent template The number of arguments must be the number given as argument number An optional argument can also be specified in the usual way Once the arguments for the children have been computed Asetbeamertemplate is called for all children for the predefined template and with the computed arguments You may wonder what happens when certain predefined options take a certain number of arguments but another predefined option takes a different number of arguments In this case the above described mechanism cannot differentiate between the predefined options and it is unclear which or even how many arguments should be contained in arguments for children For this reason you can give the optional argument predefined option name when calling defbeamertemplateparent If this optional argument is specified the parenthood of the template applies only to this particular predefined option name Thus if someone calls setbeamertemplate for this predefined option name the given argument for children is used For other predefined option names a possibly different definition is used You can imaging that leaving out the optional
51. as in the following examples section lt presentation gt This section exists only in the presentation modes section lt article gt This section exists only in the article mode You can also mix pure mode specifications and overlay specifications although this can get confusing only lt article beamer 1 gt Riddle This will cause the text Riddle to be inserted in article mode and on the first slide of a frame in beamer mode but not at all in handout or trans mode Try to find out how lt beamer beamer 1 gt differs from lt beamer gt and from lt beamer 1 gt 8 6 3 Action Specifications This section also introduces a rather advanced concept You may also wish to skip it on first reading Some overlay specification aware commands cannot only handle normal overlay specifications but also so called action specifications In an action specification the list of slide numbers and ranges is prefixed by action where action is the name of a certain action to be taken on the specified slides item lt 3 alert 3 gt Shown from slide 3 on alerted on slide 3 70 In the above example the Nitem command which allows actions to be specified will uncover the item text from slide three on and it will additionally alert this item exactly on slide 3 Not all commands can take an action specification Currently only item though not in article mode currently Naction the environment actionenv and the block environments like b
52. be added to all slides of the current frame This is often not what you want so adding a specification like lt 1 gt is usually a good idea The following options may be given e item causes the note to be put as an item in a list that is shown at the end of the note page Example note lt 2 gt Do not talk longer than 2 minutes about this ARTICLE Notes are ignored in article mode LYX Use the Noteltem style to insert a note item Next the syntax and effects of the note command outside frames are described note options note tert Outside frames this command creates a note page This command is not affected by the option notes onlyframeswithnotes see below The following options may be given e itemize will enclose the whole note page in an itemize environment This is just a convenience e enumerate will enclose the whole note page in an enumerate environment Example frame some text note Talk no more than 1 minute note enumerate item Stress this first item Then this ARTICLE Notes are ignored in article mode The following element dictates who the note pages are rendered Beamer Template Color Font note page This template is used to typeset a note page The template should contain a mentioning of the insert insertnote which will contain the note text To squeeze more onto note pages you might consider changing the size of the BEAMER font note page to something small The default i
53. be given e height dimension sets the height of the frame title bar 15 3 Presentation Themes with a Tree Like Navigation Bar usetheme Antibes Example 135 Prime Number rgest Prime Number L Results L Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results El Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p m Proof of the Main Theorem A dominant theme with a tree like navigation at the top The rectangular elements mirror the rectan gular navigation at the top The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme usetheme JuanLesPins Example jest Prime Number Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Q Results e Pro
54. be used when the current slide is presented Consider the following example frame pgfuseimage youngboy frame transdissolve pgfuseimage man The command transdissolve causes the slide of the second frame to be shown in a dissolved way Note that the dissolving is a property of the second frame not of the first one We could have placed the command anywhere on the frame The transition commands are overlay specification aware We could collapse the two frames into one frame like this begin frame only lt 1 gt pgfuseimage youngboy only lt 2 gt pgfuseimage man transdissolve lt 2 gt end frame This states that on the first slide the young boy should be shown on the second slide the old man should be shown and when the second slide is shown it should be shown in a dissolved way In the following the different commands for creating transitional effects are listed All of them take an optional argument that may contain a list of key value pairs The following options are possible e duration seconds Specifies the number of seconds the transition effect needs Default is one second but often a shorter one like 0 2 seconds is more appropriate Viewer applications especially Acrobat may interpret this option in slightly strange ways e direction degree For directed effects this option specifies the effect s direction Allowed values are 0 90 180 270 and for the glitter effe
55. can be found in the file beamerexample seminar tex There are unfortunately numerous places where you may run into problems The whole note management of seminar is so different from beamer s that you will have to edit notes by hand In particular commands like ifslidesonly and ifslide may not do exactly what you expect If you use pstricks commands you will either have to stick to using latex and dvips or will have to work around them using for example pgf Porting lot s of pstricks code is bound to be difficult if you wish to switch over to pdflatex so be warned If the file cannot be compiled because some SEMINAR command is not implemented you will have to delete this command and try to mimick its behaviour using some BEAMER command usepackage beamerseminar Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to SEMINAR commands Use beamer as the document class not seminar Most of the options passed to the class seminar make no sense in beamer so just delete them This package takes the following options 187 e accumulate causes overlays to be accumulated The original behaviour of the SEMINAR package is that in each overlay only the really new part of the overlay is shown This makes sense if you really print out the overlays on transparencies and then really stack overlays on top of each other For a presentation with a video projector you rather want to present an accumulated version
56. certain set of frames from a file to be presented This command takes among other things a label name If you say includeonlylecture with this label name then only the frames following the corresponding lecture command are shown The frames following other lecture commands are suppressed By default the Nlecture command has no other effect It does not create any frames or introduce entries in the table of contents However you can use AtBeginLecture to have BEAMER insert say a title page at the beginning of each lecture lecture short lecture name 14 lecture name H lecture label Starts a lecture The lecture name will be available via the insertlecture command The short lecture name is available via the insertshortlecture command Example begin document lecture Vector Spaces week 1 section Introduction socia dina lecture Scalar Products week 2 section Introduction aid end document ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode includeonlylecture lecture label Causes all frame frame section subsection and part commands following a lecture com mand to be suppressed except if the lecture s label matches the lecture label Frames before any lecture commands are always included This command should be given in the preamble Example includeonlylecture week 1 ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode AtBeginLecture text The given text will be inserted at th
57. decides that the title is short enough by itself Euclid next adjusts the author and date fields as follows author Euclid of Alexandria date ISPN 80 27th International Symposium of Prime Numbers For the date he felt that the name was a little long so a short version is given ISPN 80 On second thought Euclid decides to add his email address and replaces the author field as follows author Euclid Eudlic of Alexandria texttt euclid alexandria edu Somehow Euclid does not like the fact that there is no email command in BEAMER He decides to write an email to BEAMER s author asking him to fix this but postpones this for later when the presentation is finished There are two fields that Euclid does not know but whose meaning he can guess subtitle and institute He adjusts them Euclid does not need to use the and command which is used to separate several authors nor the inst command which just makes its argument a superscript In LyX Euclid just edits the first lines having of the different styles like Author or Title or Date He deletes the optional short fields 19 LYX LYX 3 4 The Title Page Frame The next thing in the file that seems interesting is where the first frame is created right after the begin document begin frame titlepage end frame In BEAMER a presentation consists of a series of frames Each frame in turn may consist of several slides if there is m
58. frame title is inserted normally occupying as much space as needed on each slide The background color of the sidebar is taken from sidebar the background color of the frame title from frametitle and the background color of the logo corner from logo The colors of the entries in the table of contents are drawn from the BEAMER color section in sidebar and section in sidebar current as well as the corresponding BEAMER colors for subsections If an entry does not fit on a single line it is automatically linebroken The following options maybe given e height dimension specifies the height of the frame title rectangle If it is set to Opt no frame title rectangle is created Instead the frame title is inserted normally into the frame The default is 2 5 base line heights of the frame title font Thus there is about enough space for a two line frame title plus a one line subtitle e hideothersubsections causes all subsections except those of the current section to be suppressed in the table of contents This is useful if you have lot s of subsections e hideallsubsections causes all subsections to be suppressed in the table of contents e left puts the sidebar on the left side Note that in a left to right reading culture this is side people look first Note also that this table of contents is usually not the most important part of the frame so you do not necessarily want people to look at is first Nevertheless it is the defaul
59. gt 4 only lt 5 gt 5 end frame This command will create a frame containing four slides The first will contain the text This is slide number 1 the second This is slide number 2 the third This is slide number 4 and the fourth This is slide number 5 A useful specification is just lt 0 gt which causes the frame to have to no slides at all For example begin frame lt handout 0 gt causes the frame to be suppressed in the handout version but to be shown normally in all other versions Another useful specification is lt beamer gt which causes the frame to be shown normally in beamer mode but to be suppressed in all other versions 7 5 Verbatim Commands and Listings inside Frames The verb command the verbatim environment the 1stlisting environment and related environments that allow you to typeset arbitrary text work only in frames that contain a single slide or that are sup pressed altogether Furthermore you must explicitly specify that the frame contains verbatim text using the containsverbatim commands begin frame containsverbatim frametitle Our Search Procedure begin verbatim int find int a int n int x for int i 0 i lt n i if ali x return i end verbatim end frame You may not use the label label name option if you have a verbatim text on a slide If you need to use verbatim commands in frames that contain several slides or on a frame that uses
60. information presented in the following is not really special to BEAMER but applies to any other document class as well 12 1 Including External Graphic Files Versus Inlines Graphics There are two principal ways of creating T X documents that include graphics Either the graphic resides in an external file that is included or the graphic is inlined which means that T X file contains a bunch commands like draw a red line from here to there In the following the advantages and disadvantages of these two approaches are discussed You can use an external program like xfig or the Gimp to create a graphic These programs have an option to export graphic files in a format that can then be inserted into the presentation The main advantage is e You can use a powerful program to create a high quality graphic The main disadvantages are e You have to worry about many files Typically there are at least two for each presentation namely the program s graphic data file and the exported graphic file in a format that can be read by TEX e Changing the graphic using the program does not automatically change the graphic in the presentation Rather you must reexport the graphic and rerun ATEX e It may be difficult to get the line width fonts and font sizes right e Creating formulas as part of graphics is often difficult or impossible You can use all the standard TAT EX commands for inserting graphics like includegraphics be sure t
61. insertframetitle by the current frame title We can take this example a step further It would be nicer if we did not have to hardwire the color of the frametitle but if this color could be specified independently of the code for the template This way a color theme could change this color Since this a problem that is common to most templates BEAMER will automatically setup the BEAMER color frametitle when the template frametitle is used Thus we can remove the color red command if we set the BEAMER color frametitle to red at some point setbeamercolor frametitle fg red setbeamertemplate frametitle begin centering textbf insertframetitle par end centering Next we can also make the font themable Just like the color the BEAMER font frametitle is installed before the frametitle template is typeset Thus we should rewrite the code as follows setbeamercolor frametitle fg red setbeamerfont frametitle series bfseries setbeamertemplate frametitle begin centering insertframetitle par end centering Users themes or whoever can now easily change the color or font of the frametitle without having to mess with the code used to typeset it In article mode most of the template mechanism is switched off and has no effect However a few templates are also available If this is the case it is specially indicated Here are a few hints that might be helpful when you wish to set a template
62. it consists of a background canvas and the main background The background canvas can be imagined as a large area on which everything the main background and everything else is painted on By default this canvas is a big rectangle filling the whole frame whose color is the background of the BEAMER color background canvas Since this color inherits from normal text by changing the background color of the normal text you can change this color of the canvas Example The following command changes the background color to a light red setbeamercolor normal text bg red 20 The canvas need not be monochrome Instead you can install a shading or even make it transparent Making it transparent is a good idea if you wish to include your slides in some other document Example The following command makes the background canvas transparent setbeamercolor background canvas bg Beamer Template Color Font background canvas Color parents normal text The template is inserted behind everything The template should typically be some TFX commands that produce a rectangle of height paperheight and width paperwidth The following template options are predefined e default installs a large rectangle with the background color If the background is empty the canvas is transparent Since background canvas inherits from normal text you can change the background of the BEAMER color normal text to change the color of the default canvas
63. it is often hard to use these packages In some sense you program your graphics which requires a bit of practice When choosing a graphic package there are a few things to keep in mind e Many packages produce poor quality graphics This is especially true of the standard picture envi ronment of ATEX e Powerful packages that produce high quality graphics often do not work together with pdflatex e The most powerful and easiest to use package around namely pstricks does not work together with pdflatex and this is a fundamental problem Due to the fundamental differences between PDF and PostScript it is not possible to write a pdflatex back end for pstricks 110 LYX A solution to the above problem though not necessarily the best is to use the PGF package It produces high quality graphics and works together with pdflatex but also with normal latex It is not as powerful as pstricks as pointed out above this is because of rather fundamental reasons and not as easy to use but it should be sufficient in most cases Inlined graphics must currently by inserted in a large TR X mode box This is not very convenient 12 2 Including Graphic Files Ending eps or ps External graphic files ending with the extension eps Encapsulated PostScript or ps PostScript can be included if you use latex and dvips but not when using pdflatex This is true both for the normal graphics package and for pgf When using pgf do not ad
64. item 83 194 block body 98 block body alerted 98 block body example 99 block title 98 block title alerted 98 block title example 99 button 85 button border 86 caption 105 caption name 106 description item 95 enumerate item 93 enumerate mini template 94 enumerate subitem 93 enumerate subsubitem 94 example text 169 footline 49 footnote 109 footnote mark 109 framesubtitle 57 frametitle 56 frametitle continuation 43 headline 47 item 95 item projected 95 itemize item 92 itemize subitem 92 itemize subsubitem 92 local structure 96 logo 55 lower separation line foot 169 lower separation line head 169 math text 167 math text displayed 167 math text inlined 167 middle separation line foot 169 middle separation line head 169 mini frame 52 navigation symbols 54 normal text 168 normal text in math text 167 note page 123 page number in head foot 49 palette primary 168 palette quaternary 168 palette secondary 168 palette sidebar primary 168 palette sidebar quaternary 168 palette sidebar secondary 168 palette sidebar tertiary 168 palette tertiary 168 part page 78 ged symbol 101 quotation 108 quote 108 section in head foot 52 section in sidebar 53 section in sidebar shaded 53 section in toc 76 section in toc shaded 76 separation line 169 sidebar left 49 sidebar right 50 structure 96 subitem 95 subitem projected 9
65. mode end frame this text is not shown in the presentation again section This command also has effect in presentation mode Back to article stuff again frame lt presentation gt this frame is shown only in the presentation end document Example The following example shows how you can include other files in a main file The contents of a main tex documentclass ignorenonframetext beamer begin document This is star mode stuff Let s include files 129 mode lt all1 gt includefa include b mode Back to star mode end document And a tex and likewise b tex mode section First section Extra text in article version begin frame Some text end frame mode lt all1 gt 130 Part III Changing the Way Things Look BEAMER offers ways to change the appearance of an appearance at all levels of detail On the top level themes can be used to globally change the appearance conveniently On the bottom level templates allow you to specify the appearance of every minute detail individually To important aspects of the appearance of a presentation are treated in two extra sections colors and fonts Here too color and font themes can be used to globally change the colors or fonts used in a presentation while you can still change the color or font of say block titles independently of everything else 131 15 Themes 15 1 Five Flavors of Themes Themes make it easy to change t
66. much unless they follow a very easy pattern Five and more sections are simply too hard to remember for the audience After all when you present the table of contents the audience will not yet really be able to grasp the importance and relevance of the different sections and will most likely have forgotten them by the time you reach them e Ideally a table of contents should be understandable by itself In particular it should be comprehensible before someone has heard your talk e Keep section and subsection titles self explaining e Both the sections and the subsections should follow a logical pattern e Begin with an explanation of what your talk is all about Do not assume that everyone knows this The Ignorant Audience Law states Someone important in the audience always knows less than you think everyone should know even if you take the Ignorant Audience Law into account e Then explain what you or someone else has found out concerning the subject matter 30 e Always conclude your talk with a summary that repeats the main message of the talk in a short and simple way People pay most attention at the beginning and at the end of talks The summary is your second chance to get across a message e You can also add an appendix part using the Nappendix command Put everything into this part that you do not actually intend to talk about but that might come in handy when questions are asked Giving and Abstract In papers the a
67. not specify a foreground fg is left unchanged if does not specify a background bg is left unchanged You will often wish to directly use the color fg or bg after using this command For this common situation the optional argument fg or bg is useful which may be either fg or bg Giving this option will cause the foreground fg or the background bg to be immediately installed after they have been setup Thus the following command usebeamercolor fg normal text is a shortcut for usebeamercolor normal text color fg If you use the starred version of this command the BEAMER color normal text is used before the command is invoked This ensures that barring evil trickery the colors fg and bg will be setup independently of whatever colors happened to be in use when the command is invoked This command has special side effects First the normal color parent bg is set to the value of bg prior to this call Thus you can access the color that was in use prior to the call of this command via the color parent bg Second the special color beamer color name fg is globally set to the same value as fg and beamer color name bg is globally set to the value of bg This allows you to access the foreground or background of a certain beamer color name after another BEAMER color has been used However referring to these special global colors should be kept to the unavoidable minimum and should be done as locally as possible since a change
68. numbered with each section Thus instead of Theorem 1 you get Theorem 1 1 I recommend using this option 124 e noxcolor will suppress the loading of the xcolor package No colors will be defined Example documentclass article usepackage beamerarticle begin document begin frame frametitle A frame title begin itemize item lt 1 gt You can use overlay specifications item lt 2 gt This is useful end itemize end frame end document There is one remaining problem While the article version can easily T X the whole file even in the presence of commands like frame lt 2 gt we do not want the special article text to be inserted into our original BEAMER presentation That means we would like all text between frames to be suppressed More precisely we want all text except for commands like section and so on to be suppressed This behaviour can be enforced by specifying the option ignorenonframetext in the presentation version The option will insert a modex at the beginning of your presentation The following example shows a simple usage of the article mode documentclass a4paper article usepackage beamerarticle Ndocumentclass ignorenonframetext red beamer mode lt article gt usepackage fullpage mode lt presentation gt usetheme Berlin everyone usepackage english babel usepackage pgf pgfdeclareimage height 1cm myimage filename begin document section Introduc
69. of four points he wishes to uncover the points one by one but he wishes the fourth point to be shown at the same time as the first The idea is to illustrate his new proof method namely proof by contradiction where a wrong assumption is brought to a contradiction at the end after a number of intermediate steps that are not important at the beginning For this Euclid uses overlay specifications begin frame frametitle There Is No Largest Prime Number framesubtitle The proof uses textit reductio ad absurdum begin theorem There is no largest prime number end theorem begin proof beginfenumerate item lt 1 gt Suppose p were the largest prime number item lt 2 gt Let q be the product of the first p numbers item lt 3 gt Then q 1 is not divisible by any of them item lt 1 gt Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p qedhere end enumerate end proof uncover lt 4 gt The proof used textit reductio ad absurdum end frame The overlay specifications are given in pointed brackets The specification lt 1 gt means from slide 1 on Thus the first and fourth item are shown on the first slide of the frame but the other two items are not shown Rather the second point is shown only from the second slide onward BEAMER automatically computes the number of slides needed for each frame More generally overlay specification are lists of numbers or number ranges where the start or ending of
70. of the packages called latex beanmer pgf and xcolor 2 3 Installation in a texmf Tree If for whatever reason you do not wish to use a prebundled package the right way to install BEAMER is to put it in a so called texmf tree In the following I explain how to do this Obtain the latest source version ending tar gz or zip of the BEAMER package from http sourceforge net projects latex beamer most likely you have already done this Next you also need at the PGF package which can be found at the same place Finally you need the XCOLOR package which can also be found at that place although the version on CTAN might be newer In all cases the packages contain a bunch of files for the BEAMER class beamer cls is one of these files and happens to be the most important one for the PGF package pgf sty is the most important file You now need to put these files in an appropriate texmf tree When you ask TFX to use a certain class or package it usually looks for the necessary files in so called texmf trees These trees are simply huge directories that contain these files By default T X looks for files in three different texmf trees e The root texmf tree which is usually located at usr share texmf c texmf or c Program Files TeXLive texmf 10 LYX LYX e The local texmf tree which is usually located at usr local share texmf c localtexmf or c Program Files TeXLive texmf local e Your perso
71. of the BEAMER color will not reflect in a change of the colors beamer color name fg and beamer color name bg until the next invocation of usebeamercolor Also if the beamer color name does not specify a foreground or a background color then the values of the special colors are whatever happened to be the foreground or background at the time of the last invocation of usebeamercolor So try not to get into the habit of writing color structure fg all the time at least not without a usebeamercolor structure close by Example This text is usebeamercolor fg alerted text alerted The following box uses the fore and background of frametitles usebeamercolor fg frametitle colorbox bg Frame Title ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode ifbeamercolorempty fg or bg beamer color name if undefined H if defined This command can be used to check whether the foreground or background of some beamer color name is non empty If the foreground or background of beamer color name is defined if defined will be executed otherwise the if undefined code Example ifbeamercolorempty bg frametitle 1 Transparent background usebeamercolor fg frametitle insertframetitle Opaque background usebeamercolor fg frametitle colorbox bg insertframetitle 165 17 2 3 Setting Beamer s Colors To set or to change a BEAMER color you can use the command
72. of the document insertappendixendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the appendix If there is no appendix this number is the last page of the document insertdocumentstartpage Inserts 1 insertdocumentendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the document including the appendix 48 Beamer Template Color Font footline This template behaves exactly the same way as the headline Note that sometimes quite annoyingly BEAMER currently adds a space of 4pt between the bottom of the frame s text and the top of the footline The following template options are predefined e default The default is an empty footline Note that the navigational symbols are not part of the footline by default Rather they are part of an invisible right sidebar e infolines theme This option becomes available and is used if the infolines outer theme is loaded The footline shows things like the author s name and the title of the talk e miniframes theme This option becomes available and is used if the miniframes outer theme is loaded Depending on the exact options that are used when the miniframes theme is loaded different things can be shown in the footline e page number Shows the current page number in the footline e frame number Shows the current frame number in the footline e split This option becomes available and is used if the split outer theme is loaded The footline just like the headline is
73. options to be passed on to the color package If the list of options contains more than one option you must enclose it in curly brackets ARTICLE The color package is not loaded automatically if beamerarticle is loaded with the noxcolor option usepackage CJK PRESEN When using the CJK package for using Asian fonts you must use the class option CJK See TATION beamerexample4 tex for an example usepackage deluxetable PRESEN The caption generation facilities of deluxetable are deactivated Instead the caption template is used TATION usepackage DraTex See AlDraTex usepackage enumerate ARTICLE This package is loaded automatically in the presentation modes but not in the article mode If you use its features you have to load the package by hand in the article mode documentclass foils If you wish to emulate the foils class using BEAMER please see Section 20 3 usepackage T1 fontenc Use this option only with fonts that have outline fonts available in the T1 encoding like Times or the 1modern fonts In a standard installation the standard Computer Modern fonts the fonts Donald Knuth originally designed and which are used by default are not available in the T1 encoding Using this option with them will result in very poor rendering of your presentation when viewed with PDF viewer applications like Acrobat or xpdf To use the Computer Modern fonts with the T1 encoding use the package lmodern See also Secti
74. overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping two horizontal lines from the sides inward Example transsplithorizontalin transsplithorizontalout lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping two horizontal lines from the center outward Example transsplithorizontalout transwipe lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping a single line in the specified direction thereby wiping out the previous contents Example transwipe direction 90 You can also specify how long a given slide should be shown using the following overlay specification aware command transduration lt overlay specification gt number of seconds In full screen mode show the slide for number of seconds Tn zero is specified the slide is shown as short as possible This can be used to create interesting pseudo animations Example transduration lt 2 gt 1 120 14 Managing Non Presentation Versions and Material The BEAMER package offers different ways of creating special versions of your talk and adding material that is not shown during the presentation You can create a handout version of the presentation that can be distributed to the audience You can also create a version that is more suitable for a presentation using an overhead projector You can add notes for yourself that help you remember what to say for specific slides Finally you can have a completely independent
75. p Results m Proof of the Main Theorem A dominant theme If the navigation bar is on the left it dominates since it is seen first The height of the frame title is fixed to two and a half lines thus you should be careful with overly long titles A logo will be put in the corner area Rectangular areas dominate the layout The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme By default the current entry of the table of contents in the sidebar will be hilighted by using a more vibrant color A good alternative is to hilight the current entry by using a different color for the background of the current point The color theme sidebartab installs the appropriate colors so you just have to say usecolorhteme sidebartab This color theme works with all themes that show a table of contents in the sidebar This theme is useful for long talks like lectures that require a table of contents to be visible all the time The following options may be given e hideallsubsections causes only sections to be shown in the sidebar This is useful if you need to save space e hideothersubsections causes only the subsections of the current section to be shown This is useful if you need to save space e left puts the sidebar on the left default e right puts the sidebar on the right e width dimension sets the width of the sidebar If set to zero no sidebar is created usetheme options PaloAlto Example There Is No Larg
76. proof technique Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number University of Alexandria 7 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Q Results e Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A not quite too dominant theme This theme gives compressed information about the current section and subsection at the top and about the title and the author at the bottom No shadows are used 141 giving the presentation a flat look The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme usetheme Luebeck Example Ps Pous D There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Th i I t pri E Ea ere is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results m Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A variation on the Copenhagen theme usetheme Malmoe Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Large
77. slightly slanted to the right like this Things to know about italics e Italics are commonly used in novels to express emphasis However especially with sans serif fonts italics are typically not strong enough and the emphasis gets lost in a presentation Using a different color or bold text seems better suited for presentations to create emphasis e If you look closely you ll notice that italic text is not only slanted but that different letters are actually used compare a and a for example However this is only true for serif text not for sans serif text Text that is only slanted without using different characters is called slanted instead of italic Sometimes the word oblique is also used for slanted but it sometimes also used for italics so it is perhaps best to avoid it Using slanted serif text is very much frowned upon by typographers and is considered cheap computer typography However people who use slanted text in their books include Donald Knuth In a presentation if you go into the trouble of using a serif font for some part of it you should also use italics not slanted text e The different characters used for serif italics have changed much less from the original handwritten letters they are based on than normal serif text For this reason serif italics creates the impression of handwritten text which may be desirable to give a presentation a more personal touch although you can
78. specified by the command setbeamersize with the option text margin left and its counterpart for the right margin is not changed when a sidebar is installed Internally the sidebars are typeset by showing them as part of the headline The BEAMER class keeps track of six dimensions three for each side the variables beamer leftsidebar and beamer rightsidebar store the horizontal sizes of the side bars the variables beamer leftmargin and beamer rightmargin store the distance between sidebar and text and the macros Gm lmargin and Gm rmargin store the distance from the edge of the paper to the edge of the text Thus the sum beamer leftsidebar and beamer leftmargin is exactly Gm lmargin Thus if you wish to put some text right next to the left sidebar you might write nskip beamer leftmargin to get there Beamer Template Color Font sidebar left Color font parents sidebar The template is used to typeset the left sidebar As mentioned above the size of the left sidebar is set using the command setbeamersize sidebar widt left 2cm BEAMER will not clip sidebars automatically if they are too large When the sidebar is typeset it is put inside a vbox You should currently setup things like the hsize or the parskip yourself The following template options are predefined 49 e default installs an empty template e sidebar theme This option is available if the outer theme sidebar is loaded with the left option In t
79. square brackets If present the modifier can be either a or a If no text is given the following happens All text following this command will only be shown un covered on the specified slides On non specified slides the text still occupies space If no slides are specified the following text is always shown You need not call this command in the same TEX group its effect transcends block groups However this command has a different effect inside an overprint environment see the description of overprint If the modifier is hidden text will not be treated as covered but as invisible The difference is the same as the difference between uncover and visible The modifier may not be given if no text argument is present Example begin frame Shown on first slide onslide lt 2 3 gt Shown on second and third slide begin itemize item Still shown on the second and third slide Nonslide lt 4 gt item Shown from slide 4 on end itemize Shown from slide 4 on onslide Shown on all slides end frame If a text argument is present onslide without a modifier is mapped to uncover onslide is mapped to visible and onslide is mapped to only Example begin frame onslide lt i gt Same effect as the following command uncover lt 1 gt Same effect as the previous command onslide lt 2 gt Same effect as the following command visible lt 2 gt Same effect as the previous command
80. talk by using the appendix command You should put frames and perhaps whole subsections into the appendix that you do not intend to show during your presentation but which might be useful to answer a question The appendix command essentially just starts a new part named appendixname However it also sets up certain hyperlinks Like other parts the appendix is kept separate of your actual talk appendix lt mode specification gt Starts the appendix in the specified modes All frames all subsection commands and all section commands used after this command will not be shown as part of the normal navigation bars 83 Example begin document frame titlepage section Outline frame tableofcontents section Main Text frame Some text section Summary frame Summary text appendix section appendixname frame tableofcontents subsection Additional material frame Details frame Text omitted in main talk subsection Even more additional material frame More details end document 84 10 Structuring a Presentation The Interactive Global Structure 10 1 Adding Hyperlinks and Buttons To create anticipated nonlinear jumps in your talk structure you can add hyperlinks to your presentation A hyperlink is a text usually rendered as a button that when you click on it jumps the presentation to some other slide Creating such a button is a three step process 1 You specify a target using the c
81. text alternate begin text alternate end text lt overlay specification gt environment contents end altenv Only one overlay specification may be given On the specified slides begin text will be inserted at the beginning of the environment and end tezt will be inserted at the end On all other slides alternate begin text and alternate end text will be used Example begin frame This begin altenv lt 2 gt word end uncoverenv is in round brackets on slide 2 and in square brackets on slide 1 end frame 66 8 5 Dynamically Changing Text or Images You may sometimes wish to have some part of a frame change dynamically from slide to slide On each slide of the frame something different should be shown inside this area You could achieve the effect of dynamically changing text by giving a list of only commands like this Xonly lt i gt fInitial text only lt 2 gt Replaced by this on second slide only lt 3 gt Replaced again by this on third slide The trouble with this approach is that it may lead to slight but annoying differences in the heights of the lines which may cause the whole frame to whobble from slide to slide This problem becomes much more severe if the replacement text is several lines long To solve this problem you can use two environments overlayarea and overprint The first is more flexible but less user friendly beginfoverlayarea area width are
82. the label option you must declare your verbatim texts before the frame starts This is done using two special commands defverb command name delimiter symbol verbatim text delimiter symbol Declares a verbatim text for later use The declaration should be done outside the frame Once declared the text can be used in overlays like normal text The one line verbatim text must be delimited by a special delimiter symbol works like the verb command Adding a star makes spaces visible Example defverb mytext int main void Y defverb mytextspaces int main void begin frame begin itemize item lt 1 gt In C you need a main function item lt 2 gt It is declare like this mytext item lt 3 gt Spaces are not important mytextspaces end itemize end frame 59 defverbatim options command name text The text may contain a verbatim verbatim lstlisting or a related environment The command command name can be used later inside frames The declaration should be done outside the frame Once declared the text can be used in overlays like normal text The following options may be given e colored declares that the verbatim text will have its own colors Normally the verbatim text is typeset using the current color which allows you to use commands like alert to make verbatim text red on certain slides However if the verbatim text has say a special background colo
83. the box which means that if you specify a sep of 1cm and insert the box normally into the vertical list then the left border of the box will be aligned with the left border of the slide text while the left border of the text inside the box will be 1cm to the right of this left border Likewise the text inside the box will stop 1cm before the right border of the normal text e colsep dimension sets the extra color separation space around the text This space behaves the same way as the space added by sep only this space is only inserted if the box has a colored background that is if the background of the beamer color is not empty This command can be used together with sep the effects accumulate e colsep dimension sets an extra color separation space around the text that is horizontally outside the box This means that if the box has a background this background will protrude by dimension to the left and right of the text but this protruding background will not be taken intro consideration by T X for typesetting purposes A typical example usage of this option arises when you insert a box with a coloured background in the middle of normal text In this case if the background color is set you would like a background to be drawn behind the text and you would like a certain extra space around this text the background should not stop immediately at the borders of the text this looks silly and you would like the normal text
84. the footline e footline authortitle shows the author s name and the title in the footline e footline institutetitle shows the institute and the title in the footline e footline authorinstitutetitle shows the author s name the institute and the title in the footline e subsection true or false shows or suppresses line showing the subsection in the headline It is shown by default useoutertheme options smoothbars Example Results Results o Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics E University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme behaves very much like the miniframes theme at least with respect to the headline There the only difference is the smooth transitions are installed between the background colors of the navigation bar the optional bar for the subsection name and the background of the frame title No footline is created You can get the footlines of the miniframes theme by first loading the theme and then loading the smoothbars theme The following options can be given e subsectio
85. the frame on a specific slide a note page is created after the slide containing the text Since you can add an overlay specification to the note command you can specify after which slide the note should be shown If you use multiple note commands on one slide they accumulate and are all shown on the same note To make the accumulation of notes more convenient you can use the note command with the option item The notes added with this option are accumulated in an enumerate list that follows any text inserted using note The following example will produce one note page that follows the second slide and has two entries begin frame begin itemize item lt 1 gt Eggs item lt 2 gt Plants note item lt 2 gt Tell joke about plants note item lt 2 gt Make it short item lt 3 gt Animals end itemize end frame 122 Outside frames the command note creates a single note page It is independent of any usage of the note commands inside the previous frame If you say note inside a frame and note right after it two note pages are created In the following the syntax and effects of the note command inside frames is described note lt overlay specification gt options note text Effects inside frames This command appends the note text to the note that follows the current slide Multiple uses of this command on a slide accumulate If you do not specify an overlay specification the note will
86. the section number prefixing the theorem number otherwise they are numbered consecutively throughout the presentation or article I recommend using this option in article mode By default no theorem numbers are shown in the presentation modes Example begin theorem Kummer 1992 If _A n is n enumerable then A is recursive end theorem begin theorem lt 2 gt Tantau 2002 If _A 2 is 2 fa enumerable then A is regular end theorem LYX If present the optional argument and the action specification must be given in TR X mode at the begin ning of the environment The environments corollary fact and lemma behave exactly the same way documentclass envcountsect beamer Causes theorems definitions and so on to be numbered locally to each section Thus the first theorem of the second section would be Theorem 2 1 assuming that there are no definitions lemmas or corollaries earlier in the section begin definition lt action specification gt additional text lt action specification gt environment contents end def inition Behaves like the theorem environment except that the theorem style definition is used In this style the body of a theorem is typeset in an upright font The environment definitions behaves exactly the same way begin example lt action specification gt additional text lt action specification gt environment contents end example Behaves like th
87. there are reasons using other font families than Computer Modern e The Computer Modern fonts are a bit boring if you have seen them too often Using another font but not Times can give a fresh look e Other fonts especially Times and Helvetica are sometime rendered better since they seem to have better internal hinting e The sans serif version of Computer Modern is not nearly as well designed as the serif version In deed the sans serif version is in essence the serif version with different design parameters not an independent design e Computer modern needs much more space than more economic fonts like Times this explains why Times is so popular with people who need to squeeze their great paper into just twelve pages To be fair Times was specifically designed to be economic A small selection of alternatives to Computer Modern e Helvetica is a very often used alternative However Helvetica also tends to look boring since we see it everywhere and it has a very large x height the height of the letter x in comparison to a letter like M A large x height is usually considered good for languages like English that use uppercase letters seldomly and not so good for languages like German that use uppercase letters a lot I have never been quite convinced by the argument for this though Be warned the x height of Helvetica is so different from the x height of Times that mixing the two in a single line looks strange e Fut
88. to set the indentation Normally you choose the widest label in the description and copy it here If you do not give this argument the default width is used which can be changed using setbeamersize with the argument description width width As for enumerate the default overlay specification is detected by an opening lt The effect is the same as for enumerate and itemize Example begin description item Lion King of the savanna item Tiger King of the jungle end description begin description longest label item lt 1 gt short Some text item lt 2 gt longest label Some text item lt 3 gt long label Some text end description Example The following has the same effect as the previous example begin description lt gt longest label item short Some text item longest label Some text item long label Some text end description 94 LYX Since you cannot specify the optional argument in LyX if you wish to specify the width you may wish to use the following command shortly before the environment setbeamersize description width of text Example setbeamersize description width of longest label begin description item lt 1 gt short Some text item lt 2 gt longest label Some text item lt 3 gt long label Some text end description Beamer Template Color Font description item This template is used to typeset the description items When this tem
89. to the same family For example Times comes in different sizes there is a bold version of Times an italics version and so on To confuse matters font families like Times are often just called the font Times 36 The are two large classes of font families serif fonts and sans serif fonts A sans serif font is a font in which the letters do not have serifs from French sans which means without Serifs are the little hooks at the ending of the strokes that make up a letter The font you are currently reading is a serif font By comparison this text is in a sans serif font Sans serif fonts are generally considered to be easier to read when used in a presentation In low resolution rendering serifs decrease the legibility of a font However on projectors with very high resolution serif text is just as readable as sans serif text A presentation typeset in a serif font creates a more conservative impression which might be exactly what you wish to create Most likely you ll have a lot of different font families preinstalled on you system The default font used by TeX and BEAMER is the Computer Modern font It is the original font family designed by Donald Knuth himself for the TEX program It is a mature font that comes with just about everything you could wish for extensive mathematical alphabets outline PostScript versions real small caps real oldstyle numbers specially designed small and large letters and so on However
90. use the format option the includegraphics command will be somewhat at a loss in which format your graphic file actually is After all it end with the cryptic format suffix 0 or 1 You can tell includegraphics that any file having a suffix it knows nothing about is actually in format say mps using the following command DeclareGraphicsRule mps 13 2 Sounds You can include sounds in a presentation Such sound can be played when you open a slide or when a certain button is clicked The commands for including sounds are defined in the package multimedia which is introduced in Section 13 1 1 As was already pointed out in Section 13 1 1 a sound can be included in a PDF presentation by treating it as a movie and using the movie command While this is perfectly sufficient in most cases there are two cases where this approach is not satisfactory 1 When a page is closed any playing movie is immediately stopped Thus you cannot use the movie command to create sounds that persist for a longer time 2 You cannot play two movies at the same time The PDF specification introduces special sound objects which are treated quite differently from movie objects You can create a sound object using the command sound which is somewhat similar to movie There also exists a hnyperlinksound command which is similar to nyperlinkmovie While it is concep tually better to use sound for sounds there are a number of this to cons
91. was something important that they have missed Be careful when im porting graphics from a paper or some other source They usually have much more detail than you will be able to explain and should be radically simplified Sometimes the complexity of a graphic is intensional and you are willing to spend much time explaining the graphic in great detail In this case you will often run into the problem that fine details of the graphic are hard to discern for the audience In this case you should use a command like framezoom to create anticipated zoomings of interesting parts of the graphic see Section 10 3 Using Animations and Transitions Use animations to explain the dynamics of systems algorithms etc Do not use animations just to attract the attention of your audience This often distracts attention away from the main topic of the slide No matter how cute a rotating flying theorem seems to look and no matter how badly you feel your audience needs some action to keep it happy most people in the audience will typically feel you are making fun of them 34 e Do not use distracting special effects like dissolving slides unless you have a very good reason for using them If you use them use them sparsely They can be useful in some situations For example you might show a young boy on a slide and might wish to dissolve this slide into slide showing a grown man instead In this case the dissolving gives the audience visual feedback th
92. when using pdflatex Normally pdflatex cannot handle eps files but the mps files produced by MetaPost have such a simple and special structure that this possible The graphics package implements some filters to convert such PostScript output to PDF on the fly For this to work the file should end mps instead of eps The following command can be used to make the graphics package just assume the extension mps for any file it knows nothing about like files ending with 1 which is what MetaPost loves to produce DeclareGraphicsRule mps This special feature currently only works with the graphics package not with pgf 12 5 Including Graphic Files Ending mmp The format mmp Multi MetaPost is actually not format that can be included directly in a T X file Rather like a mp file it first has to be converted using the MetaPost program The crucial difference between mp and mmp is that in the latter multiple graphics can reside in a single mmp file actually multiple graphics can also reside in a mp file but by convention such a file is called mmp When running MetaPost on a mmp file it will create not a single encapsulated PostScript file but several ending 0 1 2 and so on The idea is that 0 might contain a main graphics and the following pictures contain overlay material that should be incrementally added to this graphic To include the series of resulting files you can use the command multiinclude from the
93. 08 109 110 110 111 111 111 111 112 112 112 114 116 117 119 121 121 122 122 122 124 124 124 126 126 127 131 15 16 17 18 Themes 15 1 Five Flavors of Themes ee 15 2 Presentation Themes without Navigation Bars e e 15 3 Presentation Themes with a Tree Like Navigation Bar o o 15 4 Presentation Themes with a Table of Contents Sidebar o o 15 5 Presentation Themes with a Mini Frame Navigation o e 15 6 Presentation Themes with Section and Subsection Tables o o 15 7 Presentation Themes Included For Compatibility o o e Inner Themes Outer Themes and Templates 16 1 Inner Themes e Sos i a AE A EE ee ane lated da dedo das a 16 2 Outer Th m ss saeni Dao hee eee a a a e a o ee Be ee Pe eg 16 3 Changing the Templates Used for Different Elements of a Presentation 16 3 1 Overview of Beamer s Template Management 16 3 2 Using Beamer s Templates 16 3 3 Setting Beamer s Templates e Colors 17 Color Themes a a A E E e A A AAN E E a da a 17 1 1 Default and Special Purpose Color Themes o o 17 1 2 Complete Color Themes e L7AES Inner Color hemes wit a Ses ge A DR ee ae Pe ee BS 17 1 4 Outer Color Themes ou ara a a a ee ee a a AA 1
94. 5 subsection in head foot 53 sidebar 53 subsection in toc 76 subsection in toc shaded 76 subsubitem 95 subsubitem projected 95 title page 74 titlelike 169 upper separation line foot 169 upper separation line head 169 verse 108 subsection in Beamer elements see Beamer templates colors and fonts Beamer fonts abstract 107 abstract title 107 alerted text 97 background 58 background canvas 57 bibliography entry author 82 bibliography entry journal 83 bibliography entry note 83 bibliography entry title 83 bibliography item 83 block body 98 block body alerted 98 block body example 99 block title 98 block title alerted 98 block title example 99 button 85 caption 105 caption name 106 description item 95 item 93 mini template 94 subitem 93 subsubitem 94 example text 169 footline 49 footnote 109 footnote mark 109 framesubtitle 57 frametitle 56 frametitle continuation 43 headline 47 item 95 item projected 95 itemize item 92 itemize subitem 92 itemize subsubitem 92 logo 55 mini frame 52 navigation symbols 54 enumerate enumerate enumerate enumerate 195 normal text 168 note page 123 page number in head foot 49 part page 78 qed symbol 101 quotation 108 quote 108 section in head foot 52 sidebar 53 toc 76 section in toc shaded 76 left 49 right 50 structure 96 subitem 95 subitem projected 95 subsection in head f
95. 69 upper separation line head color 169 usebeamercolor 165 usebeamerfont 176 usebeamertemplate 153 usecolortheme 132 usefonttheme 132 useinnertheme 132 useoutertheme 132 usepdftitle false class option 75 usetheme 132 utf8 class option 13 verse color font 108 verse environment 108 verse begin template 108 verse end template 108 visible 64 vstep 193 Warsaw presentation theme 142 whale color theme 163 xcolor package 14 xcolor list of options class option 14 xmpmulti package 116
96. 7 2 Changing the Colors Used for Different Elements of a Presentation 17 2 1 Overview of Beamer s Color Management e 17 2 2 Using Beamers Colors wif cocacola YO RA EY OWE EA ee Ee S 17 2 3 Setting B eamer s Colors z soa e ioe ke ew eee bb a be ee ws 17 3 The Color of Mathematical Text 2 2 0 2 00 00 ee 17 4 The Color Palettes vids god o Ae be Bee eT Be A aa ds a 17 5 Miscellaneous Colors s 0 0 0 co ee a ee A ewe ee E 17 6 Transpatency Electra A e plat cae Seas a Gh eles a eee he eth Ms aa aaa a Fonts 18 1 Font Themes a darani aa ee So Aa a ae eee ee oe bd a a HL eagle ae aac 18 2 Font Changes Made Without Using Font Themes o o e 18 2 1 Choosing a Font Size for Normal Text o e 18 2 2 Choosing a Font Family a sess 2 he eS EO a Sd 18 2 3 Choosing a Font Encodings e 18 3 Changing the Fonts Used for Different Elements of a Presentation 18 3 1 Overview of Beamer s Font Management 18 3 2 Using Beamer s Fonts e r 42th A ie a ne dd AE aci A 18 3 3 Setting Beamer s Fonts ee IV Howtos 19 20 How To Uncover Things Piecewise 19 1 Uncovering an Enumeration Piecewise ooa a 19 2 Hilighting the Current Point in an Enumeration 0 0 0 000 19 3 Changing Symbol Before an Enumeration 2 2 0 0 00 0000000000088 19 4 Uncovering Tagged Formulas Piecewis
97. AMER colors is done dynamically This means that if one of the parent BEAMER colors changes during the presentation the derived colors automatically also change The default color theme which is always loaded installs numerous BEAMER colors and inheritance rela tions between them These colors are explained throughout this guide The color used for say frametitles is discussed in the section on frametitles and so on 17 2 2 Using Beamer s Colors A BEAMER color is not a normal color as defined by the color and xcolor packages and accordingly cannot be used directly as in commands like color or colorlet Instead in order to use a BEAMER color you should first call the command usebeamercolor which is explained below This command will setup two normal colors called fg for foreground and bg for well guess what You can then say color fg the install the foreground color and color bg to install the background color You can also use the colors fg 164 and bg in any context in which you normally use a color like say red If a BEAMER color does not have a foreground or a background the colors fg or bg or both remain unchanged Inside templates this command will typically have already been called for you with the option fg usebeamercolor fg or bg 14 beamer color name This command possibly changes the two colors fg and bg to the foreground and background color of the beamer color name If the BEAMER color does
98. As a user of the BEAMER class you typically do not use or invoke templates yourself directly For example the frame title template is automatically invoked by BEAMER somewhere deep inside the frame typesetting process The same is true of most other templates However if for whatever reason you wish to invoke a template yourself you can use the following command usebeamertemplate element name If none of the stars is given the text of the element name is directly inserted at the current position This text should previously have been specified using the setbeamertemplate command No text is inserted if this command has not been called before Example setbeamertemplate my template correct Your answer is usebeamertemplate my template If you add one star three things happen First the template is put inside a TpX group thereby limiting most side effects of commands used insider the template Second inside this group the BEAMER color named element name is used and the foreground color is selected Third the BEAMER font element name is also used This one starred version is usually the best version to use If you add a second star nearly the same happens as with only one star However in addition the color is used with the command setbeamercolor This causes the colors to be reset to the normal text color if no special foreground or background is specified by the BEAMER color element name Thus in
99. BEAMER class write documentclass dvips beamer which will pass this option on to the HYPERREF package You can then run latex twice followed by dvips gt latex main tex lots of output gt latex main tex lots of output gt dvips P pdf main dvi 27 LYX The option P pdf tells dvips to use Type 1 outline fonts instead of the usual Type 3 bitmap fonts You may wish to omit this option if there is a problem with it If you wish each slide to completely fill a letter sized page use the following commands instead gt dvips P pdf tletter main dvi o main temp ps gt psnup 1 W1i28mm H96mm pletter main temp ps main ps For A4 sized paper use gt dvips P pdf ta4 main dvi o main temp ps gt psnup 1 W1i28mm H96mm pa4 main temp ps main ps In order to create a white margin around the whole page which is sometimes useful for printing add the option m 1cm to the options of psnup To put two or four slides on one page use 2 respectively 4 instead of 1 as the first parameter for psnup In this case you may wish to add the option b 1cm to add a bit of space around the individual slides The same trick as for the PDF version can be used to make the borders of slides more pronounced in the handout version You can convert a PostScript file to a pdf file using gt ps2pdf main ps main pdf Use View Postscript to view the PostScript version Ways of Improving Compilation Speed Whi
100. Could also have used alert lt 2 gt beamerdefaultoverlayspecification default overlay specification Locally sets the default overlay specification to the given value This overlay specification will be used in every actionenv environment and every item that does not have its own overlay specification The main use of this command is to install an incremental overlay specification like lt gt or lt alert gt see Section 8 6 4 Usually the default overlay specification is installed automatically by the optional arguments to frame frame itemize enumerate and description You will only have to use this command if you wish to do funny things If given outside any frame this command sets the default overlay specification for all following frames for which you do not override the default overlay specification Example Nbeamerdefaultoverlayspecificationt lt gt Example Nbeamerdefaultoverlayspecificationt clears the default overlay specification Actually it installs the default overlay specification lt gt which just means always but the portable way of clearing the default overlay specification is this call 8 6 4 Incremental Specifications This section is mostly important for people who have already used overlay specifications a lot and have grown tired of writing things like lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt and so on again and again You should skip this section on first reading Often
101. He settles on the Frankfurt theme but decides that the light dark contrast is too strong He adds usecolortheme seahorse usecolortheme rose The result seems some more subdued to him Euclid decides that the font used for the titles is not quite classical enough classical fonts are the latest chic in Alexandria So he adds usefonttheme onlylarge structuresmallcapsserif Euclid notices that the small fonts in the navigation bars are a bit hard to read as they are so thin Adding the following helps usefonttheme onlysmal1 structurebold 3 15 Changing the Way Things Look II Colors and Fonts Since Euclid wants to give a perfect talk he decides that the font used for the title simply has to be a serif italics To change only the font used for the title Euclid uses the following command setbeamerfont title shape itshape family rmfamily He notices that the font is still quite large which he likes but wonders why this is the case since he did not specify this The reason is that calls of setbeamerfont accumulate and the size was already set to large by some font theme Using the starred version of setbeamerfont resets the font Euclid decides that he would also like to change the color of the title to a dashing red though perhaps with a bit of black added He uses the following command setbeamercolor title fg red 80 black Trying the following command Euclid is delighted to find that specifying a b
102. MER class to create a presentation for the conference On the conference webpage he found out that he will have twenty minutes for his talk including questions 3 2 Solution Template The first thing Euclid should do is to look for a solution template for his presentation Having a look at Section 6 he finds that the file beamer solutions conference talks conference ornate 20min en tex might be appropriate He creates a subdirectories presentation in the directory that contains the actual paper and copies the solution template to this subdirectory renaming to main tex If Euclid uses LyX he would choose New from template and pick the template file beamer solutions conference talks conference ornate 20min en lyx He opens the file in his favorite editor It starts documentclass beamer which Euclid finds hardly surprising Next comes a line reading mode lt presentation gt which Euclid does not understand Since he finds more stuff in the file that he does not understand he decides to ignore all of that for time being hoping that it all serves some good purpose 3 3 Title Material The next thing that seems logical is the place where the title command is used Naturally he replaces it with title There Is No Largest Prime Number since this was the title of the paper He sees that the command title also takes an optional short argument in square brackets which is shown in places where there is little space but he
103. No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This font theme will cause titles and text in the headlines footlines and sidebars to be typeset in a bold font The following options may be given e onlysmall will cause only small text to be typeset in bold More precisely only the text in the headline footline and sidebars is changed to be typeset in bold Large titles are not affected e onlylarge will cause only large text to be typeset in bold These are the main title frame titles and section entries in the table of contents As pointed out in Section 5 6 1 you should use this theme possibly with the onlysmall1 option if your font is not scaled down properly or for light on dark text The normal themes do not install this theme by default while the old compatibility themes do Since you can reload the theme once it has been loaded you cannot use this theme with the old compatibility themes to set also titles to a bold font usefonttheme options structureitalicserif Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Larges
104. The first howto is about tricky uncovering situations The second howto explains how you can import parts or presentations created using some other ATEX presentation class like PROSPER 178 19 How To Uncover Things Piecewise 19 1 Uncovering an Enumeration Piecewise A common usage of overlays is to show a list of points in an enumeration in a piecewise fashion The easiest and most flexible way to do this is the following begin itemize item lt 1 gt First point item lt 2 gt Second point item lt 3 gt Third point end itemize The advantage of this approach is that you retain total control over the order in which items are shown By changing for example the last specification to lt 2 gt you can have the last two points uncovered at the same time A disadvantage of the approach is that you will have to renumber everything if you add a new item This is usually not such a big problem but it can be a nuisance To automatize the uncovering you can use the following code begin itemize lt gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize The effect of the lt gt is to install a default overlay specification see the definition of itemize for details Now suppose you wish the second and third point to be shown at the same time You could achieve this by adding the specification lt 2 gt to either the second or third item command However then you still have to do some
105. User s Guide to the Beamer Class Version 3 00 http latex beamer sourceforge net Till Tantau tantaulusers sourceforge net October 8 2004 Contents 1 Introduction Ll Malin Featureset E a Spe tat acia da A de de a A ink ee e st i 12 History 5 aa a as a a A 1 37 Acknowledgments suo esta A A E de diel Se SE Ee 1 4 How to Read this Users Guide Getting Started Installation 2 1 Versions and Dependencies 2 2 0 0 eee ee 2 2 Installation of Prebundled Packages o 0000000 00000000004 ZAL Debido iia a a eee e A A eg A A A D222 MARTE A a are at bey A ee ROMS Ee EES eee ieee a 23 Installation in astexmf Tree iu A Go HE Ra A ele a ee ee 2 4 Updating the Installation e ee ee 2 5 Testing the Installation ee ee 2 6 Compatibility with Other Packages and Classes 2 20 00 0000 0000000004 2 7 License The GNU Public License Version 2 0 00000 eee eee WL Preamble di o eR E A A amp Ee ii E A 2 7 2 Terms and Conditions For Copying Distribution and Modification 2503 No Watranty annie ae o a ee dd A a A Tutorial Euclid s Presentation 3 1 Problem Statements rra E OOO See ER a 3 2 gt Solution Template 2 5 64 di ad ek eve BRE ell a ER a A ic das do oo Title Material ota ao o a a taa e a A a ee ae 34 The Title Page Prime por ae E ia a e RARA PP Pg toe a SS 3 5 Creating the Presentation PDF File o e
106. X A paragraph with Lyx next to it describes behaviour that is special when you use LyX to prepare your presentation Part I Getting Started This part helps you getting started It starts with an explanation of how to install the class Hopefully this will be very simple with a bit of luck the whole class is already correctly installed You will also find an explanation of special things you should consider when using certain other packages Next a short tutorial is given that explains most of the features that you ll need in a typical presentation Following the tutorial you will find a possible workflow for creating a presentation Following this workflow may help you avoid problems later on This part includes a guidelines sections Following these guidelines can help you create good presentations no guarantees though This guideline section is kept as general as possible most what is said in that section applies to presentations in general independently of whether they have been created using BEAMER or not At the end of this part you will find a summary of the solutions templates that come with BEAMER You can use solutions templates to kick start the creation of your presentation 2 Installation There are different ways of installing the BEAMER class depending on your installation and needs When installing the class you may need to install some other packages as well as described below Before installing you may wish to revi
107. a height environment contents end overlayarea Everything within the environment will be placed in a rectangular area of the specified size The area will have the same size on all slides of a frame regardless of its actual contents Example begin overlayarea textwidth 3cm only lt 1 gt Some text for the first slide Possibly several lines long only lt 2 gt Replacement on the second slide end overlayarea LYX Use the style OverlayArea to insert an overlay area begin overprint area width environment contents end overprint The area width defaults to the text width Inside the environment use onslide commands to specify different things that should be shown for this environment on different slides The onslide commands are used like item commands Everything within the environment will be placed in a rectangular area of the specified width The height and depth of the area are chosen large enough to accommodate the largest contents of the area The overlay specifications of the onslide commands must be disjoint This may be a problem for handouts since there all overlay specifications default to 1 If you use the option handout you can disable all but one onslide by setting the others to 0 Example begin overprint onslide lt 1 handout 1 gt Some text for the first slide Possibly several lines long onslide lt 2 handout 0 gt Replacement on the second slide Supressed for handou
108. a range can be left open For example 3 5 6 8 means on all slides except for slides 4 and 7 You add overlay specifications to the items by entering T X mode press on the little TEX icon and writing lt 1 gt This TfX text should be placed right at the beginning of the item The qedhere is used to put the QED symbol at the end of the line inside the enumeration Normally the QED symbol is automatically inserted at the end of a proof environment but that would be on an ugly empty line here The item command is not the only command that takes overlay specifications Another useful command that takes one is the uncover command It only shows its argument on the slides specified in the overlay specification On all other slides the argument is hidden though it still occupies space The command only is similar and Euclid could also have tried only lt 4 gt The proof used textit reductio ad absurdum 22 On non specified slides the only command simply throws its argument away and the argument does not occupy any space This leads to different heights of the text on the first three slides and of the fourth slide If the text is centered vertically this will cause the text to wobble and thus uncover should be used However you sometimes wish things to really disappear on some slides and then Xonly is useful Euclid could also have used the class option t which causes the text in frames to be vertically flush
109. abel threeitems begin itemize item lt 1 gt First item item lt 2 gt Second item item lt 3 gt Third item end itemize hyperlink threeitems lt 2 gt beamergotobutton Jump to second slide end frame The following commands can be used to specify in an abstract way what a button will be used for beamerbutton button texrt Draws a button with the given button text Example hyperlink somewhere beamerbutton Go somewhere ARTICLE This command and the following just insert their argument in article mode Beamer Template Color Font button When the beamerbutton command is called this template is used to render the button Inside the template you can use the command insertbuttontext to insert the argument that was passed to beamerbutton The following template options are predefined 85 e default Typesets the button with rounded corners The fore and background of the BEAMER color button are used and also the BEAMER font button The border of the but ton gets the foreground of the BEAMER color button border The following inserts are useful for this element e insertbuttontext inserts the text of the current button Inside Goto Buttons see below this text is prefixed by the insert insertgotosymbol and similarly for skip and return buttons e insertgotosymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of goto buttons Redefine this command to change the symbol Example renewcommand insertgo
110. acilitate the creation of animations using this feature the following commands can be used animate and animatevalue animate lt overlay specification gt The slides specified by overlay specification will be shown only as shortly as possible Example begin frame frametitle A Five Slide Animation animate lt 2 4 gt 114 The first slide is shown normally When the second slide is shown presumably after pressing a forward key the second third and fourth slides flash by At the end the content of the fifth slide is shown code for creating an animation with five slides end frame ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode animatevalue lt start slide end slide gt name H start value end value The name must be the name of a counter or a dimension It will be varied between two values For the slides in the specified range the counter or dimension is set to an interpolated value that depends on the current slide number On slides before the start slide the counter or dimension is set to start value on the slides after the end slide it is set to end value Example newcount opaqueness begin frame animate lt 2 10 gt animatevalue lt 1 10 gt opaqueness 100 0 begin colormixin the opaqueness averagebackgroundcolor frametitle Fadeout Frame This text and all other frame content will fade out when the second slide is shown This even works with c
111. ackage 1modern usepackage T1 fontenc to get beautiful outline fonts and correct hyphenation Note however that certain older versions of the LM bundle did not include correct glyphs for ligatures like fi which may cause trouble Double check that all ligatures are displayed correctly and if not update 18 3 Changing the Fonts Used for Different Elements of a Presentation This section explains how BEAMER s font management works 18 3 1 Overview of Beamer s Font Management BEAMER s font mechanism is somewhat similar to BEAMER s color mechanism but not quite the same As for colors every BEAMER element like the frame titles the document title the footnotes and so on has a certain BEAMER font As for colors on the one hand you can specify the font of each element individually on the other hand fonts also use inheritance thereby making it easy to globally change the fonts used for say titlelike things or for itemizelike things 175 While a BEAMER color has a certain foreground and a certain background either of which may be empty a BEAMER font has a size a shape a series and a family each of which may be empty The inheritance relation among BEAMER fonts is not necessarily the same as between BEAMER colors though I have tried to match them whenever possible Multiple inheritance plays a more important rule for fonts than it does for colors A font might inherit the attributes of two different
112. ackage beamerarticle the frame command becomes available in article mode By adjusting the frame template you can mimic the appearance of frames typeset by BEAMER in your articles However sometimes you may wish to insert the real thing into the article version that is a precise screenshot of a slide from the presentation The commands introduced in the following help you do exactly this In order to include a slide from your presentation in your article version you must do two things First you must place a normal TX label on the slide using the label command Since this command is overlay specification aware you can also select specific slides of a frame Also by adding the option label name to a frame a label name lt slide number gt is automatically added to each slide of the frame Once you have labeled a slide you can use the following command in your article version to insert the slide into it 126 includeslide options 11 label name This command calls pgfimage with the given options for the file specified by set jobnamebeamerversion filename Furthermore the option page page of label name is passed to pgfimage where the page of label name is read internally from the file filename snm Example article begin figure begin center includeslide height 5cm slide1 end center caption The first slide height 5cm Note the partly covered second item end figure
113. ackground color also has an effect setbeamercolor title fg red 80 black bg red 20 white Finally Euclid is satisfied with the presentation and goes ahead and gives a great talk at the conference making many new friends He also writes that email to BEAMER s author containing that long list of things that he missed in BEAMER or that do not work He is a bit disappointed to learn that it might take till ISPN 79 for all these things to be taken care of but he also understands that BEAMER s author also needs some time to do research or otherwise he would have nothing to given presentations about 25 PRESEN TATION LYX 4 Workflow For Creating a Beamer Presentation This section presents a possible workflow for creating a BEAMER presentation and possibly a handout to go along with it Technical questions are addressed like which programs to call with which parameters 4 1 Step One Setup the Files It is advisable that you create a folder for each presentation Even though your presentation will usually reside in a single file TEX produces so many extra files that things can easily get very confusing otherwise The folder s name should ideally start with the date of your talk in ISO format like 2003 12 25 for a Christmas talk followed by some reminder text of what the talk is all about Putting the date at the front in this format causes your presentation folders to be listed nicely when you have several of them residing in on
114. actively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not bas
115. addtobeamertemplatet element name H pre text post text This command adds the pre tert before the text that is currently installed as the template element name and the post text after it This allows you a limited form of modification of existing templates Example The following commands have the same effect setbeamertemplate my template Hello world setbeamertemplate my template world addtobeamertemplate my template Hello If a new template is installed any additions will be deleted On the other hand you can repeatedly use this command to add multiple things defbeamertemplate lt mode specification gt element name H predefined option argument number default optional argument predefined text action action command This command installs a predefined option for the template element name Once this command has been used users can access the predefined template using the setbeamertemplate command Example defbeamertemplate itemize item double arrow Rightarrow After the above command has been invoked the following two commands will have the same effect setbeamertemplate itemize item Rightarrow setbeamertemplate itemize item double arrow Sometimes a predefined template needs to get an argument when it is installed Suppose for example we want to define a predefined template that draws a square as the itemize item and we want to make this size of this square configurab
116. alerted text beginfalertenv lt overlay specification gt environment contents end alertenv Environment version of the alert command Beamer Template alerted text begin This text is inserted at the beginning of a an alertenv environment The following template options are predefined e default PRESEN This changes the color local structure to alerted text This causes things like buttons or TATION items to be colored in the same color as the alerted text which is often visually pleasing See also the structure command ARTICLE The text is emphasized Beamer Template alerted text end This text is inserted at the end of an alertenv environment 11 3 Block Environments The BEAMER class predefines an environment for typesetting a block of text that has a heading The appearance of blocks can easily be changed using the following template Parent Beamer Template blocks Changining this parent template changes the templates of normal blocks alerted blocks and example blocks Example setbeamertemplate blocks default Example setbeamertemplate blocks rounded shadow true The following template options are predefined e default The default setting typesets the block title on its own line If a background is specified either for the block title or for the block body this background color is used as background of the title or body respectively For alerted and example blocks the corresponding BEAMER col
117. always brings you to the end of a slide regardless from where you come Parent Beamer Template mini frames This parent template has the children mini frame and mini frame in current subsection Example setbeamertemplate mini frames box The following template options are predefined 51 e default shows small circles as mini frames e box shows small rectangles as mini frames e tick shows small vertical bars as mini frames Beamer Template Color Font mini frame The template is used to render the mini frame of the current frame in a navigation bar The width of the template is ignored Instead when multiple mini frames are shown their position is calculated based on the BEAMER sizes mini frame size and mini frame offset See the command setbeamersize for a description of how to change them Beamer Template mini frame in current subsection This template is used to render the mini frame of frames in the current subsection that are not the current frame The BEAMER color font mini frame is installed prior to the usage of this template is invoked Beamer Template mini frame in other subsection This template is used to render mini frames of frame from subsections other than the current one The following template options are predefined e default percentage By default this template shows mini frame in current subsection except that the color is first changed to fg percentage bg The default percentage is 50 E
118. ame frametitle A Title begin itemstep item Hi item Ho end itemstep end frame fromSlide slide number text This is mapped to uncover lt slide number gt text fromSlide slide number text This is mapped to only lt slide number gt text onlySlide slide number H text This is mapped to Muncover lt slide number gt text onlySlide slide number text This is mapped to only lt slide number gt teat untilSlide slide number text This is mapped to uncover lt slide number gt tezt untilsSlide slide number text This is mapped to only lt slide number gt teat FromSlide slide number This is mapped to onslide lt slide number gt MOn1ySlidet slide number This is mapped to onslide lt slide number gt UntilSlide slide number This is mapped to onslide lt slide number gt slideCaption tezt This is mapped to date text fontTitle text Simply inserts tezt fontText tezt Simply inserts tezt PDFtransition prosper transition Maps the prosper transition to an appropriate transxxxx command begin Itemize environment contents end Itemize This is mapped to itemize begin fitemstep environment contents 185 end itemstep This is mapped to itemize with the option lt gt begin fenumstep environment contents end enumstep
119. ame will not be included againframe example1 Will be included 28 LYX LYX 4 4 Step Four Create Frames Once the table of contents looks satisfactory start creating frames for your presentation by adding frame environments You ll find guidelines on what to put on a frame in Section 5 1 3 To create a frame use the style BeginFrame The frame title is given on the line of this style The frame ends automatically with the start of the next frame with a section or subsection command and with an empty line in the style EndFrame Note that the last frame of your presentation must be ended using EndFrame and that the last frame before the appendix must be ended this way 4 5 Step Five Test Your Presentation Always test your presentation For this you should vocalize or subvocalize your talk in a quiet environment Typically this will show that your talk is too long You should then remove parts of the presentation such that it fits into the allotted time slot Do not attempt to talk faster in order to squeeze the talk into the given amount of time You are almost sure to loose your audience this way Do not try to create the perfect presentation immediately Rather test and retest the talk and modify it as needed 4 6 Step Six Optionally Create a Handout or an Article Version Once your talk is fixed you can create a handout if this seems appropriate For this use the class option handout as explai
120. and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change 15 b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands inter
121. ans depends on the command Consider the following example begin frame textbf This line is bold on all three slides textbf lt 2 gt This line is bold only on the second slide textbf lt 3 gt This line is bold only on the third slide end frame For the command textbf the overlay specification causes the text to be set in boldface only on the specified slides On all other slides the text is set in a normal font For a second example consider the following frame begin frame only lt 1 gt This line is inserted only on slide 1 only lt 2 gt This line is inserted only on slide 2 end frame The command only which is introduced by BEAMER normally simply inserts its parameter into the current frame However if an overlay specification is present it throws away its parameter on slides that are not mentioned Overlay specifications can only be written behind certain commands not every command Which com mands you can use and which effects this will have is explained in the next section However it is quite easy to redefine an existing command such that it becomes overlay specification aware see also Section 8 3 The syntax of basic overlay specifications is the following They are comma separated lists of slides and ranges Ranges are specified like this 2 5 which means slide two through to five The start or the end of a range can be omitted For example 3 means slides three four five and so
122. as normalcolor The background of this color is used by the default background canvas for the background of the presentation see Section 7 2 7 The background is also the default value of the normal color bg Since the color is the root of all other BEAMER colors both a foreground and a background must be installed In particular to get a transparent background canvas make the background of the BEAMER color background canvas empty not the background of this color The BEAMER font currently is not used In particular redefining this font will not have any effect This is likely to change in the future 168 Beamer Color Font example text The color font is used when text is typeset inside an example block Beamer Color Font titlelike This color font is a more specialized form of the structure color font It is the base for all elements that are like titles This includes the frame title and subtitle as well as the document title and subtitle Beamer Color separation line The foreground of this color is used for separating lines If the foreground is empty no separation line is drawn Beamer Color upper separation line head Color parents separation line Special case for the uppermost separation line in a headline Beamer Color middle separation line head Color parents separation line Special case for the middle separation line in a headline Beamer Color lower separation line head Color parents separ
123. associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 16 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or
124. at a Later Point Sometimes you may wish some slides of a frame to be shown in your main talk but wish some supplemen tary slides of the frame to be shown only in the the appendix In this case the againframe commands is useful againframe lt overlay specification gt lt default overlay specification gt options name PRESEN Resumes a frame that was previously created using frame with the option label name You must TATION have used this option just placing a label inside a frame by hand is not enough You can use this command to continue a frame that has been interrupted by another frame The effect of this command is to call the frame command with the given overlay specification default overlay specification if present and options if present and with the original frame s contents Example frame lt 1 2 gt label myframe begin itemize item lt alert 1 gt First subject item lt alert 2 gt Second subject item lt alert 3 gt Third subject end itemize frame Some stuff explaining more on the second matter againframe lt 3 gt myframe The effect of the above code is to create four slides In the first two the items 1 and 2 are hilighted The third slide contains the text Some stuff explaining more on the second matter The fourth slide is identical to the first two slides except that the third point is now hilighted Example frame lt 1 gt la
125. at the young boy slowly becomes the man 5 4 Choosing Appropriate Themes BEAMER comes with a number of different themes When choosing a theme keep the following in mind e Different themes are appropriate for different occasions Do not become too attached to a favorite theme choose a theme according to occasion e A longer talk is more likely to require navigational hints than a short one When you give a 90 minute lecture to students you should choose a theme that always shows a sidebar with the current topic hilighted so that everyone always knows exactly what s the current status of your talk is when you give a ten minute introductory speech a table of contents is likely to just seem silly e A theme showing the author s name and affiliation is appropriate in situation where the audience is likely not to know you like during a conference Tf everyone knows you having your name on each slide is just vanity e First choose a presentation theme that has a layout that is appropriate for your talk e Next you might wish to change the colors by installing a different color theme This can drastically change the appearance of your presentation A colorful theme like Berkeley will look much less flashy if you use the color themes seahorse and lily e You might also wish to change the fonts by installing a different font theme 5 5 Choosing Appropriate Colors e Use colors sparsely The prepared themes are already qu
126. ate itemize item code for showing a ballot setbeamertemplate itemize subitem code for showing a smaller ballot setbeamertemplate itemize subsubitem code for showing a smaller ballot setbeamertemplate itemize item code for showing a check mark setbeamertemplate itemize subitem code for showing a smaller check mark setbeamertemplate itemize subsubitem code for showing a smaller check mark The effect of the code is to install a check mark as the default template If the action ballot is now requested for some item this template will temporarily be replaced by the ballot templates Note that the ballotenv is invoked with the overlay specification given for the action directly following it This causes the only to be invoked exactly for the specified overlays Here are example usages begin itemize item lt 1 ballot 1 gt First point item lt 2 ballot 2 gt Second point item lt 3 ballot 3 gt Third point end itemize and begin itemize lt ballot gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize In the following example more and more items become checked from slide to slide begin itemize lt ballot visible 1 1 gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize The important point is ballot The funny visible 1 1 has the following effect Although it has no effect with respect to what is shown after all
127. ate subsection in head foot shaded default 20 Beamer Template Color Font subsection in sidebar This template behaves exactly like section in sidebar only for subsections Beamer Template subsection in head foot shaded This template behaves exactly like section in sidebar shaded only for subsections By clicking on the document title in a navigation bar not all themes show it you will jump to the first slide of your presentation usually the title page except if you are already at the first slide On the first slide clicking on the document title will jump to the end of the presentation if there is one Thus by double clicking the document title in a navigation bar you can jump to the end 53 7 2 4 The Navigation Symbols Navigation symbols are small icons that are shown on every slide by default The following symbols are shown 1 7 8 A slide icon which is depicted as a single rectangle To the left and right of this symbol a left and right arrow are shown A frame icon which is depicted as three slide icons stacked on top of each other This symbol is framed by arrows A subsection icon which is depicted as a highlighted subsection entry in a table of contents This symbols is framed by arrows A section icon which is depicted as a highlighted section entry together with all subsections in a table of contents This symbol is framed by arrows A presentation icon which is depic
128. ation line Special case for the lower separation line in a headline Beamer Color upper separation line foot Color parents separation line Special case for the uppermost separation line in a footline Beamer Color middle separation line foot Color parents separation line Special case for the middle separation line in a footline Beamer Color lower separation line foot Color parents separation line Special case for the lower separation line in a footline 17 6 Transparency Effects By default covered items are not shown during a presentation Thus if you write uncover lt 2 gt Text the text is not shown on any but the second slide On the other slide the text is not simply printed using the background color it is not shown at all This effect is most useful if your background does not have a uniform color Sometimes however you might prefer that covered items are not completely covered Rather you would like them to be shown already in a very dim or shaded way This allows your audience to get a feeling for what is yet to come without getting distracted by it Also you might wish text that is covered once more still to be visible to some degree Ideally there would be an option to make covered text transparent This would mean that when covered text is shown it would instead be mixed with the background behind it Unfortunately pgf does not support real transparency yet Instead transparency is created b
129. ault 25 of the foreground of the BEAMER color palette primary is used bottom color specifies the color at the bottom of the sidebar more precisely at a distance of the page height below the top of the sidebar By default the background of normal text at the moment of invocation of this command is used middle color specifies the color for the middle of the sidebar Thus if this option is given the shading changes from the bottom color to this color and then to the top color midpoint factor specifies at which point of the page the middle color is used A factor of 0 is the bottom of the page a factor of 1 is the top The default which is 0 5 is in the middle Note that you must give real IXT X colors here This often makes it necessary to invoke the command usebeamercolor before this command can be used Also note that the width of the sidebar should be setup before this option is used Example A stylish but not very useful shading usebeamercolor palette primary setbeamertemplate sidebar canvas vertical shading top palette primary bg middle white bottom palette primary bg e horizontal shading color options installs a horizontally shaded background The following color options may be given left color specifies the color at the left of the sidebar right color specifies the color at the right of the sidebar middle color specifies the color in the middle of the sidebar
130. avigation symbols Inside this template the following inserts are useful e insertslidenavigationsymbol Inserts the slide navigation symbols that is the slide symbols a rectangle together with arrows to the left and right that are hyperlinked e insertframenavigationsymbol Inserts the frame navigation symbol e insertsubsectionnavigationsymbol Inserts the subsection navigation symbol e insertsectionnavigationsymbol Inserts the section navigation symbol e insertdocnavigationsymbol Inserts the presentation navigation symbol and if necessary the appendix navigation symbol e insertbackfindforwardnavigationsymbol Inserts a back a find and a forward navigation sym bol 7 2 5 The Logo To install a logo use the following command Mogot logo text ARTICLE The logo text is usually a command for including a graphic but it can be any text The position where the logo is inserted is determined by the current theme you cannot currently specify this position directly Example pgfdeclareimage height 0 5cm logo tu logo logo pgfuseimage logo Example logo includegraphics height 0 5cm logo pdf Currently the effect of this command is just to setup the logo template However a more sophisticated effect might be implemented in the future This command has no effect Beamer Template Color Font logo This template is used to render the logo The following insert can be used to insert a logo somewh
131. ay specification gt frame subtitle text If present a subtitle will be shown in a smaller font below the main title Like the frametitle command this command can be given anywhere in the frame since the frame title is actually typeset only when everything else has already been typeset 56 Example begin frame frametitle lt presentation gt Frame Title Should Be in Uppercase framesubtitle Subtitles can be in lowercase if they are full sentences Frame contents end frame ARTICLE By default the subtitle is not shown in any way in article mode Beamer Color Font framesubtitle Color font parents frametitle This element provides a color and a font for the subtitle but no template It is the job of the frametitle template to also typeset the subtitle Be default all material for a slide is vertically centered You can change this using the following class options documentclass t beamer Place text of slides at the vertical top of the slides This corresponds to a vertical flush You can override this for individual frames using the c or b option documentclass c beamer Place text of slides at the vertical center of the slides This is the default You can override this for individual frames using the t or b option 7 2 7 The Background Each frame has a background which as the name suggests is behind everything The background is a surprisingly complex object in BEAMER
132. be anything between 2 minutes and two hours e A simple rule for the number of frames is that you should have at most one frame per minute e In most situations you will have less time for your presentation that you would like e Do not try to squeeze more into a presentation than time allows for No matter how important some detail seems to you it is better to leave it out but get the main message across than getting neither the main message nor the detail across In many situations a quick appraisal of how much time you have will show that you won t be able to mention certain details Knowing this can save you hours of work on preparing slides that you would have to remove later anyway 5 1 2 Global Structure To create the global structure of a presentation with the time constraints in mind proceed as follows e Make a mental inventory of the things you can reasonably talk about within the time available e Categorize the inventory into sections and subsections e For very long talks like a 90 minute lecture you might also divide your talk into independent parts like a review of the previous lecture part and a main part using the part command Note that each part has its own table of contents e Do not feel afraid to change the structure later on as you work on the talk Parts Section and Subsections e Do not use more than four sections and not less than two per part Even four sections are usually too
133. be given usetheme Darmstadt Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There is no largest prime number There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p O Results e Proof of the Main Theorem A theme with a strong separation into a navigational upper part and an informational main part By using a different color theme this separation can be lessened usetheme Frankfurt Example Results There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Q Results Proof of the Main Theorem A variation on the Darmstadt theme that is slightly less cluttered by leaving out the subsection infor mation 140 usetheme Singapore Example Results There Is No Largest P
134. bel Cantor frametitle Main Theorem begin Theorem alpha lt 2 alpha for all ordinals alpha end Theorem begin overprint onslide lt 1 gt hyperlink Cantor lt 2 gt beamergotobutton Proof details onslide lt 2 gt this is only shown in the appendix where this frame is resumed begin proof As shown by Cantor end proof hfill hyperlink Cantor lt 1 gt beamerreturnbutton Return end foverprint appendix againframe lt 2 gt Cantor In this example the proof details are deferred to a slide in the appendix Hyperlinks are setup so that one can jump to the proof and go back 88 ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode Lyx Use the style AgainFrame to insert an againframe command The label name is the text on following the style name and is not put in TRX mode However an overlay specification must be given in T X mode and it must precede the label name 10 3 Adding Anticipated Zooming Anticipated zooming is necessary when you have a very complicated graphic that you are not willing to sim plify since indeed all the complex details merit an explanation In this case use the command framezoon It allows you to specify that clicking on a certain area of a frame should zoom out this area You can then explain the details Clicking on the zoomed out picture will take you back to the original one framezoom lt button overlay specification gt lt zoomed overlay specifi
135. bstract gives a short summary of the whole paper in about 100 words This summary is intend to help readers appraise whether they should read the whole paper or not e Since you audience is unlikely to flee after the first slide in a presentation you usually do not need to present an abstract e However if you can give a nice succinct statement of your talk you might wish to include an abstract e If you include an abstract be sure that it is not some long text but just a very short message e Never ever reuse a paper abstract for a presentation except if the abstract is We show P NP or We show P 4 NP e If your abstract is one of the above two double check whether your proof is correct Numbered Theorems and Definitions A common way of globally structuring math articles and books is to use consecutively numbered definitions and theorems Unfortunately for presentations the situation is a bit more complicated and 1 would like to discourage using numbered theorems in presentations The audience has no chance of remembering these numbers Never say things like now by Theorem 2 5 that I showed you earlier we have It would be much better to refer to say Kummer s Theorem instead of Theorem 2 5 If Theorem 2 5 is some obscure theorem that does not have its own name unlike Kummer s Theorem or Main Theorem or Second Main Theorem or Key Lemma then the audience will have forgotten about it anyway by the time you refe
136. by no means perfect end itemstep end slide section Second Section subsection A subsection begin frame frametitle A frame created using the texttt frame environment begin itemize lt gt item You can still use the original beamer syntax item The emulation is intended only to make recycling slides easier not to install a whole new syntax for beamer end itemize end frame begin notes Notes for these slides My notes for these slides end notes end document 183 You can run for example pdfl4T X on the file to get a BEAMER presentation with overlays Adding the notes option will also show the note Certain commands like LeftFoot are ignored You can change the theme using the usual commands You can also use all normal BEAMER commands and concepts like overlay specifications in the file You can also create an article version by using the class article and including the package beamerarticle In the following the effect of PROSPER commands in BEAMER are listed email text Simply typesets its argument in typewriter text Should hence be given inside the author command institution tert This command is mapped to BEAMER s institute command if given outside the author command otherwise it typesets its argument in a smaller font Logo x y logo text This is mapped to logo logo tert The coordinates are ignored begin slides options frame title en
137. cation gt options upper left x upper left y zoom area width zoom area depth This command should be given somewhere at the beginning of a frame When given two different things will happen depending on whether the button overlay specification applies to the current slide of the frame or whether the zoomed overlay specification applies These overlay specifications should not overlap If the button overlay specification applies a clickable are is created inside the frame The size of this area is given by zoom area width and zoom area depth which are two normal T X dimensions like 1cm or 20pt The upper left corner of this area is given by upper left x and upper left y which are also TFX dimensions They are measures relative to the place where the first normal text of a frame would go Thus the location 0pt 0pt is at the beginning of the normal text which excludes the headline and also the frame title By default the button is clickable but it will not be indicated in any special way You can draw a border around the button by using the following option e border width in pixels will draw a border around the specified button area The default width is 1 pixel The color of this button is the linkbordercolor of hyperref BEAMER sets this color to a 50 gray by default To change this you can use the command hypersetup linkbordercolor red green blue where red green and blue are val
138. ct also 315 All of these commands are ignored in article mode You must insert these commands using TRX mode transblindshorizontal lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide as if horizontal blinds where pulled away Example transblindshorizontal 119 transblindsvertical lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide as if vertical blinds where pulled away Example transblindsvertical lt 2 3 gt transboxin lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by moving to the center from all four sides Example transboxin lt 1 gt transboxout lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by showing more and more of a rectangular area that is centered on the slide center Example transboxout transdissolve lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by slowly dissolving what was shown before Example transdissolve duration 0 2 transglitter lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide with a glitter effect that sweeps in the specified direction Example transglitter lt 2 3 gt direction 90 transsplitverticalin lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping two vertical lines from the sides inward Example transsplitverticalin transsplitverticalout lt overlay specification gt options Show the slide by sweeping two vertical lines from the center outward Example transsplitverticalout transsplithorizontalin lt
139. ction The colors are drawn from title in head foot section in head foot and subsection in head foot In addition separation lines of height 3pt are shown above and below the three lines if the background of separation line is set More fine grained control of the colors of these lines can be gained by setting upper separation line head and lower separation line head The following options may be given e hooks causes little hooks to be drawn in front of the section and subsection entries These are supposed to increase the tree like appearance useoutertheme smoothtree Example There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics A University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This layout is similar to the tree layout The main difference is that the background colors change smoothly 16 3 Changing the Templates Used for Different Elements of a Presentation This section explains how BEAMER s template management works 16 3 1 Overview of Beamer
140. cture fg 50 normal text fg 166 However this will not necessarily give the desired result If the BEAMER color structure changes the normal color structure fg is not immediately updated In order to ensure that the normal color structure fg is correct use the following setbeamercolor item use structure normal text fg structure fg 50 normal text fg This will guarantee that the colors structure fg and normal text fg are setup correctly when the foreground of item is computed To show the difference consider the following example setbeamercolor grandfather fg red setbeamercolor grandmother bg white setbeamercolor father parent grandfather grandmother setbeamercolor mother fg black usebeamercolor father usebeamercolor mother hh Defines father fg and mother fg globally setbeamercolor my color A fg father fg 50 mother fg setbeamercolor my color B use father mother fg father fg 50 mother fg usebeamercolor fg my color A dark red text usebeamercolor fg my color b also dark red text setbeamercolor grandfather fg green usebeamercolor fg my color A still dark red text usebeamercolor fg my color b now dark green text 17 3 The Color of Mathematical Text By default mathematical text does not have any special color it just inherits the surrounding color Some people prefer mathematical text to have some special color Though I do not recommend this I think mathemat
141. d end inserttheoremblockenv The following inserts are available inside this template e inserttheoremblockenv This will normally expand to block but if a theorem that has theorem style example is typeset it will expand to exampleblock Thus you can use this insert to decide which environment should be used when typesetting the theorem e inserttheoremheadfont This will expand to a font changing command that switches to the font to be used in the head of the theorem By not inserting it you can ignore the head font e inserttheoremname This will expand to the name of the environment to be typeset like Theo rem or Corollary e inserttheoremnumber This will expand to the number of the current theorem preceeded by a space or to nothing if the current theorem does not have a number e inserttheoremaddition This will expand to the optional argument given to the environment or will be empty if there was no optional argument e inserttheorempunctuation This will expand to the punctuation character for the current envi ronment This is usually a period Beamer Template theorem end Inserted at the end of a theorem 102 11 5 Framed and Boxed Text In order to draw a frame a rectangle around some text you can use TATEXs standard command fbox and also frame inside a BEAMER frame the frame command changes its meaning to the normal ATEX frame command More frame types are offered by the package fancybox
142. d specifying normalsize Making the size attribute empty means that the font size should not be changed when this font is used while specifying normalsize means that the size should be set to the normal size whenever this font is used 176 size 1 size in pt H baselineskip sets the size attribute of the font to the given size in pt and the baseline skip to the given value Note that depending on what kind of font you use not all font sizes may be available Also certain font sizes are much less desirable than other ones the standard commands take care of choosing appropriate sizes for you Do not use this options unless you have a good reason This command has the same effect as size fontsize size in pt H baselineskip shape shape command sets the shape attribute of the font The command should be command like Nitshape slshape scshape or upshape shapex 1 shape attribute abbreviation sets the shape attribute of the font using the PTE X s abbreviations for attributes This command has the same effect as shape fontshape shape attributes abbreviation series series command sets the series attribute of the font The command should be com mand like bfseries series series attribute abbreviation has the same effect as series fontseries series attributes abbreviation FF family family command sets the font family attribute The command should be a FXTEX font command like rmfami
143. d the extension eps When using graphics do add the extension If you have a eps graphic and wish to use pdflatex you can use the program ps2pdf to convert the graphic to a pdf file Note however that it is often a better idea to directly generate a pdf if the program that produced the eps supports this 12 3 Including Graphic Files Ending pdf jpg jpeg or png The four formats pdf jpg jpeg and png can only be included by pdflatex As before do not add these extension when using pgf but do add them when using graphics If your graphic file has any of these formats and you wish must you latex and dvips you have to convert your graphic to eps first 12 4 Including Graphic Files Ending mps A graphic file ending mps MetaPost PostScript is a special kind of Encapsulated PostScript file Files in this format are produced by the MetaPost program As you know T X is a program that converts simple plain text into beautifully typeset documents The MetaPost program is similar only it converts simple plain text into beautiful graphics The MetaPost program converts a plain text file ending mp into an mps file although for some unfath omable reason the extension is not added The mp file must contain text written in the MetaFont pro gramming language Since mps files are actually also eps files you can use the normal includegraphics command to include them However as a special bonus you can also include such an file
144. d to change the inner colors installed by a presentation theme or another color theme they should obviously be specified after the other theme has been loaded Inner color themes happen to have flower names usecolortheme lily Example There Is No There Is No Largest Prime gedim There Is No Largest Prime Number Number Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Proof ot the Main Theorem Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme is mainly used to uninstall any block colors setup by another theme restoring the colors used in the default theme In particular using this theme will remove all background colors for blocks usecolorthemeforchid Example Gelin urges Pme There Is No Largest Prime Number Number ee The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique ec There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also pri
145. determined as follows Their width is always the paper width Their height is determined by tentatively typesetting the headline and the footline right after the begin document command The head of the headline and the footline at that point is frozen and will be used throughout the whole document even if the headline and footline vary in height later on which they should not The appearance of the headline and footline is determined by the following templates 46 Beamer Template Color Font headline This template is used to typeset the headline The BEAMER color and font headline are installed at the beginning The background of the BEAMER color is not used by default that is no background rectangle is drawn behind the headline and footline this may change in the future with the introduction of a headline and a footline canvas The width of the headline is the whole paper width The height is determined automatically as described above The headline is typeset in vertical mode with interline skip turned off and the paragraph skip set to zero Inside this template the command is changed such that it inserts a comma instead Example setbeamertemplate headline 7 begin beamercolorbox section in head foot vskip2pt insertnavigation paperwidth vskip2pt end beamercolorbox The following template options are predefined e default The default is just an empty headline To get the default headline of earli
146. distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automati cally receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this sectio
147. does not fit on one frame you should split it create a new frame and a second thebibliography environment or use the allowframebreaks option Even better you should reconsider whether it is a good idea to present so many references Example begin frame frametitle For Further Reading begin thebibliography Dijkstra 1982 bibitem Solomaa 1973 Solomaai973 A Salomaa newblock em Formal Languages newblock Academic Press 1973 bibitem Dijkstra 1982 Dijkstra1982 E Dijkstra newblock Smoothsort an alternative for sorting in situ newblock em Science of Computer Programming 1 3 223 233 1982 end thebibliography end frame Four templates govern the appearance of the author title journal and note text These author tem plates are inserted before the first block of the entry the first block is all text before the first occurrence of a newblock command The title template is inserted before the second block the text between the first and second occurrence of newblock Likewise for the journal and note templates The templates are inserted before the blocks and you do not have access to the blocks themselves via insert commands The corresponding BEAMER color and font are also installed before the blocks Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry author This template is inserted before the author of a bibliography entry The color and font are also installed Note that the effect of this tem
148. e 2 2 ee 19 5 Uncovering a Table Linewise ee 19 6 Uncovering a Table Columnwise 2 2 0 ee How To Import Presentations Based on Other Packages and Classes 20 1 Prosper ard HA Prosp r s 62 2 ee eae ROE Pe wee eS 20 2 Seminar A A att a oe A Re Bed eR eo o O A 203 FOUTRX 24 ELA So a A we AR AR A A a A 20 4 TEX Power u s si6 4 didi Gop eat A a re a es ee dd to 132 132 133 135 137 139 141 143 144 144 146 151 151 153 153 157 157 157 159 162 163 164 164 164 166 167 167 168 169 171 171 174 174 175 175 175 175 176 176 178 179 179 179 180 180 181 181 Index 194 1 Introduction BEAMER is a TFX class for creating presentations that are held using a projector but it can also be used to create transparency slides Preparing presentations with BEAMER is different from preparing them with WYSIWYG programs like OpenOffice s Impress Apple s Keynotes or KOffice s KPresenter A BEAMER presentation is created like any other TX document It has a preamble and a body the body contains sections and subsections the different slides called frames in BEAMER are put in environments they are structured using itemize and enumerate environments and so on The obvious disadvantage of this approach is that you have to know IXTRX in order to use BEAMER The advantage is that if you know ATFX you can use your knowledge of ATFX also when creating a presentati
149. e This option will cause the text of the frame to be shrunken if it is too large to fit on the frame BEAMER will first normally typeset the whole frame Then it has a look at vertical size of the frame text excluding the frame title If this vertical size is larger than the text height minus the frame title height BEAMER computes a shrink factor and scales down the frame text by this factor such that the frame text then fills the frame completely Using this option will automatically cause the squeeze option to be used also Since the shrinking takes place only after everything has been typeset shrunken frame text will not fill the frame completely horizontally For this reason you can specify a minimum shrink percentage like 20 If this percentage is specified the frame will be shrunk by at least by this percentage Since BEAMER knows this it can increase the horizontal width proportionally such that the shrunken text once more fills the entire frame If however the percentage is not enough the text will be shrunken as needed and you will be punished with a warning message The best way to use this option is to identify frames that are overly full but in which all text absolutely has to be fit on a single frame Then start specifying first shrink 5 then shrink 10 and so on until no warning is issued any more or just ignore the warning when things look satisfactory Using this option is very evil It will result in changes of the font
150. e overlay specification is present the entry will only be shown on the specified slides Example bibitem Dijkstra 1982 Dijkstra1982 E Dijkstra newblock Smoothsort an alternative for sorting in situ newblock em Science of Computer Programming 1 3 223 233 1982 Beamer Template Color Font bibliography item Color font parents item This template is used to render the bibliography item Unlike normal TFX the default template for the bibliography does not repeat the citation text like Dijkstra 1982 before each item in the bibliography Instead a cute small article symbol is drawn The rationale is that the audience will not be able to remember any abbreviated citation texts till the end of the talk The following template options are predefined e default Draws a cute little article icon as the reference Use this for journal articles parts of books like conference proceedings or technical reports e article Alias for the default e book Draws a cute little book icon as the reference Use this for well books e triangle Draws a triangle as the reference This is more in keeping with the standard itemize items e text Uses the reference text like Dijkstra 1982 as the reference text Be sure you what you are doing if you use this The following insert is useful for the template e insertbiblabel inserts the current citation label 9 7 Adding an Appendix You can add an appendix to your
151. e tableofcontents currentsection subsection Foo frame section Topic B frame tableofcontents currentsection subsection bar frame end document partpage Works like titlepage only that the current part not the current presentation is advertised Example frame partpage Beamer Template Color Font part page This template is invoked when the partpage command is used The following template options are predefined e default alignment The part page is typeset showing the current part number and be low the current part title The BEAMER color and font part page are used including the background color of part page As for the title page template the alignment option is passed on the beamercolorbox 78 The following commands are useful for this template e insertpart inserts the current part name e insertpartnumber inserts the current part number as an Arabic number into a template e insertpartromannumber inserts the current part number as a Roman number into a template AtBeginPart text The given text will be inserted at the beginning of every part Example AtBeginPart frame partpage 9 4 Splitting a Course Into Lectures When using BEAMER with the article mode you may wish to have the lecture notes of a whole course reside in one file In this case only a few frames are actually part of any particular lecture The lecture command makes it easy to select only a
152. e a little talk of its own with its own table of contents its own navigation bars and so on Inside one part the sections and subsections of the other parts are not shown at all To create a new part use the part command All sections and subsections following this command will be local to that part Like the section and subsection command the part command does not cause any frame or special text to be produced However it is often advisable for the start of a new part to use the command partpage to insert some text into a frame that advertises the beginning of a new part See beamerexample3 tex for an example part lt mode specification gt short part name part name Starts a part The part name will be shown when the partpage command is used The shown part name is not shown anywhere by default but it is accessible via the command insertshortpart Example begin document frame titlepage section Outlines subsection Part I Review of Previous Lecture frame frametitle Outline of Part I tableofcontents part 1 subsection Part II Today s Lecture frame frametitle Outline of Part II tableofcontents part 2 part Review of Previous Lecture frame partpage section Previous Lecture Summary of the Previous Lecture subsection Topics framef subsection Learning Objectives framef part Today s Lecture frame partpage section Topic A fram
153. e beginning of every lecture Example AtBeginLecture frame Large Today s Lecture insertlecture ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode 79 9 5 Adding a Table of Contents You can create a table of contents using the command tableofcontents Unlike the normal BT X table of contents command this command takes an optional parameter in square brackets that can be used to create certain special effects Wtableof contents comma separated option list Inserts a table of contents into the current frame Example section Outline frame tableofcontents section Introduction frame tableofcontents currentsection subsection Why frame frame subsection Where frame section Results frame tableofcontents currentsection subsection Because frame subsection Here frame The following options can be given currentsection causes all sections but the current to be shown in a semi transparent way Also all subsections but those in the current section are shown in the semi transparent way This command is a shorthand for specifying the following options sectionstyle show shaded subsectionstyle show show shaded currentsubsection causes all subsections but the current subsection in the current section to be shown in a semi transparent way This command is a shorthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle show shaded firstsection section
154. e directories like texmf tex latex beamer with the files of the new version The easiest way to do this is to first delete the old version and then proceed as described above Sometimes there are changes in the syntax of certain command from version to version If things no longer work that used to work you wish to have a look at the release notes and at the change log 2 5 Testing the Installation To test your installation copy the file beamerexample1 tex from the examples subdirectory to some place where you usually create presentations Then run the command pdf latex several times on the file and check whether the resulting beamerexample1 pdf looks correct If so you are all set To test the LyX installation create a new file from the template generic ornate 15min 45min en lyx which is located in the directory beamer solutions generic talks 2 6 Compatibility with Other Packages and Classes When using certain packages or classes together with the beamer class extra options or precautions may be necessary usepackage AlDraTex Graphics created using AlDraTex must be treated like verbatim text The reason is that DraTex fiddles with catcodes and spaces much like verbatim does So in order to insert a picture either add the containsverbatim option to the frame or use the defverbatim command to create a box containing the picture usepackage alltt Text in an alltt environment must be treated like verbatim text So add the contai
155. e directory If you use an extra directory for each presentation you can call your main file main tex To create an initial main tex file for your talk copy an existing file from the beamer solutions directory and adapt it to your needs A list of possible BEAMER solutions that contain templates for presentation TEX files can be found below If you wish your talk to reside in the same file as some different non presentation article version of your text it is advisable to setup a more elaborate file scheme See Section 14 4 2 for details You can either open a new file and then select beamer as the document class or you say New from template and then use a template from the directory beamer solutions 4 2 Step Two Structure Your Presentation The next step is to fill the presentation file with section and subsection to create a preliminary outline You ll find some hints on how to create a good outline in Section 5 1 Put section and subsection commands into the more or less empty main file Do not create any frames until you have a first working version of a possible table of contents The file might look like this documentclass beamer This is the file main tex usetheme Berlin title Example Presentation Created with the Beamer Package author Till Tantau date today begin document begin frame titlepage end frame section Outline begin frame tableofcontents end frame section Introduc
156. e not installed automatically by the insertcaptionname command 11 7 Splitting a Frame into Multiple Columns The BEAMER class offers several commands and environments for splitting perhaps only part of a frame into multiple columns These commands have nothing to do with BTEX s commands for creating columns Columns are especially useful for placing a graphic next to a description explanation The main environment for creating columns is called columns Inside this environment you can either place several column environments each of which creates a new column or use the column command to create new columns begin columns options environment contents end columns A multi column area Inside the environment you should place only column environments or column commands see below The following options may be given e b will cause the bottom lines of the columns to be vertically aligned e c will cause the columns to be centered vertically relative to each other Default unless the global option t is used e onlytextwidth is the same as totalwidth textwidth t will cause the first lines of the columns to be aligned Default if global option t is used totalwidth width will cause the columns to occupy not the whole page width but only width all told Example begin columns t begin column 5cm Two lines end column begin column 5cm One line but aligned end column end columns Example
157. e somewhat fragile since the collecting of the frame contents is not easy so do not attempt anything too fancy If for whatever reason the frame environment has a problem with some contents it might help to try using the frame command instead For compatibility with earlier versions you can also give an overlay specification in square brackets If the sole argument to the frame command is an argument in square brackets the BEAMER class will try to check whether this argument looks like an overlay specification If so it is assumed to be an overlay specification 7 2 Components of a Frame Each frame consists of several components 1 a headline and a footline a left and a right sidebar navigation bars navigation symbols a logo a frame title a background and some frame contents CoN Oe ee eS A frame need not have all of these components Usually the first three components are automatically setup by the theme you are using 7 2 1 The Headline and Footline The headline of a frame is the area at the top of the frame If it is not empty it should show some information that helps the audience orientate itself during your talk Likewise the footline is the area at the bottom of the frame BEAMER does not use the standard BIEX mechanisms for typesetting the headline and the footline Instead the special headline and footline templates are used to typeset them The size of the headline and the footline is
158. e that is included to a name ending pdf png or jpg Typically you will have to convert your graphic to this format onlyInPDF PDF text The PDF text is only included if pdflatex is used The same as for the command PDForPS applies here VonlyInPS PS text The PS text is only included if latex is used begin notes title environment contents end notes Mapped to note textbf title environment contents more or less The following commands are parsed by BEAMER but have no effect nyitem FontTitle FontText ColorFoot DefaultTransition NoFrenchBabellItemize TitleSlideNav NormalSlideNav HAPsetup LeftFoot and RightFoot 186 20 2 Seminar The package beamerseminar maps a subset of the commands of the SEMINAR package to BEAMER As for PROSPER the emulation cannot be perfect For example no portrait slides are supported no automatic page breaking the framing of slides is not emulated Unfortunately for all frames slide environments that contain overlays you have to put the environment into a frame environment by hand and must remove all occurrences of newslide inside the environment by closing the slide and opening a new one and then putting these into frame environments The workflow for the migration is the following l 10 Use the document class beamer not seminar Most options passed to seminar do not apply to beamer and should be omitted If yo
159. e the current section to be suppressed and only the current subsection in the current section to be hilighted The last examples are useful if you do not wish to show too many details when presenting the talk outline ARTICLE The options are ignored in article mode Lyx You can give options to the Xtableof contents command by inserting a TeX mode text with the options in square brackets directly after the table of contents Parent Beamer Template sections subsections in toc This is a parent template whose children are section in toc and subsection in toc This means that if you use the setbeamertemplate command on this template the command is instead called for both of these children with the same arguments The following template options are predefined e default In the default setting the sections and subsections are typeset using the fonts and colors section in toc and subsection in toc though the background colors are ignored The subsections are indented e sections numbered Similar to the default setting but the section numbers are also shown The subsections are not numbered e subsections numbered This time the subsections are numbered but not the sections Nev ertheless since the subsections are fully numbered as in 1 2 or 3 2 if every section has at least one subsection the section numbered will not really be missed e circle Draws little circles before the sections Inside the circles the secti
160. e theorem environment except that the theorem style example is used A side effect of using this theorem style is that the environment contents is put in an exampleblock instead of a block The environment examples behaves exactly the same way The default template for typesetting theorems suppresses the theorem number even if this number is avail able for typesetting which it is by default in all predefined environments but if you define your own environment using newtheorem no number will be available In article mode theorems are automatically numbered By specifying the class option envcountsect theorems will be numbered locally to each section which is usually a good idea except for very short articles begin proof lt action specification gt proof name 1 lt action specification gt 100 environment contents end proof Typesets a proof If the optional proof name is given it completely replaces the word Proof This is different from normal theorems where the optional argument is shown in brackets At the end of the theorem a qed symbol is shown except if you say qedhere earlier in the proof this is exactly as in amsthm The default qed symbol is an open rectangle To completely suppress the symbol write def qedsymbol in your preamble To get an closed rectangle say setbeamertemplate qed symbol vrule width1 5ex height1 5ex depthOpt If you use babel and a different language the te
161. e typeset and theorems are numbered Beamer Template theorem begin Whenever an environment declared using the command newtheoren is to be typeset this template is inserted at the beginning and the template theorem end at the end If there is a overlay specification when an environment like theorem is used this overlay specification will directly follow the block beginning template upon invocation This is even true if there was an optional argument to the theorem environment This optional argument is available via the insert inserttheoremaddition Numerous inserts are available in this template see below Before the template starts the font is set to the body font prescribed by the environment to be typeset Example The following typesets theorems like amsthm setbeamertemplate theorem begin 7 begin inserttheoremblockenv 7 inserttheoremheadfont inserttheoremname inserttheoremnumber ifx inserttheoremaddition empty else inserttheoremaddition fif inserttheorempunctuation setbeamertemplate theorem end end inserttheoremblockenv Example In the following example all font suggestions for the environment are suppressed or ignored and the theorem number is suppressed setbeamertemplate theorem begin 7 normalfont ignore body font begin inserttheoremblockenv 7 inserttheoremname ifx inserttheoremaddition empty else inserttheoremaddition fi setbeamertemplate theorem en
162. easily either using themes or by specifying colors or fonts for specific elements of a presentation like say the font used for the numbers in an enumerate The last part contains howtos which are explanations of how to get certain things done using BEAMER This user s guide contains descriptions of all public commands environments and concepts defined by the BEAMER class The following examples show how things are documented As a general rule red text is defined green text is optional blue text indicates special mode considerations Xsomebeamercommand optional arguments 14 first argument H second argument Here you will find the explanation of what the command somebeamercommand does The green argu ment s is optional The command of this example takes two parameters Example somebeamercommand opt my arg xxx begin somebeamerenvironment optional arguments first argument environment contents end somebeamerenvironment Here you will find the explanation of the effect of the environment somebeamerenvironment As with commands the green arguments are optional Example begin somebeamerenvironment Argument Some text end somebeamerenvironment Beamer Template Color Font some beamer element Here you will find an explanation of the template color and or font some beamer element A BEAMER element is a concept that is explained in more detail in Section 16 Roughly spoken an elem
163. ection The Basic Problem That We Studied 20 LYX These commands are given outside of frames So Euclid assumes that at the point of invocation they have no direct effect they only create entries in the table of contents Having a Motivation section seems reasonable to Euclid but he changes the subsection title As he looks at the presentation he notices that his assumption was not quite true each subsection command seems to insert a frame containing a table of contents into the presentation Doubling back he finds the command that causes this The AtBeginSubsection inserts a frame with only the current subsection hilighted at the beginning of each section If Euclid does not like this he can just delete the whole AtBeginSubsection stuff and the table of contents at the beginning of each subsection disappear The section and subsection commands take optional short arguments These short arguments are used whenever a short form of the section of subsection name is needed While this is in keeping with the way BEAMER treats the optional arguments of things like title it is different from the usual way BTE X treats an optional argument for sections where the optional argument dictates what is shown in the table of contents and the main argument dictates what is shown everywhere else in BEAMER things are exactly the other way round 3 8 Creating a Simple Frame Euclid then modifies the next frame which is the first real f
164. ed You can use the againframe command at a much later point for example only in the appendix to show additional slides there In BEAMER you can use the framezoom command to create links to zoomed out parts of a complicated slide Using Graphics Graphics often convey concepts or ideas much more efficiently than text A picture can say more than a thousand words Although sometimes a word can say more than a thousand pictures 5 3 Put at least one graphic on each slide whenever possible Visualizations help an audience enormously Usually place graphics to the left of the text Use the columns environment In a left to right reading culture we look at the left first Graphics should have the same typographic parameters as the text Use the same fonts at the same size in graphics as in the main text A small dot in a graphic should have exactly the same size as a small dot in a text The line width should be the same as the stroke width used in creating the glyphs of the font For example an 11pt non bold Computer Modern font has a stroke width of 0 4pt While bitmap graphics like photos can be much more colorful than the rest of the text vector graphics should follow the same color logic as the main text like black normal lines red hilighted parts green examples blue structure Like text you should explain everything that is shown on a graphic Unexplained details make the audience puzzle whether this
165. ed on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsubsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any
166. ed outside of frames Once entered if the current mode is a presentation mode TEX will enter a gobbling state similar to the gobbling state of the second flavor of the mode command The difference is that the text is now read token wise not line wise The text is gobbled token by token until one of the following tokens is found mode frame againframe part section subsection appendix note begin frame and end document the last two are really tokens but they are recognized anyway Once one of these commands is encountered the gobbling stops and the command is executed However all of these commands restore the mode that was in effect when they started Thus once the command is finished TEX returns to its gobbling Normally mode is exactly what you want T X to do outside of frames ignore everything except for the above mentioned commands outside frames in presentation mode However there are cases in which you have to use the second flavor of the mode command instead If you have verbatim text that contains one of the commands if you have very long text outside frames or if you wish some text outside a frame like a definition to be executed also in presentation mode The class option ignorenonframetext will switch on mode at the beginning of the document Example begin document mode This text is not shown in the presentation begin frame This text is shown both in article and presentation
167. ed to the top Then a differing text height does not cause wobbling Vertical flushing can also be achieved for only a single frame be by giving the optional argument t like this to the frame environment as in begin frame t frametitle There Is No Largest Prime Number end frame Vice versa if the t class option is given a frame can be vertically centered using the c option for the frame It turns out that certain environments including the theorem and proof environments above also take overlay specifications If such a specification is given the whole theorem of proof is only shown on the specified slides 3 11 Structuring a Frame On the next frame Euclid wishes to contrast solved and open problems on prime numbers Since there is no Solved problem environment similar to the theorem environment Euclid decides to use the block environment which allows him to give an arbitrary title begin frame frametitle What s Still To Do begin block Answered Questions How many primes are there end block begin block Open Questions Is every even number the sum of two primes end block end frame He could also have defined his own theorem like environment by putting the following in the preamble newtheorem answeredquestions theorem Answered Questions newtheorem openquestions theorem Open Questions The optional argument theorem ensures that these environments are numbered the same way as every
168. efbeamertemplate you add the text action and then any commands that should be executed once when the predefined option is selected by the setbeamertemplate command Example defbeamertemplate background canvas my shading 2 pgfuseshading myshading simple enough action pgfdeclareverticalshading myshading the paperwidth color Ocm 1 color the paperheight 2 setbeamertemplate background canvas myshading red 10 blue 10 Defines the shading myshading right here Subsequent calls the usebeamertemplate background canvas will yield pgfuseshading myshading ARTICLE Normally this command has no effect in article mode However if a mode specification is given this command is applied for the specified modes Thus this command behaves like the command which also gets the implicit mode specification lt presentation gt if no other specification is given Example defbeamertemplate my template default something has no effect in article mode Example defbeamertemplate lt article gt my template default something has no effect in presentation modes but has an effect in article mode Example defbeamertemplate lt all gt my template default something applies to all modes It is often useful to have access to the same template option via different names For this you can use the following command to create aliases defbeamertemplatealias element name new
169. eful for the title page insertsubtitle inserts a version of the document title that is useful for the title page e inserttitlegraphic inserts the title graphic into a template For compatibility with other classes in article mode the following command is also provided maketitle PRESEN If used inside a frame it has the same effect as titlepage If used outside a frame it has the same TATION effect as frame titlepage in other words a frame is added if necessary Before you invoke the title page command you must specify all elements you wish to be shown This is done using the following commands Vtitle short title title The short tile is used in headlines and footlines Inside the title line breaks can be inserted using the double backslash command Example title The Beamer Class title Short Version A Very Long Title Qver Several Lines 74 ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode subtitle short subtitle 14 subtitle The subshort tile is not used by default but is available via the insert Ninsertshortsubtitle The subtitle is shown below the title in a smaller font Example title The Beamer Class subtitle An easily paced introduction with many examples ARTICLE This command causes the subtitle to be appended to the title with a linebreak and a normalsize command issued before it This may or may not be what you would like to happen author short author names autho
170. elves You may also wish to say setbeamercolor background canvas bg 13 when you use such a command since the background even a white background will otherwise be printed over the image you try to include Example begin document begin frame titlepage end frame setbeamercolor background canvas bg includepdf somepdf images pdf begin frame A normal frame end frame end document usepackage professional font package PRESEN If you use a professional font package BEAMER s internal redefinition of how variables are typeset may TATION interfere with the font package s superior way of typesetting them In this case you should use the class option professionalfont to suppress any font substitution See Section 18 2 2 for details documentclass prosper If you wish to partly emulate the prosper class using BEAMER please see Section 20 1 usepackage pstricks You should add the option xcolor pst to make xcolor aware of the fact that you are using pstricks documentclass seminar If you wish to emulate the seminar class using BEAMER please see Section 20 2 usepackage texpower You cannot use this package with BEAMER However you might try to use the package beamertexpower instead see Section 20 4 usepackage textpos PRESEN BEAMER automatically installs a white background behind everything unless you install a different TATION background template Because of thi
171. ent is part of a presentation that is potentially typeset in some special way Examples of elements are frame titles the author s name or the footnote sign For most elements there exists a template see Section 16 once more and also a BEAMER color and a BEAMER font For each element it is indicated whether a template a BEAMER color and or a BEAMER font of the name some beamer element exist Typically all three exist and are employed together when the element needs to be typeset that is when the template is inserted the BEAMER color and font are installed first However sometimes templates do not have a color or font associated with them like parent templates Also there exist BEAMER colors and fonts that do not have an underlying template Using and changing templates is explained in Section 16 3 Here is the essence To change a template you can say setbeamertemplate some beamer element your definition for this template Unfortunately it is not quite trivial to come up with a good definition for some templates Fortunately there are often predefined options for a template These are indicated like this e square causes a small square to be used to render the template e circle radius causes circles of the given radius to be used to render the template You can install such a predefined option like this setbeamertemplate some beamer element square Now squares are used setbeamertemplate some beamer element
172. environment and the cite commands of I TfX in a BEAMER presentation You will typically have to typeset your bibliography items partly by hand Nevertheless you can use bibtex to create a first approximation of the bibliography Copy the content of the file main bbl1 into your presentation If you are not familiar with bibtex you may wish to consult its documentation It is a powerful tool for creating high quality citations Using bibtex or your editor place your bibliographic references in the environment thebibliography This standard TEX environment takes one parameter which should be the longest bibitem label in the following list of bibliographic entries begin thebibliography longest label text environment contents end thebibliography Inserts a bibliography into the current frame The longest label text is used to determine the indent of the list However several predefined options for the typesetting of the bibliography ignore this parameter since they replace the references by a symbol Inside the environment use a standard IAT X bibitem command for each reference item Inside each item use a standard TEX newblock command to separate the authors s names the title the book journal reference and any notes Each of these commands may introduce a new line or color or other formatting as specified by the template for bibliographies The environment must be placed inside a frame If the bibliography
173. epth sets the depth of the box overriding the real depth of the box The box is first typeset normally then the depth is changed afterwards This option is useful for creating boxes that have guaranteed size If the option is not given the box has its natural depth which results from the typesetting For example a box containing only the letter a will have a different depth from a box containing only the letter g e ht height sets the height of the box overriding the real height Note that the height does not include the depth see for example the TfX book for details Tf you want a one line box that always has the same size setting the height to 2 25ex and the depth to lex is usually a good option e left causes the text inside the box to be typeset left aligned and with a radically ragged right border This is the default To get a better ragged right border use the rightskip option e right causes the text to be right aligned with a radically ragged left border e center centers the text inside the box e leftskip left skip installs the left skip inside the box as the left skip T X s left skip is a glue that is inserted at the left end of every line See the T X book for details e rightskip right skip install the right skip To get a good ragged right border try say Xrightskip 0pt plus 4em e sep dimension sets the size of extra space around the text This space is added inside
174. er effect By default the title and author commands will also insert their arguments into a resulting PDF file in the document information fields This may cause problems if you use complicated things like boxes as arguments to these commands In this case you might wish to switch off the automatic generation of these entries using the following class option documentclass usepdftitle false beamer Suppresses the automatic generation of title and author entries in the PDF document information 75 9 2 Adding Sections and Subsections You can structure your text using the commands section and subsection Unlike standard IAT X these commands will not create a heading at the position where you use them Rather they will add an entry to the table of contents and also to the navigation bars In order to create a line break in the table of contents usually not a good idea you can use the command breakhere Note that the standard command does not work actually I do not really know why comments would be appreciated section lt mode specification gt short section name 14 section name Starts a section No heading is created The section name is shown in the table of contents and in the navigation bars except if short section name is specified In this case short section name is used in the navigation bars instead If a mode specification is given the command only has an effect for the specified modes Examp
175. er versions of the BEAMER class use the compatibility theme e infolines theme This option becomes available and is used if the infolines outer theme is loaded The headline shows current section and subsection e miniframes theme This option becomes available and is used if the miniframes outer theme is loaded The headline shows the sections with small clickable mini frames below them e sidebar theme This option becomes available and is used if the sidebar outer theme is loaded and if the head height and option of the sidebar theme is not zero In this case the headline is an empty bar of the background color frametitle with the logo to the left or right of this bar e smoothtree theme This option becomes available and is used if the smoothtree outer theme is loaded A smoothed navigation tree is shown in the headline e smoothbars theme This option becomes available and is used if the smoothbars outer theme is loaded A smoothed version of the miniframes headline is shown e tree This option becomes available and is used if the tree outer theme is loaded A naviga tional tree is shown in the headline e split This option becomes available and is used if the split outer theme is loaded The headline is split into a left part showing the sections and a right part showing the subsections e text line tert The headline is typeset more or less as if it were a normal text line with the text as c
176. ere e insertlogo inserts the logo at the current position This command has the same effect as usebeamertemplate logo 7 2 6 The Frame Title The frame title is shown prominently at the top of the frame and can be specified with the following command frametitle lt overlay specification gt short frame title frame title text You should end the frame title text with a period if the title is a proper sentence Otherwise there should not be a period The short frame title is normally not shown but its available via the insertshortframetitle command The overlay specification is mostly useful for suppressing the frame title in article mode 55 PRESEN TATION ARTICLE LYX Example begin frame frametitle A Frame Title is Important framesubtitle Subtitles are not so important Frame contents end frame If you are using the allowframebreaks option with the current frame a continuation text like cont or something similar depending on the template frametitle continuation is automatically added to the frame title text at the end separated with a space The frame title is not typeset immediately when the command frametitle is encountered Rather the argument of the command is stored internally and the frame title is only typeset when the complete frame has been read This gives you access to both the frame title text and to the subframe title text that is possibly introduced using t
177. erlay specification is used By setting this specification to be an incremental overlay specification see Section 8 6 4 you can implement for example a step wise uncovering of the items The default overlay specification is inherited by subenvironments Naturally in a subenvironment you can reset it locally by setting it to lt 1 gt Example begin itemize item This is important item This is also important end itemize Example begin itemize lt gt item This is shown from the first slide on item This is shown from the second slide on item This is shown from the third slide on item lt 1 gt This is shown from the first slide on item This is shown from the fourth slide on end itemize Example begin itemize lt alert gt item This is shown from the first slide on and alerted on the first slide item This is shown from the second slide on and alerted on the second slide 91 LYX item This is shown from the third slide on and alerted on the third slide end itemize Example newenvironment mystepwiseitemize begin itemize lt alert gt end itemize Unfortunately currently you cannot specify optional arguments with the itemize environment You can however use the command beamerdefaultoverlayspecification before the environment to get the desired effect The appearance of an itemize list is governed by several templates The first template concerns the way the
178. erson to use BEAMER besides me Tux for his silent criticism Rolf Niepraschk for showing me how to program TX correctly Claudio Beccari for writing part of the documentation on font encodings Thomas Baumann for the emacs stuff Stefan Miller for not loosing hope Uwe Kern for XCOLOR Hendri Adriaens for HA PROSPER Ohura Makoto for spotting typos People who have contributed to the themes include Paul Gomme Manuel Carro and Marlon R gis Schmitz 1 4 How to Read this User s Guide You should start with the first part If you have not yet installed the package please read Section 2 first If you are new to BEAMER you should next read the tutorial in Section 3 When you set down to create your first real presentation using BEAMER read Section 4 where the technical details of a possible workflow are discussed If you are still new to creating presentations in general you might find Section 5 helpful where many guidelines are given on what to do and what not to do Finally you should browse through Section 6 where you will find ready to use solution templates for creating talks possibly even in the language you intend to use The second part of this user s guide goes into the details of all the commands defined in BEAMER but it also addresses other technical issues having to do with creating presentations like how to include graphics or animations The third part explains how you can change the appearance of your presentation
179. erting a horizontal line is tricky since it will protrude over the full width of the table also in the covered version The best idea is just not to use horizontal bars rowcolors 1 blue 20 blue 10 begin tabular 1 vrule c lt onslide lt 2 gt c lt onslide lt 3 gt c lt onslide lt 4 gt c lt onslide c Class L AL BE C8EDAN X 186286386 4N Y amp 3e 4e5h6 Z amp 5 amp 6 amp 7 amp SB end tabular 181 20 How To Import Presentations Based on Other Packages and Classes The BEAMER class comes with a number of emulation layers for classes or packages that do not support BEAMER directly For example the package beamerseminar maps some not all commands of the SEMINAR class to appropriate BEAMER commands This way individual slides or whole sets of slides that have been prepared for a presentation using SEMINAR can be used inside BEAMER provided they are reasonably simple None of the emulation layers is a perfect substitute for the original emulations seldom are and it is not intended that they ever will be If you want need prefer the features of another class use that class for preparing your presentations The intension of these layers is just to help speed up creating BEAMER presentations that use parts of old presentations You can simply copy these parts in verbatim without having to worry about the subtle differences in syntax A useful effect of using an emulation layer is that you get access to all the feat
180. est Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number ps There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria There Is No i Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics r r University of Alexandria E De the p IMDEIS 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 0 Results e Proof of the Main Theorem Q Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p 137 A variation in the Berkeley theme with less dominance of rectangular areas The same options as for the Berkeley theme can be given usetheme options Goettingen Example There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number ei are The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Number Euklid Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p A relatively sober theme useful for a longer talk that demands a sidebar with a full table of contents The same options as for the Berkeley theme usetheme options Marburg Example There Is No Large
181. est Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria MICA There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria p Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 A A Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Proof of the Main Theorem A theme based on the inmargin inner theme and the rectangles inner theme Using this theme is not quite trivial since getting the spacing right can be trickier than with most other themes Also this theme goes badly with columns You may wish to consult the remarks on the inmargin inner theme usetheme options Madrid Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p O Results e Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 1 2 Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 2 2 A theme giving much information on little space The present form was slightly adapted from a theme contributed by Manue
182. ew the GPL license under which the class is distributed see Section 2 7 below 2 1 Versions and Dependencies This documentation is part of version 3 00 of the BEAMER class BEAMER needs a reasonably recent version several standard packages to run and also the following versions of two special packages later versions should work but not necessarily e pgf version 0 63 e xcolor version 2 00 If you use pdflatex or lyx which are optional you need e lyx version 1 3 3 Other versions might work e pdflatex version 0 14 or higher Earlier versions do not work 2 2 Installation of Prebundled Packages I do not create or manage prebundled packages of BEAMER but fortunately nice other people do I cannot give detailed instructions on how to install these packages since I do not manage them but I can tell you were to find them and I can tell you what these nice people told me on how to install them If you have a problem with installing you might wish to have a look at the Debian page or MikTeX page first 2 2 1 Debian The command aptitude install latex beamer should do the trick If necessary the packages pgf and latex xcolor will be automatically installed Sit back and relax In detail the following packages are installed http packages debian org latex beamer http packages debian org pgf http packages debian org latex xcolor 2 2 2 MiKTeX For MiKT X use the update wizard to install the latest versions
183. f pstricks code is bound to be difficult if you wish to switch over to pdflatex so be warned 182 e If the file cannot be compiled because some PROSPER command is not implemented you will have to delete this command and try to mimick its behaviour using some BEAMER command usepackage beamerprosper Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to PROSPER commands Use beamer as the document class not prosper Most of the options passed to the class prosper make no sense in beamer so just delete them This package takes the following options e framesassubsections causes each frame to create its own subsection with the frame title as subsection name This behaviour mimicks HA PROSPER s behaviour In a long talk this will create way too many subsections ARTICLE The framesassubsections option has no effect in article mode Example documentclass notes beamer usepackage framesassubsections beamerprosper title A Beamer Presentation Using HA Prosper Commands subtitle Subtitles Are Also Supported author Till Tantau institution The Institution is Mapped To Institute begin document maketitle tsectionandpart Introduction overlays 2 begin slide About this file begin itemstep item This is a beamer presentation item You can use the prosper and the HA prosper syntax item This is done by mapping prosper and HA prosper commands to beamer commands item The emulation is
184. fication gt environment contents end actionenv This environment extracts all actions from the action specification for the current mode For each action of the form action slide numbers it inserts the following text begin action env lt slide number gt at the beginning of the environment and the text end action env at the end If there are several action specifications several environments are opened and closed in the appropriate order An overlay specification without an action is promoted to uncover overlay specification If the so called default overlay specification is not empty it will be used in case no action specification is given The default overlay specification is usually just empty but it may be set either by providing an additional optional argument to the command frame or to the environments itemize enumerate or description see these for details Also the default action specification can be set using the command beamerdefaultoverlayspecification see below Example begin frame beginfactionenv lt 2 alert 3 4 6 gt This text is shown the same way as the text below end actionenv begin uncoverenv lt 2 gt begin alertenv lt 3 4 6 gt This text is shown the same way as the text above end alertenv end uncoverenv end frame 71 action lt action specification gt L text This has the same effect as putting text in an actionenv Example action lt alert 2 gt
185. first moment of uncovering is used for the calculation of how long the item has been covered once more An opaqueness of 100 is fully opaque and 0 is fully transparent Currently since real transparency is not yet implemented this command causes all colors to get a mixing of percentage of opaqueness of the current bg At some future point this command might result in real transparency The alternate PGF extension used inside an opaque area is percentage of opaqueness opaque In case of nested calls only the innermost opaqueness specification is used Example setbeamercovered still covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 again covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 pgfdeclareimage book book pgfdeclareimage book 150paque filenameforbooknearlytransparent Makes everything that is uncovered in two slides only 15 percent opaque 170 18 Fonts The first subsection introduces the predefined font themes that come with BEAMER and which make it easy to change the fonts used in a presentation The next subsection describes further special commands for changing some basic attributes of the fonts used in a presentation The last subsection explains how you can get a much more fine grained control over the fonts used for every individual element of a presentation 18 1 Font Themes BEAMER comes with a set of font themes When you use such a theme certain fonts are changed as described below You can use several font themes in concert For h
186. fonts If one of them specifies that the font should be say boldface and the other specifies that the font should be say large then the child font will be both large and bold As for fonts the description of the font used for an element is given after the description of the element 18 3 2 Using Beamer s Fonts To use a BEAMER font you can use the command usebeamerfont Inside the templates for elements this command will typically have already been called for you so you will only seldomly have to use this command usebeamerfont beamer font name This command changes the current font to the font specified by the beamer font name The beamer font name can be a not too fancyful text and may contain spaces Typical examples are frametitle or section in toc or My Font 1 BEAMER fonts can have and should have the same name as BEAMER templates and BEAMER colors Example usebeamerfont frametitle In the unstarred version of this command the font is changed according to the attributes specified in the beamer font name but unspecified attributes remain unchanged For example if the font specifies that the font should be bold but specifies nothing else and if the current font is large then usebeamerfont causes the the current font to become large and bold In the starred version of this command the font is first reset before the font s attributes are ap plied Thus in the above example of a BEAMER font having on
187. forth You can also use pause inside environments its effect will last after the environment However taking this to extremes and use pause deeply within a nested environment may not have the desired result A much more fine grained control over what is shown on each slide can be attained using overlay speci fications see the next sections However for many simple cases the pause command is sufficient The effect of pause lasts till the next pause onslide or the end of the frame begin frame begin itemize item Shown from first slide on pause item Shown from second slide on begin itemize item Shown from second slide on pause item Shown from third slide on end itemize item Shown from third slide on pause item Shown from fourth slide on end itemize Shown from fourth slide on begin itemize onslide item Shown from first slide on pause item Shown from fifth slide on end itemize end frame pause number This command causes the text following it to be shown only from the next slide on or if the optional number is given from the slide with the number number If the optional number is given the counter beamerpauses is set to this number This command uses the onslide command internally This command does not work inside amsmath environments like align since these do really wicked things Example begin frame begin itemize item A pause item B pau
188. given width into a template The bar shows a little table of contents The individual lines are typeset using the templates section in head foot and subsection in head foot insertframenumber Inserts the number of the current frame not slide into a template inserttotalframenumber Inserts the total number of the frames not slides into a template The number is only correct on the second run of TeX on your document insertframestartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the current frame insertframeendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current frame insertsubsectionstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the current subsection insertsubsectionendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current subsection insertsectionstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the current section insertsectionendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current section insertpartstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the current part insertpartendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the current part insertpresentationstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the presentation insertpresentationendpage Inserts the page number of the last page of the presentation ex cluding the appendix insertappendixstartpage Inserts the page number of the first page of the appendix If there is no appendix this number is the last page
189. gle slide In detail when this option is given the following things happen 1 Overlays are not supported 2 If your frame contains verbatim text you can and must specify the option containsverbatim Since overlays are not supported anyway specifying this option never hurts 3 Any notes for the frame created using the note command will be inserted after the first page of the frame 4 Any footnotes for the frame will be inserted on the last page of the frame 5 If there is a frame title each of the pages will have this frame title with a special note added indicating which page of the frame that page is By default this special note is a Roman number However this can be changed using the following template Beamer Template Color Font frametitle continuation The text of this template is inserted at the end of every title of a frame with the allowframebreaks option set The following template options are predefined default Installs a Roman number as the template The number indicates the current page of the frame roman Alias for the default from second L text Installs a template that inserts text from the second page of a frame on By default the text inserted is insertcontinuationtext which in turn is cont by default The following inserts are available insertcontinuationcount inserts the current page of the frame as an arabic number insertcontinuationcountroman inserts the current
190. he framesubtitle command By default this command creates a new paragraph in article mode entitled frame title text Using the overlay specification makes it easy to suppress the a frame title once in a while If you generally wish to suppress all frame titles in article mode say setbeamertemplate lt article gt frametitle The frame title is the text that follows on the line of the BeginFrame style Beamer Template Color Font frametitle Color font parents structure When the frame title and subtitle are to be typeset this template is invoked with the BEAMER color and font frametitle set This template is not invoked when the commands frametitle or framesubtitle are called Rather it is invoked when the whole frame has been completely read Till then the frame title and frame subtitle text are stored in a special place This way when the template is invoked both inserts are setup correctly The resulting TRX box is then magically put back to the top of the frame The following template options are predefined e default alignment The frame is typeset using the BEAMER color frametitle and the BEAMER font frametitle The subtitle is put below using the color and font framesubtitle If the color frametitle has a background a background bar stretching the whole frame width is put behind the title A background color of the subtitle is ignored The alignment is passed on to the beamercolorbox environment In particular
191. he appearance of a presentation The BEAMER class uses five different kinds of themes Presentation Themes Conceptually a presentation theme dictates for every single detail of a presentation what it looks like Thus choosing a particular presentation theme will setup for say the numbers in enumeration what color they have what color their background has what font is used to render them whether a circle or ball or rectangle or whatever is drawn behind them and so forth Thus when you choose a presentation theme your presentation will look they way someone the creator of the theme thought that a presentation should look like Presentation themes typically only choose a particular color theme font theme inner theme and outer theme that go well together Color Themes A color theme only dictates which colors are used in a presentation If you have chosen a particular presentation theme and then choose a color theme only the colors of your presentation will change A color theme can specify colors in a very detailed way For example a color theme can specifically change the colors used to render say the border of a button the background of a button and the text on a button Font Themes A font theme dictates which fonts or font attributes are used in a presentation As for colors the font of all text elements used in a presentation can be specified independently Inner Themes An inner theme specifies how certain elements of a presentati
192. he author s s names their affiliation a title graphic and a date titlepage Inserts the text of a title page into the current frame Example frame titlepage Example frame plain titlepage for a titlepage that fills the whole frame LYX If you use the Title style in your presentation a title page is automatically inserted Beamer Template Color Font title page This template is invoked when the titlepage command is used The following template options are predefined e default alignment The title page is typeset showing the title followed by the author his or her affiliation the date and a titlegraphic If any of these are missing they are not shown Except for the titlegraphic if the BEAMER color title author institute or date is defined respectively it is used to as textcolor for these entries If a background color is defined for them a colored bar in the corresponding color is drawn behind them spanning the text width The corresponding BEAMER fonts are used for these entries The alignment option is passed on the beamercolorbox and can be used for example to flush the title page to the left by specifying left here The following commands are useful for this template e insertauthor inserts a version of the author s name that is useful for the title page insertdate inserts the date insertinstitute inserts the institute e inserttitle inserts a version of the document title that is us
193. he counter beamerpauses minus one possibly offset This dot notation can be useful in case like the following begin itemize lt gt item Apple item lt gt Peach item Plum item Orange end itemize In the example the second item is shown at the same time as the first one since it does not update the counter In the following example each time an item is uncovered the specified text is alerted When the next item is uncovered this altering ends begin itemize lt gt item This is alert lt gt important item We want to alert lt gt highlight this and alert lt gt this item What is the alert lt gt matrix end itemize 73 9 Structuring a Presentation The Static Global Structure This section lists the commands that are used for structuring a presentation globally using commands like section or Apart These commands are use to create a static structure meaning that the resulting presentation is normally presented one slide after the other in the order the slides occur Section 10 explains which commands can be used to create the interactive structure For the interactive structure you must interact with the presentation program typically by clicking on hyperlinks to advance the presentation 9 1 Adding a Title Page You can use the titlepage command to insert a title page into a frame By default it will arrange the following elements on the title page the document title t
194. he first column allows him to uncover the second column only on the second slide of the frame 3 12 Adding References Euclid decides that he would like to add a citation to his open questions list since he would like to attribute the question to his good old friend Christian Euclid is not really sure whether using a bibliography in his talk is a good idea but he goes ahead anyway To this end he adds an entry to the bibliography which he fortunately already finds in the solution file Having the bibliography in the appendix does not quite suit Euclid so he removes the appendix command He also notices lt presentation gt overlay specification and finds them a bit strange but they do seem to hurt either Hopefully they do something useful His bibliography looks like this begin thebibliography 10 bibitem Goldback1742 Goldbach 1742 Christian Goldback newblock A problem we should try to solve before the ISPN 43 deadline newblock emph Letter to Leonhard Euler 1742 end thebibliography and he can then add a citation begin block Open Questions Is every even number the sum of two primes cite Goldbach1742 end block 3 13 Verbatim Text One another frame Euclid would like to show a listing of an algorithm his friend Eratosthenes has send him saying he came up with it while reorganizing his sieve collection Euclid normally uses the verbatim environment and sometimes also similar environments like 1s
195. he implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the program is with you Should the program prove defective you assume the cost of all necessary servicing repair or correction In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing will any copyright holder or any other party who may modify and or redistribute the program as permitted above be liable to you for damages including any general special incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the program including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a failure of the program to operate with any other programs even if such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such damages 18 LYX LYX 3 Tutorial Euclid s Presentation This section presents a short tutorial that focuses on those features of BEAMER that you are likely to use when you start using BEAMER It leaves out all the glorious details that are explained in great detail later on 3 1 Problem Statement We wish to help Prof Euclid of the University of Alexandria to create a presentation on his latest discovery There are infinitely many prime numbers Euclid wrote a paper on this and it got accepted at the 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 ISPN 80 Euclid wishes to use the BEA
196. he main text while outer themes install templates for elements around the main text Thus from the templates s point of view there is no real difference between inner and outer themes 16 1 Inner Themes An inner theme installs templates that dictate how the following elements are typeset e Title and part pages e Itemize environments e Enumerate environments e Description environments e Block environments e Theorem and proof environments e Figures and tables e Footnotes e Bibliography entries In the following examples the color themes seahorse and rose are used to show where and how back ground colors are honoured Furthermore background colors have been specified for all elements the honour them in the default theme In the default color theme all of the large rectangular areas are transparent useinnertheme default Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics g University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p The default element theme is quite sober The only extravagance is the fact that a little triangle is used in itemize environments instead of the usual dot
197. here are vertical and horizontal lines in the table The reason is that the first vertical line at the left end is drawn before the line is even read and thus in particular before any onslide command can be read However placing a pause or uncover at the end of the line before is also not helpful since it will then suppress the horizontal line below the last uncovered line A possible way to solve this problem is not to use either horizontal or vertical lines Instead colouring the lines using the colortbl package is a good alternative to structure the table Here is an optically pleasing example where the table is uncovered line wise rowcolors 1 blue 20 blue 10 begin tabular 1 vrule cccc Class amp A amp B amp C8 amp D hline X 122 3 amp 4 pause Y 38 48 5 6 pause Z 5 68 7 8 end tabular By using onslide instead of pause you can get more fine grained control over which line is shown on which slide 19 6 Uncovering a Table Columnwise The same problems as for uncovering a table linewise arise for uncovering it columnwise Once more using the colortb1 package offers a solution In the following example the tabular header is used to insert onslide commands one for each column that cover the entries in the column from a certain slide on At the end of the last column the onslide without a specification ensures that the first column on the next row is once more shown normally Ins
198. high resolution light on dark text tends to be overflooded by the dark background When light on dark text is rendered in a presentation this effect can be much worse making the text almost impossible to read You can counter both negative effects by using a bold versions for small text In the other direction you can use larger text for titles However using a larger font does not always have the desired effect Just because a frame title is printed in large letters does not mean that is read first Indeed have a look at the cover of your favorite magazine Most likely the magazine s name is the typeset in the largest font but you your attention will nevertheless first go to the topics advertised on the cover Likewise in the table of contents you are likely to first focus on the entries not on the words Table of Contents Most likely you would not spot a spelling mistake there a friend of mine actually managed to misspell his own name on the cover of his master s thesis and nobody noticed until a year later In essence large text at the top of a page signals unimportant since I know what to expect So instead of using a very large frame title also consider using a normal size frame title that is typeset in bold or in italics 5 6 2 Font Families The other central property of any font is its family Examples of font families are Times or Helvetica or Futura As the name suggests a lot of different fonts can belong
199. his case this options is selected automatically It shows a mini table of contents in the sidebar Beamer Template Color Font sidebar right Color font parents sidebar This template works the same way as the template for the left The following template options are predefined e default The default right sidebar has zero width Nevertheless it shows navigational symbols and if installed a logo at the bottom of the sidebar protruding to the left into the text e sidebar theme This option is available if the outer theme sidebar is loaded with the left option In this case this options is selected automatically It shows a mini table of contents in the sidebar Beamer Template sidebar canvas left Like the overall background canvas this canvas is drawn behind the actual text of the sidebar This template should normally insert a rectangle of the size of the sidebar though a too large height will not lead to an error or warning When this template is called the BEAMER color sidebar left will have been installed The following template options are predefined e default uses a large rectangle colored with sidebar bg as the sidebar canvas However if the background of sidebar is empty nothing is drawn and the canvas is transparent e vertical shading color options installs a vertically shaded background The following color options may be given top color specifies the color at the top of the sidebar By def
200. ical text should not stand out admit the normal text BEAMER makes it reasonably easy to change the color of mathematical text Simply change the following colors Beamer Color math text This color is the parent of math text inlined and math text displayed It is empty by default See those colors for details Beamer Color math text inlined Color parents math text If the foreground of this color is set inlined mathematical text is typeset using this color This is done via some everymath hackery and may not work in all cases If not you ll have to try to find a way around the problem The background is currently ignored Beamer Color math text displayed Color parents math text Like math text inlined only for so called displayed mathematical text This is mathematical text between and or between and or inside environments like equation or align The setup of this color is somewhat fragile use at your own risk The background is currently ignored Beamer Color normal text in math text If the foreground of this color is set normal text inside mathematical text which is introduced using the text command will be typeset using this color The background is currently ignored 17 4 The Color Palettes When one designs a color theme one faces the following problem Suppose we want the colors in the headline to gradually change from black to say blue Whatever is at the very top of the headline should be black what c
201. ideprev 87 hyperlinksound 119 hyperref package 13 hyperref list of options class option 13 hypertarget 85 ifarticle 189 ifbeamercolorempty 165 ifbeamertemplateempty 153 ifportrait 189 ifslide 189 ifslidesonly 189 Ilmenau presentation theme 139 includeonlyframes 28 includeonlylecture 79 includeslide 127 infolines outer theme 147 inmargin inner theme 146 Inner themes circles 145 default 144 inmargin 146 rectangles 145 rounded 145 inputenc package 13 Inserts insertappendixendpage 48 insertappendixstartpage 48 insertauthor 74 insertbackfindforwardnavigationsymbol 55 insertbiblabel 83 insertblocktitle 98 insertbuttontext 86 insertcaption 106 insertcaptionname 106 198 insertcaptionnumber 106 insertcontinuationcount 43 insertcontinuationcountroman 43 insertcontinuationtext 43 insertdate 74 insertdescriptionitem 95 insertdocnavigationsymbol 55 insertdocumentendpage 48 insertdocumentstartpage 48 insertenumlabel 93 94 insertfootnotemark 109 insertfootnotetext 109 insertframeendpage 48 insertframenavigationsymbol 55 insertframenumber 48 insertframestartpage 48 insertframesubtitle 56 insertframetitle 56 insertgotosymbol 86 insertinstitute 74 insertlogo 55 insertnavigation width 47 insertnote 123 insertpagenumber 47 insertpart 79 insertpartendpage 48 insertpartheadnumber 52 insertpartnumber 79 insertpart
202. ider before using it e Several sounds can be played at the same time In particular it is possible to play a general sound in parallel to a hopefully silent movie e A sound playback can persist after the current page is closed though it need not e The data of a sound file can be completely embedded in a PDF file obliberating the need to carry around other files e The sound objects do not work together with dvips and ps2pdf They only work with pdflatex e There is much less control over what part of a sound should be played In particular no control bar is shown and you can specify neither the start time nor the duration e A bug in some versions of the Acrobat Reader makes it necessary to provide very exact details on the encoding of the sound file You have to provide the sampling rate the number of channels mono or stereo the number of bits per sample and the sample encoding method raw signed Alaw or plaw If you do not know this data or provide it incorrectly the sound will be played incorrectly 117 e It seems that you can only include uncompressed sound data which can easily become huge This is not required by the specification but I have been unable to make the Acrobat Reader play any compressed data Data formats that do work are aif and au sound options 14 sound poster text H sound filename This command will insert the sound with the filename sound filename into the PDF file As for mov
203. ie the file must be accessible when the sound is to be played Unlike movie you can however use the option inlinesound to actually embed the sound data in the PDF file Also as for a movie the sound poster text will be be put in a box that when clicked on will start playing the movie However you might also leave this box empty and only use the autostart option Once playback of a sound has started it can only be stopped by starting the playback of a different sound or by use of the hyperlinkmute command The supported sound formats depend on the viewer application My version of the Acrobat Reader supports aif and au I also need to specify information like the sampling rate even though this information could be extracted from the sound file and even though the PDF standard specifies that the viewer application should do so In this regard my version of the Acrobat Reader seems to be non standard conforming This command only works together with pdflatex If you use dvips the poster is still shown but clicking it has no effect and no sound is embedded in any way Example sound autostart samplingrate 22050 applause au The following options may be given e autostart Causes the sound to start playing immediately when the page is shown e automute Causes all sounds to be muted when the current page is left e bitspersample 8 or 16 Specifies the number of bits per sample in the sound file If this number is 16 thi
204. ience if you omit the pointed brackets the specification is assumed to apply to all versions Thus sections 2 4 causes sections two three and four to be shown in all versions 80 e sectionstyle style for current section style for other sections specifies how sections should be displayed Allowed styles are show shaded and hide The first will show the section title normally the second will show it in a semi transparent way and the third will completely suppress it You can also omit the second style in which case the first is used for all sections this is not really useful e subsectionstyle style for current subsection style for other subsections in current section style for subsections in other sections specifies how subsections should be displayed The same styles as for the sectionstyle option may be given You can omit the last style in which case the second also applies to the last and you can omit the last two in which case the first applies to all Example subsectionstyle shaded causes all subsections to be shaded Example subsectionstyle hide causes all subsections to be hidden Example subsectionstyle show shaded causes all subsections but the current subsection in the current section to be shown in a semi transparent way Example subsectionstyle show show hide causes all subsections outside the current section to be suppressed Example subsectionstyle show shaded hide causes all subsections outsid
205. if font theme 173 subitem color font 95 subitem projected color font 95 subject 75 subsection 76 77 subsection in head foot template color font 53 subsection in head foot shaded template 53 sidebar template color font 53 subsection in toc template color font 76 subsection in toc shaded template color font 76 subsubitem color font 95 subsubitem projected color font 95 subtitle 75 switch 192 Szeged presentation theme 141 subsection in t class option 57 tableofcontents 80 Template inserts see Inserts Templates see Beamer templates temporal 64 texpower package 14 textpos package 14 thebibliography environment 82 Themes see Presentation themes theorem environment 100 theorem begin template 102 theorem end template 102 theorems parent template 101 tiny structure font 96 title 74 title page template color font 74 titlegraphic 75 titlelike color font 169 titlepage 74 trans class option 122 transblindshorizontal 119 transblindsvertical 120 transboxin 120 transboxout 120 transdissolve 120 201 transduration 120 transglitter 120 transsplithorizontalin 120 transsplithorizontalout 120 transsplitverticalin 120 transsplitverticalout 120 transwipe 120 tree outer theme 150 tsection 186 tsectionandpart 186 ucs class option 13 ucs package 14 uncover 64 UntilSlide 185 untilSlide 185 untilsSlide 185 upper separation line foot color 1
206. ification For example alert lt handout 0 gt causes the text to be always hilighted during the presentation but never on the handout version Likewise frame lt handout 0 gt causes the frame to be suppressed for the handout Finally note that it is possible to give more than one alternate overlay specification and in any order For example the following specification states that the text should be inserted on the first three slides in the presentation in the first two slides of the transparency version and not at all in the handout only lt trans 1 2 1 3 handout 0 gt Text 121 LYX If you wish to give the same specification in all versions you can do so by specifying all as the version For example frame lt all 1 2 gt blah ensures that the frame has two slides in all versions 14 2 Creating Transparencies The main aim of the BEAMER class is to create presentations for beamers However it is often useful to print transparencies as backup in case the hardware fails A transparencies version of a talk often has less slides than the main version since it takes more time to switch slides but it may have more slides than the handout version For example while in a handout an animation might be condensed to a single slide you might wish to print several slides for the transparency version You can use the same mechanism as for creating handouts Specify trans as a class option and add alternate transparency
207. ificiation aware The option is also available as a package option for beamerarticle and has the same effect In the article version the package amsthm sometimes clashes with the document class In this case you can use the following option which is once more available as a class option for BEAMER and as a package option for beamerarticle to switch off the loading of amsthm altogether documentclass noamsthm beamer Does not load amsthm and also not amsmath Environments like theorem or proof will not be available Parent Beamer Template theorems This template is a parent of theorem begin and theorem end see the first for a detailed discussion of how the theorem templates are set Example setbeamertemplate theorem numbered The following template options are predefined e default By default theorems are typeset as follows The font specification for the body is honored the font specification for the head is ignored No theorem number is printed e normal font Like the default except all font specifications for the body are ignored Thus the fonts are used that are normally used for blocks 101 e numbered This option is like the default except that the theorem number is printed for environ ments that are numbered e ams style This causes theorems to be put in a block or exampleblock but to be otherwise typeset as is normally done in amsthm Thus the head font and body font depend on the setting for the theorem to b
208. in This template is inserted at the very beginning of the abstract before the abstract title and the environment contents is inserted Beamer Template abstract end This template is inserted at the end of the abstract after the environment contents 11 10 Verse Quotations Quotes IAT X defines three environments for typesetting quotations and verses verse quotation and quote These environments are also available in the BEAMER class where they are overlay specification aware If an overlay specification is given the verse or quotation is shown only on the specified slides and is covered otherwise The difference between a quotation and a quote is that the first has paragraph indentation whereas the second does not You can change the font and color used for these by changing the BEAMER colors and fonts listed below Unlike the standard TX environments the default font theme typesets a verse in an italic serif font quotations and quotes are typeset using an italic font whether serif or sans serif depends on the standard document font begin verse lt action specification gt environment contents end verse You can use this environment to typeset a verse Beamer Color Font verse These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the verse If a background color is set this background color is used as background for the whole abstract The default font is italic serif Beamer Template verse begin This template is
209. in a way that is sensible for the article mode Also overlay specifications can be given to commands like textbf or item once beamerarticle has been loaded Note that except for item these overlay specifications also work by writing section lt presentation gt Name you will suppress this section command in the article version For the exact effects overlay specifications have in article mode please see the descriptions of the commands to which you wish to apply them usepackage options beamerarticle Makes most BEAMER commands available for another document class The following options may be given e activeospeccharacters will leave the character code of the pointed brackets as specified by other packages Normally BEAMER will turn off the special behaviour of the two characters lt and gt Using this option you can reinstall the original behaviour at the price of possible problems when using overlay specifications in the article mode e noamsthm will suppress the loading of the amsthm package No theorems will be defined e notheorem will suppress the definition of standard environments like theorem but amsthm is still loaded and the newtheorem command still makes the defined environments overlay specification aware Using this option allows you to define the standard environments in whatever way you like while retaining the power of the extensions to amsthm e envcountsect causes theorem definitions and the like to be
210. inal existing environment name Example renewenvironment lt gt verse beginf actionenv 1 begin foriginalverse end originalverse end actionenv The following two commands can be used to ensure that a certain counter is automatically reset on subsequent slides of a frame This is necessary for example for the equation count You might want this count to be increased from frame to frame but certainly not from overlay slide to overlay slide For equation counters and footnote counters you should not use footnotes these commands have already been invoked 69 resetcounteronoverlays counter name After you have invoked this command the value of the specified counter will be the same on all slides of every frame Example resetcounteronoverlays equation resetcountonoverlays count register name The same as resetcounteronoverlays except that this command should be used with counts that have been created using the TEX primitive newcount instead of BTE X s definecounter Example newcount mycount resetcountonoverlays mycount 8 6 2 Mode Specifications This section is only important if you use BEAMER s mode mechanism to create different versions of your presentation If you are not familiar with BEAMER s modes please skip this section or read Section 14 first In certain cases you may wish to have different overlay specifications to apply to a command in different modes For example you migh
211. ing them more and more cumbersome names I decided to switch to a different naming convention Except for two special cases all presentation themes are named after cities These cities happen to be cities in which or near which there was a conference or workshop that I attended or that a co author of mine attended usetheme default Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p El Results Proof of the Main Theorem As the name suggests this theme is installed by default It is a sober no nonsense theme that makes minimal use of color or font variations This theme is useful for all kinds of talks except for very long talks usetheme headheight head height footheight foot height 4boxes Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Pri
212. inserted at the beginning of the verse Beamer Template verse end This template is inserted at the end of the verse begin quotation lt action specification gt environment contents end quotation Use this environment to typeset multi paragraph quotations Think again before presenting multi paragraph quotations Beamer Color Font quotation These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the quotation Beamer Template quotation begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the quotation Beamer Template quotation end This template is inserted at the end of the quotation begin quote lt action specification gt environment contents end quote Use this environment to typeset a single paragraph quotation Beamer Color Font quote These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the quote Beamer Template quote begin This template is inserted at the beginning of the quote Beamer Template quote end This template is inserted at the end of the quote 108 11 11 Footnotes First a word of warning Using footnotes is usually not a good idea They disrupt the flow of reading You can use the usual footnote command It has been augmented to take an additional option for placing footnotes at the frame bottom instead of at the bottom of the current minipage footnote lt overlay specification gt options 14 text Inserts a footnote into the current frame Footnotes will always be shown at the bott
213. ion usepackage beamertexpower Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to the TEXPOWER commands having to do with the stepwise command A note on the pause command Both BEAMER and TEXPOWER implement this command and they have the same semantics so there is no need to map this command to anything different in beamertexpower However a difference is that pause can be used almost anywhere in BEAMER whereas is may only be used in non nested situations in TEXPOWER Since BEAMER is only more flexible than TEXPOWER here this will not cause problems when porting In the following the effect of TEXPOWER commands in BEAMER are listed stepwise tezt As in TRXPower this initiates text in which commands like step or switch may be given Text contained in a step command will be enclosed in an only command with the overlay specification lt 1 gt This means that the text of the first step is inserted from the second slide onward the text of the second step is inserted from the third slide onward and so on parstepwise texrt Same as stepwise only uncover is used instead of only when mapping the step command liststepwise text Same as stepwise only an invisible horizontal line is inserted before the text This is presumable useful for solving some problems related to vertical spacing in TEXPOWER step text This is either mapped to only lt 1 gt text or to Nuncover lt 1 gt text
214. ion is going to look exactly the way it looked on your computer 1 2 History I created BEAMER mainly in my spare time Many other people have helped by writing me emails containing suggestions for improvement or corrections or patches or whole new themes by now I have gotten over a thousand emails concerning BEAMER Indeed most of the development was only initiated by feature requests and bug reports Without this feedback BEAMER would still be what it was originally intended to be a small private collection of macros that make using the seminar class easier I created the first version of BEAMER for my PhD defense presentation in February 2003 Month later I put the package on CTAN at the request of some colleagues After that things somehow got out of hand 1 3 Acknowledgments Where to begin BEAMER s development depends not only on me but on the feedback I get from other people Many features have been implemented because someone requested them and I thought that these features would be nice to have and reasonably easy to implement Other people have given valuable feedback on themes on the user s guide on features of the class on the internals of the implementation on special LTFX features and on life in general A small selection of these people includes in no particular order and I have surely forgotten to name lots of people who really really deserve being in this list Carsten for everything Birgit for being the first p
215. ird pdf end frame or like this begin frame frametitle The Three Process Stages includegraphics first pdf 7 Xpause llap includegraphics second pdf Xpause llap includegraphics third pdf end frame A more convenient way is to use the multiinclude command see Section 13 1 3 for details 8 6 Advanced Overlay Specifications 8 6 1 Making Commands and Environments Overlay Specification A ware This section explains how to define new commands that are overlay specification aware Also it explains how to setup counters correctly that should be increased from frame to frame like equation numbering but not from slide to slide You may wish to skip this section unless you want to write your own extensions to the BEAMER class BEAMER extends the syntax of XTRX s standard command newcommand newcommand lt gt command name argument number default optional value text Declares the new command named command name The text should contain the body of this command and it may contain occurrences of parameters like number Here number may be between 1 and argument number 1 The additionally allowed argument is the overlay specification When command name is used it will scan as many as argument number arguments While scanning them it will look for an overlay specification which may be given between any two arguments before the first argument or after the last argument If it find
216. istorical reasons you cannot change all aspects of the fonts used using font themes in same cases special commands and options are needed which are described in the next subsection The following font themes only change certain font attributes they do not choose special font families although that would also be possible and themes doing just that might be added in the future Currently to change the font family you need to load special packages as explained in the next subsection usefonttheme default Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof a 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem The default font theme installs a sans serif font for all text of the presentation The default theme installs different font sizes for things like titles or head and footlines but does not use boldface or italics for hilighting To change some or all text to a serif font use the serif theme Note The command Wmathrm will always produce upright not slanted serif text and the command mathsf will always produce upright sans serif text The command mathbf will produce up
217. it applies to all slides it ensures that in the enumeration the slide number 4 is mentioned Thus there will also be a slide in which all three points are checked 19 4 Uncovering Tagged Formulas Piecewise Suppose you have a three line formula as the following begin align Ag BN amp CM amp D end align Uncovering this formula line by line is a little tricky A first idea is to use the pause or onslide commands Unfortunately these do not work since align internally reprocesses its input several times 180 which messes up the delicate internals of the commands The next idea is the following which works a little better begin align A amp B uncover lt 2 gt x C uncover lt 3 gt amp D end align Unfortunately this does not work in the presence of tags so it works for the align environment What happens is that the tag of the last line is shown on all slides The problem here is that the tag is created when is encountered or when end align is encountered In the last line these are already behind the uncover To solve this problem you can add an empty line without a tag and then insert a negative vertical skip to undo the last line begin align A amp B NM uncover lt 2 gt k C uncover lt 3 gt x D notag end align vskip 1 5em 19 5 Uncovering a Table Linewise When you wish to uncover a table line by line you will run into all sorts of problems if t
218. ite colorful blue structure red alert green example Tf you add more colors for things like code math text etc you should have a very good reason e Be careful when using bright colors on white background especially when using green What looks good on your monitor may look bad during a presentation due to the different ways monitors beamers and printers reproduce colors Add lots of black to pure colors when you use them on bright backgrounds e Maximize contrast Normal text should be black on white or at least something very dark on something very bright Never do things like light green text on not so light green background e Background shadings decrease the legibility without increasing the information content Do not add a background shading just because it somehow looks nicer e Inverse video bright text on dark background can be a problem during presentations in bright en vironments since only a small percentage of the presentation area is light up by the beamer Inverse video is harder to reproduce on printouts and on transparencies 5 6 Choosing Appropriate Fonts and Font Attributes Text and fonts literally surround us constantly Try to think of the last time when there was no text around you within ten meters Likely this has never happened in your life Whenever you wear clothing even a swim suit there is a lot of text right next to your body The history of fonts is nearly as long as the history
219. iven outside the author command whereas in BEAMER and also in HA PROSPER it is given inside 5 When copying slides containing the command includegraphics you will almost surely have to adjust its usage If you use pdfIl4T X to typeset the presentation than you cannot include PostScript file You should convert them to pdf or to png and adjust any usage of includegraphics accordingly 6 When starting to change things you can use all of BEAMER s commands and even mix them with PROSPER commands An example can be found in the file beamerexample prosper tex There are unfortunately quite a few places where you may run into problems e In BEAMER the command XPDForPS will do exactly what the name suggests insert the first argument when run by pdflatex insert the second argument when run by latex However in PROSPER the code inserted for the PDF case is actually PostScript code which is only later converted to PDF by some external program You will need to adjust this PostScript code such that it works with pdflatex which is not always possible e If you used fine grained spacing commands like adding a little horizontal skip here and a big negative vertical skip there the typesetting of the text may be poor It may be a good idea to just remove these spacing commands e If you use pstricks commands you will either have to stick to using latex and dvips or will have to work around them using for example pgf Porting lot s o
220. l Carro The following options may be given 134 e secheader causes a headline to be inserted showing the current section and subsection By default this headline is not shown usetheme Pittsburgh Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria Proof Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p O Results Proof of the Main Theorem A sober theme The right flushed frame titles creates an interesting tension inside each frame usetheme options Rochester Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There ls No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 El Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results m Proof of the Main Theorem A dominant theme without any navigational elements It can be made less dominant by using a different color theme The following options may
221. le section Summary Summary of Main Results ARTICLE The mode specification allows you to provide an alternate section command in article mode This is necessary for example if the short section name is unsuitable for the table of contents Example section lt presentation gt Results Results on the Main Problem section lt article gt Results on the Main Problem Beamer Template Color Font section in toc This template is used when a section entry is to be typeset For the permissible options see the parent template table of contents The following commands are useful for this template e inserttocsection inserts the table of contents version of the current section name e inserttocsectionnumber inserts the number of the current section in the table of contents Beamer Template Color Font section in toc shaded This template is used instead of the previous one if the section should be shown in a shaded way because it is not the current section For the permissible options see the parent template table of contents section lt mode specification gt section name Starts a section without an entry in the table of contents No heading is created but the section name is shown in the navigation bar Example section Outline Example section lt beamer gt Outline subsection lt mode specification gt short subsection name 1 A subsection name This command works the same way as the section command
222. le In this case we can specify the argument number of the predefined option the same way one does for the newcommand command defbeamertemplate itemize item square 1 hrule width 1 height 1 The following have the same effect setbeamertemplate itemize item square 3pt setbeamertemplate itemize item hrule width 3pt height 3pt 154 As for the newcommand command you can also specify a default optional argument defbeamertemplate itemize item square 1 1ex hrule width 1 height 1 The following have the same effect setbeamertemplate itemize item square 3pt setbeamertemplate itemize item hrule width 3pt height 3pt So do the following setbeamertemplate itemize item square setbeamertemplate itemize item hrule width lex height lex The starred version of the command installs the predefined template option but then immediately calls setbeamertemplate for this option This is useful for the default templates If there are any arguments necessary these are set to relax In certain cases if a predefined template option is chosen you do not only wish the template text to be installed but certain extra actions must also be taken once For example a shading must be defined that should not be redefined every time the shading is used later on To implement such actions you can use the optional argument action following the keyword action Thus after the normal use of the d
223. le working on your presentation it may sometimes be useful to T X your tex file quickly and have the presentation contain only the most important information This is especially true if you have a slow machine In this case you can do several things to speedup the compilation First you can use the draft class option documentclass draft beamer Causes the headlines footlines and sidebars to be replaced by gray rectangles their sizes are still computed though Many other packages including pgf and hyperref also speedup when this option is given Second you can use the following command includeonlyframest frame label list This command behaves a little bit like the includeonly command Only the frames mentioned in the list are included All other frames are suppressed Nevertheless the section and subsection commands are still executed so that you still have the correct navigation bars By labeling the current frame as say current and then saying includeonlyframes current you can work on a single frame quickly The frame label list is a comma separated list without spaces of the names of frames that have been labeled To label a frame you must pass the option label name to the frame command or frame environment Example includeonlyframes example1 example3 M rame label example1 This frame will be included M rame label example2 This frame will not be included frame This fr
224. lerted color font 98 block title example color font 99 blocks parent template 97 blue 189 bm 191 bmstyle 191 boldequation environment 191 boxedsteps 193 boxes presentation theme 133 bstep 192 button template color font 85 button border color 86 c class option 57 caption template color font 105 caption name color font 106 circles inner theme 145 CJK package 12 Class options for BEAMER 10pt 174 1ipt 174 12pt 174 14pt 174 17pt 175 20pt 175 8pt 174 9pt 174 bigger 174 c 57 color list of options 12 compress 51 draft 28 envcountsect 100 handout 121 hyperref list of options 13 noamsthm 101 notes hide 124 notes only 124 notes onlyslideswithnotes 124 notes show 124 notheorems 101 smaller 174 t 57 trans 122 ucs 13 usepdftitle false 75 utf8 13 xcolor list of options 14 Classes foils 12 prosper 14 seminar 14 code 193 codeswitch 193 color package 12 Color themes albatross 159 beetle 160 crane 160 default 157 dove 160 fly 161 lily 162 orchid 162 rose 162 seagull 161 seahorse 163 sidebartab 158 structure 157 whale 163 color list of options class option 12 Colors see Beamer colors column 107 column environment 107 columns environment 106 compress class option 51 conference talks conference ornate 20min solution 40 Copenhagen presentation theme 141 crane color theme 160 Darmstadt presentation theme
225. list usecolortheme options name list Same as usetheme only for color themes Color style files are named beamercolortheme name sty usefonttheme options name Same as usetheme only for font themes Font style files are named beamerfonttheme name sty useinnertheme options name Same as usetheme only for inner themes Inner style files are named beamerinnertheme name sty useoutertheme options name Same as usetheme only for outer themes Outer style files are named beameroutertheme name sty If you do not use any of these commands a sober default theme is used for all of them In the following the presentation themes that come with the BEAMER class are described The element layout color and font themes are presented in the following sections 132 15 2 Presentation Themes without Navigation Bars A presentation theme dictates for every single detail of a presentation what it looks like Normally having chosen a particular presentation theme you do not need to specify anything else having to do with the appearance of your presentation the creator of the theme should have taken of that for you However you still can change things afterward either by using a different color font element or even layout theme or by changing specific colors fonts or templates directly When I started naming the presentation themes I soon ran out of ideas on how to call them Instead of giv
226. little marker introducing each item is typeset Parent Beamer Template itemize items This template is a parent template whose children are itemize item itemize subitem and itemize subsubitem This means that if you use the setbeamertemplate command on this template the command is instead called for all of these children with the same arguments The following template options are predefined e default The default item marker is a small triangle colored with the foreground of the BEAMER color itemize item or for subitems itemize subitem etc Note that these colors will automatically change under certain circumstances such as inside an example block or inside an alertenv environment e triangle Alias for the default e circle Uses little circles or dots as item markers e square Uses little squares as item markers e ball Uses little balls as item markers Beamer Template Color Font itemize item Color font parents item This template with item instead of items governs how the marker in front of a first level item is typeset First level refers to the level of nesting See the itemize items template for the options that may be given When the template is inserted the BEAMER font and color itemize item is installed Typically the font is ignored by the template as some special symbol is drawn anyway by the font may be important if an optional argument is given to the item command as in item First The font
227. llowing the effect of FOILS commands in BEAMER are listed MyLogot logo text This is mapped to logo though the logo is internally stored such that it can be switched on and off using LogoOn and LogoOff LogoOn Makes the logo visible LogoDff Makes the logo invisible foilhead dimension frame title If used inside a frame command or frame environment this is mapped to frametitle frame title If used outside any frames a new frame is started with the option allowframebreaks If a frame was previously started using this command it will be closed before the next frame is started The dimension is ignored rotatefoilhead dimension frame title This command has exactly the same effect as foilhead endfoil This is a command that is not available in FOILS In BEAMER it can be used to end a frame that has automatically been opened using foildhead This command must be given before the end of the document if the last frame was opened using foildhead begin boldequation environment contents end boldequation This is mapped to the equation or the equation environment with boldmath switched on FoilTeX Typesets the foil TEX name as in the FOILS package bm text Implemented as in the FOILS package bmstyle text more text Implemented as in the FOILS package The following additional theorem like environments are predefined e Theorem e Lemma e Corollary e Proposition e
228. lock environments and that is not followed by an overlay specification gets the default overlay specification as its specification By providing an incremental specification like lt gt see Section 8 6 4 this will essentially cause all blocks and all enumerations to be uncovered piece wise blocks internally employ action specifications Example In this frame the theorem is shown from the first slide on the proof from the second slide on with the first two itemize points shown one after the other the last itemize point is shown together with the first one In total this frame will contain four slides begin frame lt gt begin theorem A B end theorem begin proof begin itemize item Clearly A C 42 item As shown earlier C B item lt 3 gt Thus A B end itemize end proof end frame The following options may be given e allowdisplaybreaks break desirability causes the AMST X command allowdisplaybreaks break destrability to be issued for the current frame The break desirability can be a value between 0 meaning formulas may never be broken and 4 the default meaning that formulas can be broken anywhere without any penalty The option is just a convenience and makes sense only together with the allowsframebreaks option e allowframebreaks fraction When this option is given the frame will be automatically broken up into several frames if the text does not fit on a sin
229. lock or theorem handle them By default the following actions are available e alert alters the item or block e uncover uncovers the item or block this is the default if no action is specified e only causes the whole item or block to be inserted only on the specified slides e visible causes the text to become visible only on the specified slides the difference between uncover and visible is the same as between uncover and visible e invisible causes the text to become invisible on the specified slides The rest of this section explains how you can add your own actions and make commands action specification aware You may wish to skip it upon first reading You can easily add your own actions An action specification like action 0 slide numbers simply inserts an environment called action env around the item or parameter of Naction with lt slide numbers gt as overlay specification Thus by defining a new overlay specification aware environment named my action name env you can add your own action newenvironment checkenv only setbeamertemplate itemize item X You can then write item lt beamer check 2 gt Text This will change the itemization symbol before Text to X on slide 2 in beamer mode The definition of checkenv used the fact that only also accepts an overlay specification given after its argument The whole action mechanism is base on the following environment beginfactionenv lt action speci
230. lor font parents item projected Same as item projected for subitems that is for items on the second level of indentation Beamer Color Font subsubitem Color font parents subitem Beamer Color Font subsubitem projected Color font parents subitem projected 95 11 2 Hilighting The BEAMER class predefines commands and environments for hilighting text Using these commands makes is easy to change the appearance of a document by changing the theme structure lt overlay specification gt 1 text ARTICLE LYX The given text is marked as part of the structure that is it is supposed to help the audience see the structure of your presentation If the overlay specification is present the command only has an effect on the specified slides Example structure Paragraph Heading Internally this command just puts the text inside a structureenv environment Structure text is typeset as bold text This can be changed by modifying the templates You need to use T X mode to insert this command Beamer Color Font structure This color font is used when structured text is typeset but it is also widely used as a base for many other colors including the headings of blocks item buttons and titles In most color themes the colors for navigational elements in the headline or the footline are derived from the foreground color of structure By changing the structure color you can easily change the basic color of your
231. ly or sffamily family family name sets the font family attribute to the given family name The command has the same effect as family fontfamily family name The family name is normally a somewhat cryptic abbreviation of a font family name that installed somewhere on the system For example the family name for Times happens to be ptm No one can remember these names so its perfectly normal if you have to look them up laboriously parent parent list specifies a list of parent fonts When the BEAMER font is used the parents are used first Thus any font attributes set by one of the parents is inherited by the BEAMER font except if this attribute is overwritten by the font Example setbeamerfont parent A size large setbeamerfont parent B series bfseries setbeamerfont child parent parent A parent B size small normalfont This text is in a normal font usebeamerfont parent A This text is large usebeamerfont parent B This text is large and bold usebeamerfont parent B This text is still large and bold usebeamerfont parent B This text is only bold but not large usebeamerfont child This text is small and bold 177 Part IV Howtos This part contains explanations of how to do things commonly known as howtos These explanations are not really part of the BEAMER core Rather they explain how to use BEAMER to achieve a certain effect or how get something special done
232. ly the attribute boldface set say ing usebeamerfont will always cause the current font to become a normal size normal shape bold default family font 18 3 3 Setting Beamer s Fonts As for BEAMER colors there exists a central command for setting and changing BEAMER fonts setbeamerfont beamer font name attributes This command sets or resets certain attributes of the BEAMER font beamer font name In the unstarred version this command just adds those attributes that have not been mentioned in a previous call and overwrites those that have been mentioned Thus the following two command blocks have the same effect Example setbeamerfont frametitle size large setbeamerfont frametitle series bfseries setbeamerfont frametitle size large series bfseries In the starred version the font attributes are first completely reset that is set to be empty The following attributes may be given e size size command sets the size attribute of the BEAMERfont The size command should be a normal IATfX command used for setting the font size or it should be empty Useful commands include tiny scriptsize footnotesize small normalsize large Large huge and Huge BEAMER also introduces the two font sizes Tiny and TINY for really small text But you should know exactly what you are doing if you use them You have been warned Note that there is a different between specifying and empty command an
233. main tex lots of output gt pdflatex main tex lots of output You can next use a program like the Acrobat Reader or xpdf to view the resulting presentation gt acroread main pdf When printing a presentation using Acrobat make sure that the option expand small pages to paper size in the printer dialog is enabled This is necessary because slides are only 128mm times 96mm To put several slides onto one page useful for the handout version or to enlarge the slides you can use the program pdfnup Also many commercial programs can perform this task If you put several slides on one page and if these slides normally have a white background it may be useful to write the following in your preamble mode lt handout gt beamertemplatesolidbackgroundcolor black 5 This will cause the slides of the handout version to have a very light gray background This makes it easy to discern the slides border if several slides are put on one page Choose View pdf to view your presentation 4 3 2 Creating PostScript To create a PostScript version you should first ascertain that the HYPERREF package which is automatically loaded by the BEAMER class uses the option dvips or some compatible option see the documentation of the HYPERREF package for details Whether this is the case depends on the contents of your local hyperref cfg file You can enforce the usage of this option by passing dvips or a compatible option to the
234. mall caps 18 2 Font Changes Made Without Using Font Themes While most font decisions can be made using font themes for historical reasons some changes can only be made using class options or by loading special packages These options are explained in the following Possibly these options will be replaced by themes in the future 18 2 1 Choosing a Font Size for Normal Text As pointed out in Section 5 6 1 measuring the default font size in points is not really a good idea for presentations Nevertheless BEAMER does just that setting the default font size to 11pt as usual This may seem ridiculously small but the actual size of each frame is just 128mm times 96mm and the viewer application enlarges the font By specifying a default font size smaller than 11pt you can put more onto each slide by specifying a larger font size you can fit on less To specify the font size you can use the following class options documentclass 8pt beamer This is way too small Requires that the package extsize is installed documentclass 9pt beamer This is also too small Requires that the package extsize is installed documentclass 10pt beamer If you really need to fit much onto each frame use this option Works without extsize documentclass smaller beamer Same as the 10pt option documentclass 11ipt beamer The default font size You need not specify this option documentclass 12pt beamer Makes all fonts a lit
235. me Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem For this theme you can specify an arbitrary number of templates for the boxes in the headline and in the footline You can add a template for another box by using the following commands addheadbox beamer color 4 box template Each time this command is invoked a new box is added to the head line with the first added box being shown on the left All boxes will have the same size The beamer color will be used to setup the foreground and background colors of the box Example 133 addheadbox section in head foot tiny quad 1 Box addheadbox structure tiny quad 2 Box A similar effect as the above commands can be achieved by directly installing a head template that contains two beamercolorboxes setbeamertemplate headline leavevmode begin beamercolorbox width 5 paperwidth section in head foot tiny quad 1 Box end beamercolorbox begin beamercolorbox width 5 paperwidth structure tiny quad 2 Box end beamercolorbox While being more complicated the above commands offer more flexibility addfootbox beamer color H box template Example addfootbox section in head foot tiny quad 1 Box addfootbox structure tiny quad 2 Box usetheme options Bergen Example There Is No Largest Prime Number P The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Larg
236. me and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme installs white on dark block titles The background of the title of a normal block is set to the foreground of the structure color the foreground is set to white The background of alerted blocks are set to red and of example blocks to green The body of blocks get a nearly transparent background usecolortheme rose Example 162 Eea ugesteine There Is No Largest Prime Number Danos pubs The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme installs nearly transparent backgrounds for both block titles and block bodies This theme is much less aggressive than the orchid theme The background colors are derived from the foreground of the structure BEAMER color 17 1 4 Outer Color Themes An outer color theme changes the palette colors on which the colors used in the headline footline and sidebar are based by default Outer color themes normally do not change the color of inner elements except possibly for titlelike They have happen to sea animal name
237. me other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed
238. ming that applause au is encoded correctly 44100 samples per second mono plaw encoded 16 bits per sample sound autostart applause au Just like movies sounds can also serve as destinations of special sound hyperlinks 118 ARTICLE LYX hyperlinksound options sound label H text Causes the text to become a sound hyperlink When you click on the text the sound with the label sound label will start to play The following options may be given e loop or repeat Causes the sound to start again when the end has been reached e mixsound true or false If set to true the sound is played in addition to any sound that is already playing If set to false all other sounds though not sound from movies is stopped before the the sound is played The default is false Since there is no direct way of stopping the playback of a sound the following command is useful hyperlinkmute tezt Causes the text to become a hyperlink that when clicked stops the playback of all sounds 13 3 Slide Transitions PDF in general and the Acrobat Reader in particular offer a standardized way of defining slide transitions Such a transition is a visual effect that is used to show the slide For example instead of just showing the slide immediately whatever was shown before might slowly dissolve and be replaced by the slide s content There are a number of commands that can be used to specify what effect should
239. mode specifications They specify which slides of a frame should be shown for a special version for example for the handout version As explained in Section 8 2 a mode specification is written alongside the normal overlay specification inside the pointed brackets It is separated from the normal specification by a vertical bar and a space Here is an example only lt 1 3 5 9 handout 2 3 5 gt Text This specification says Normally in beamer mode insert the text on slides 1 3 and 5 9 For the handout version insert the text only on slides 2 3 and 5 If no special mode specification is given for handouts the default is always This causes the desirable effect that if you do not specify anything the overlay specification is effectively suppressed for the handout An especially useful specification is the following only lt 3 handout 0 gt Not shown on handout Since there is no zeroth slide the text is not shown Likewise alert lt 3 handout 0 gt Text will not alert the text on a handout You can also use a mode specification for the overlay specification of the frame command as in the following example frame lt i handout 0 gt Text This causes the frame to be suppressed in the handout version Also you can restrict the presentation such that only specific slides of the frame are shown on the handout frame lt i handout 4 5 gt Text It is also possible to give only an alternate overlay spec
240. monstrated in the following example where it is assumed that the accumulate option is given Example begin frame begin slide This is shown from the first slide on overlay 2 This is shown from the third slide on overlay 1 This is shown from the second slide on This is shown once more from the third slide on 188 end slide end frame begin slide environment contents end slide Mainly installs an overlay 0 around the environment contents If the accumulate option is given this has no effect but otherwise it will cause the main text of the slide to be shown only on the first slide This is useful if you really wish to physically place slides on top of each other The starred version does the same as the nonstarred one If this command is not issued inside a frame it sets up a frame with the containsverbatim option set Thus this frame will contain only a single slide Example begin slide Some text end slide frame begin slide Some text And an overlay 1 overlay end slide red Mapped to color red blue Mapped to color blue green Mapped to color green ifslide True in the presentation modes false in the article mode ifslidesonly Same as ifslide ifarticle False in the presentation modes true in the article mode ifportrait Always false The following commands are parsed by BEAMER but have no effect e ptsize
241. mplate color font 92 items parent template 92 subitem template color font 92 subsubitem template color font 92 itemize enumerate body begin template 94 itemize enumerate body end template 94 items parent template 94 itemstep environment 186 itemize itemize itemize itemize JuanLesPins presentation theme 136 keywords 75 label 65 lecture 79 lily color theme 162 listings package 13 liststepwise 192 local structure color 96 Logo 184 logo 55 logo template color font 55 LogoOff 191 LogoOn 191 lower separation line foot color 169 lower separation line head color 169 Luebeck presentation theme 142 Madrid presentation theme 134 maketitle 74 Malmoe presentation theme 142 Marburg presentation theme 138 math text color 167 math text displayed color 167 math text inlined color 167 middle separation line foot color 169 middle separation line head color 169 mini frame template color font 52 mini frame in current subsection template 52 frame in other subsection template 52 frames parent template 51 miniframes outer theme 147 mode 128 129 Montpellier presentation theme 136 mini mini 199 movie 112 msc package 13 multiinclude 116 multimedia package 112 musixtex package 13 MyLogo 191 navigation symbols template color font 54 newcommand 68 newenvironment 69 newtheorem 101 noamsthm class option 101 nonboxedsteps 193 no
242. mpmulti Defines the command multiinclude The code of this package is due to Klaus Guntermann with some additions of mine It can used together with BEAMER and with ppower4 i e it can be used as a replacement for mpmulti if the pause package is also included in a ppower4 presentation multiinclude lt default overlay specification gt options base file name Except for the possibility of specifying a default overlay specification this command is identical to the multiinclude command from the ppower4 package If no overlay specification is given the command will search for files called base file name number for increasing numbers number starting with zero As long as it finds these files it issues an includegraphics command on them The files following the first one are put on top of the first one Between any two invocations of includegraphics a pause command is inserted You can modify this behaviour is different ways by given suitable options see below Example Assume that MetaPost has created files called gra 0 gra 1 and gra 2 You can then create frame consisting of three slides that incrementally show the graphic as follows begin frame nultiinclude gra end frame The effect of providing a default overlay specification is the following First no pause command is inserted between graphics Instead each graphic is surrounded by an actionenv environment with the overlay specification se
243. mpmulti or from the xmpmulti package How this program works is explained in Section 13 1 3 111 13 Animations Sounds and Slide Transitions 13 1 Animations 13 1 1 Including External Animation Files If you have created an animation using some external program like a renderer you can use the capabilities of the presentation program like the Acrobat Reader to show the animation Unfortunately currently there is no portable way of doing this and even the Acrobat Reader does not support this feature on all platforms To include an animation in a presentation you can use for example the package multimedia sty which is part of the BEAMER package You have to include this package explicitly Despite being distributed as part of the BEAMER distribution this package is perfectly self sufficient and can be used independently of BEAMER usepackage multimedia A stand alone package that implements several commands for including external animation and sound files in a PDF document The package can be used together with both dvips plus ps2pdf and pdflatex though the special sound support is available only in pdflatex When including this package you must also include the hyperref package Since you will typically want to include hyperref only at the very end of the preamble multimedia will not include hyperref itself However multimedia can be included both before and after hyperref Since BEAMER includes hyperref automatically you need n
244. n This is useful if you need to save space e width dimension sets the width of the sidebar 15 5 Presentation Themes with a Mini Frame Navigation usetheme options Berlin Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria El Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p m Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number A dominant theme with strong colors and dominating rectangular areas The head and footlines give lot s of information and leave little space for the actual slide contents This theme is useful for conferences where the audience is not likely to know the title of the talk or who is presenting it The theme can be made less dominant by using a different color theme The following options may be given e compress causes the mini frames in the headline to use only a single line This is useful for saving space usetheme options Ilmenau Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Large
245. n true or false shows or suppresses line showing the subsection in the headline It is shown by default useoutertheme options sidebar Example 148 There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No There Is No Largest Prime Largest Prime Number Number aes There Is No Largest Prime Number age With an introduction to a new proof technique creais Theorem Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof Euklid of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem In this layout a sidebar is shown that contains a small table of contents with the current section or subsection is hilighted The frame title is vertically centered in a rectangular area at the top that always occupies the same amount of space in all frames Finally the logo is shown in the corner resulting from the sidebar and the frame title rectangle There are several ways of modifying the layout using the options If you set the width of the sidebar to Opt it is not shown giving you a layout in which the frame title does not wobble since it always occupies the same amount of space on all slides Conversely if you set the height of the frame title rectangle to Opt the rectangular area is not used and the
246. n is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General
247. nal Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem The example was created using usecolortheme named SeaGreen structure This theme offers a convenient way of changing the color used for structural elements More precisely it just changes the foreground of the BEAMER color structure You can also achieve this by directly invoking the function setbeamercolor but this color theme makes things a bit easier The theme offers several options which can be used to specify the color to be used for structural elements e rgb rgb tuple sets the structure foreground to the specified red green blue tuple The num bers are given as decimals between 0 and 1 For example rgb 0 5 0 0 yields a dark red e RGB rgb tuple does the same as rgb except that the numbers range between 0 and 255 For example RGB 128 0 0 yields a dark red e cmyk cymk tuple sets the structure foreground to the specified cyan magenta yellow black tuple The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1 For example cymk 0 1 1 0 5 yields a dark red e cmy cym tuple is similar to cmyk except that the black component is not specified e hsb hsb tuple sets the structure foreground to the specified hue saturation brightness tuple The numbers are given as decimals between 0 and 1 For example hsb 10 1 5 yields a dark red e named 1 color name sets the str
248. nal texmf tree which is usually located in your home directory at texmf or Library texmf You should install the packages either in the local tree or in your personal tree depending on whether you have write access to the local tree Installation in the root tree can cause problems since an update of the whole TFX installation will replace this whole tree Inside whatever texmf directory you have chosen create the sub sub sub directories e texmf tex latex beamer e texmf tex latex pgf and e texmf tex latex xcolor and place all files in these three directories Finally you need to rebuild TFX s filename database This done by running the command texhash or mktexlsr they are the same In MiKT X there is a menu option to do this For usage of the BEAMER class with LyX you have to do all of the above Then you also have to make LyX aware of the file beamer lyx layouts beamer layout To do so link or not so good in case of later updates copy this file to the directory lyx layouts in your home directory Then use LyX s Reconfigure command to make LyX aware of this file For a more detailed explanation of the standard installation process of packages you might wish to consult http ww ctan org installationadvice However note that the BEAMER package does not come with a ins file simply skip that part 2 4 Updating the Installation To update your installation from a previous version simply replace everything in th
249. ncoding Conceptually the newer T1 encoding is preferable over the old OT1 encoding For example hyphenation of words containing umlauts like the famous German word Fraulein will work only if you use the T1 en coding Unfortunately the EC fonts that is the Tl encoded Computer Modern fonts are distributed on small installations just as MetaFont sources and only have bitmap renditions of each glyph For this reason using the T1l encoded EC fonts on such small installations will produce PDF files that render poorly MiKTFX for Windows platforms and teTeX for UNIX Linux can be installed with different levels of completeness Concerning the Computer Modern fonts the following packages can be installed cm super fonts lmodern Latin Modern fonts and 1gc fonts the latter containing the Latin Greek and Cyrillic alphabets Concerning other fonts the txfonts and pxfonts are two extended sets of the Times and the Palatino PostScript fonts both packages containing extended sets of mathematical glyphs Most other standard PostScript fonts are also available in T1 encoding Among the packages that make available the Computer Modern fonts in the T1 encoding the package lmodern may be suggested If you use 1modern several extra fonts become available like a sans serif boldface math and extra symbols like proper guillemots To select the T1 encoding use usepackage T1 fontenc Thus if you have the LM fonts installed you could write usep
250. nds of deviations there are several things you can do to prepare planned detours or planned short cuts 5 2 You can add skip buttons When such a button is pressed you jump over a well defined part of your talk Skip button have two advantages over just pressing the forward key is rapid succession first you immediately end up at the correct position and second the button s label can give the audience a visual feedback of what exactly will be skipped For example when you press a skip button labeled Skip proof nobody will start puzzling over what he or she has missed You can add an appendix to your talk The appendix is kept perfectly separated from the main talk Only once you enter the appendix part presumably by hyperjumping into it does the appendix structure become visible You can put all frames that you do not intend to show during the normal course of your talk but which you would like to have handy in case someone asks into this appendix You can add goto buttons and return buttons to create detours Pressing a goto button will jump to a certain part of the presentation where extra details can be shown In this part there is a return button present on each slide that will jump back to the place where the goto button was pressed In BEAMER you can use the Nagainframe command to continue frames that you previously started somewhere but where certain details have been suppress
251. ned in Section 14 1 Typically you might wish to put several handout slides on one page See Section 4 3 2 on how to do this You may also wish to create an article version of your talk An article version of your presentation is a normal T X text typeset using for example the document class article or perhaps 11ncs or a similar document class The BEAMER class offers facilities to have this version coexist with your presentation version in one file and to share code Also you can include slides of your presentation as figures in your article version Details on how to setup the article version can be found in Section 14 4 Creating an article version is not really possible in LyX You can try but I would not advise it 29 5 Guidelines for Creating Presentations In this section I sketch the guidelines that I try to stick to when I create presentations These guidelines either arise out of experience out of common sense or out of recommendations by other people or books These rules are certainly not intended as commandments that if not followed will result in catastrophe The central rule of typography also applies to creating presentations Every rule can be broken but no rule may be ignored 5 1 Structuring a Presentation 5 1 1 Know the Time Constraints When you start to create a presentation the very first thing you should worry about is the amount of time you have for your presentation Depending on the occasion this can
252. nfinite Sets begin theorem lt 1 gt There exists an infinite set end theorem begin proof lt 2 gt This follows from the axiom of infinity end proof begin example lt 3 gt Natural Numbers The set of natural numbers is infinite end example end frame In the following only the English versions are discussed The German ones behave analogously begin theorem lt action specification gt additional text lt action specification gt environment contents 99 PRESEN TATION ARTICLE end theorem Inserts a theorem Only one action specification may be given If present the additional text is shown behind the word Theorem in rounded brackets although this can be changed by the template The appearance of the theorem is governed by the templates theorem begin and theorem end see their description later on for details on how to change these Every theorem is put into a block environment thus the templates for blocks also apply The theorem style a concept from amsthm used for this environment is plain In this style the body of a theorem should be typeset in italics The head of the theorem should be typeset in a bold font but this is usually overruled by the templates If the option envcountsect is given either as class option in one of the presentation modes or as an option to the package beamerarticle in article mode then the numbering of the theorems is local to each section with
253. ng begin itemize item lt alert gt Apple item lt alert gt Peach item lt alert gt Plum item lt alert gt Orange end itemize 72 This will alert the current item when it is uncovered For example the first specification lt alert gt is replaced by lt 1 alert 1 gt the second is replaced by lt 2 alert 2 gt and so on Since the itemize envi ronment also allows you to specify a default overlay specification see the documentation of that environment the above example can be written even more economically as follows begin itemize lt alert gt item Apple item Peach item Plum item Orange end itemize The pause command also updates the counter beamerpauses You can change this counter yourself using the normal ATEX commands setcounter or addtocounter Any occurence of a sign may be followed by an offset in round brackets This offset will be added to the value of beamerpauses Thus if beamerpauses is 2 then lt 1 gt expands to lt 3 gt and lt 1 gt expands to lt 1 2 gt There is another special sign you can use in an overlay specification that behaves similarly to the sign a dot When you write lt gt a similar thing as in lt gt happens except that the counter beamerpauses is not incremented and except that you get the value of beamerpauses decreased by one Thus a dot possibly followed by an offset just expands to the current value of t
254. ng sans serif If you use this option you should most likely also use the first two However by not using stillsansseriflarge you get a serif possibly italic title over a sans serif text This can be an interesting visual effect Naturally interesting typographic effect can mean terrible typographic effect if you choose the wrong fonts combinations or sizes You ll need some typographic experience to judge this correctly If in doubt try asking someone who should now e onlymath is a short cut for selecting all of the above options except for the first Thus using this option causes only mathematical text to by typeset using a serif font Recall that by default mathematical formulas are also typeset using sans serif letters In most cases this is visually the most pleasing and easily readable way of typesetting mathematical formulas if the surrounding text is typeset using sans serif However in mathematical texts the font used to render say a variable is sometimes used to differentiate between different meanings of this variable In such case it may be necessary to typeset mathematical text using serif letters Also if you have a lot of mathematical text the audience may be quicker to parse it if it is typeset the way people usually read mathematical text in a serif font usefonttheme options structurebold Example 172 There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is
255. ning or end of the frame subsection section He finds the symbols quite small but decides not write an email to BEAMER s author since he also thinks that bigger symbols would be distracting Euclid chooses View PDF to view the resulting presentation On a slow machine this may take a while See Section 4 3 2 for ways of speeding up the compilation 3 6 The Table of Contents The next frame contains a table of contents begin frame frametitle Outline tableofcontents end frame Furthermore this frame has an individual title Outline A comment in the frame says that Euclid might wish to try to add the pausesections option He tries this changing the frame to begin frame frametitle Outline tableofcontents pausesections end frame After re pdfl4TfXing the presentation he finds that instead of a single slide there are now two table of contents slides in the presentation On the first of these only the first section is shown on the second both sections are shown scanning down in the file Euclid finds that indeed there are section commands introducing these sections The effect of the pausesections seems to be that one can talk about the first section before the second one is shown Then Euclid can press the down or right key to show the complete table of contents and can talk about the second section 3 7 Sections and Subsections The next commands Euclid finds are section Motivation subs
256. not hyphenate words If absolutely necessary hyphenate words by hand using the command Break lines by hand using the command AX Do not rely on automatic line breaking Break where there is a logical pause For example good breaks in the tape alphabet is larger than the input alphabet are before is and before the second the Bad breaks are before either alphabet and before larger Text and numbers in figures should have the same size as normal text Illegible numbers on axes usually ruin a chart and its message 5 1 4 Interactive Elements Ideally during a presentation you would like to present your slides in a perfectly linear fashion presumably by pressing the page down key once for each slide However there are different reasons why you might have to deviate from this linear order Your presentation may contain different levels of detail that may or may not be skipped or expanded depending on the audience s reaction You are asked questions and wish to show supplementary slides You present a complicated picture and you have to zoom out different parts to explain details You are asked questions about an earlier slide which forces you to find and then jump to that slide 33 You cannot really prepare against the last kind of questions In this case you can use the navigation bars and symbols to find the slide you are interested in see 7 2 3 Concerning the first three ki
257. nsverbatim option to frames containing this environment or use defverbatim 11 Nusepackagetamsthm This package is automatically loaded since BEAMER uses it for typesetting theorems If you do not wish it to be loaded which can be necessary especially in article mode if the package is incompatible with the document class you can use the class option noamsthm to suppress its loading See Section 11 4 for more details usepackage french babel When using the french style certain features that clash with the functionality of the BEAMER class will be turned off For example enumerations are still produced the way the theme dictates not the way the french style does usepackage spanish babel PRESEN When using the spanish style certain features that clash with the functionality of the BEAMER class TATION will be turned off In particular the special behaviour of the pointed brackets lt and gt is deactivated ARTICLE To make the characters lt and gt active in article mode pass the option activeospeccharacters to the package beamerbasearticle This will lead to problems with overlay specifications usepackage color PRESEN The color package is automatically loaded by beamer cls This makes it impossible to pass options TATION to color in the preamble of your document To pass a list of options to color you must use the following class option documentclass color list of options beamer Causes the list of
258. nt 100 example text color font 169 exampleblock environment 99 expandbeamertemplate 153 fly color theme 161 foilhead 191 foils class 12 FoilTeX 191 Font themes default 171 professionalfonts 171 serif 172 structurebold 172 structureitalicserif 173 structuresmallcapsserif 173 fontenc package 12 Fonts see Beamer fonts fontText 185 fontTitle 185 footline template color font 49 footnote 109 footnote template color font 109 footnote mark color font 109 fourier package 12 frame 46 frame environment 42 frame begin template 46 frame end template 46 framesubtitle 56 framesubtitle color font 57 frametitle 55 frametitle template color font 56 frametitle continuation template color font 43 framezoom 89 Frankfurt presentation theme 140 XFromSlide 185 fromSlide 185 generic talks generic ornate 15min 45min solution 40 Goettingen presentation theme 138 green 189 HA prosper package 13 handout class option 121 Hannover presentation theme 138 headline template color font 47 hiddenitem 186 hyperlink 87 hyperlinkappendixend 87 hyperlinkappendixstart 87 hyperlinkdocumentend 87 hyperlinkdocumentstart 87 hyperlinkframeend 87 hyperlinkframeendprev 87 hyperlinkframestart 87 hyperlinkframestartnext 87 hyperlinkmovie 114 hyperlinkmute 119 hyperlinkpresentationend 87 hyperlinkpresentationstart 87 hyperlinkslidenext 87 hyperlinksl
259. ntaining an image for this stage You can include such a series of images conveniently by using the style mpmulti sty from the ppower4 package This style written by Klaus Guntermann introduces a command called multiinclude that takes the base name of a graphic file like mygraphic and will then search for files called mygraphic 0 mygraphic 1 and so on till no more files are found It will then include these graphics files using the includegraphics command but will put these graphics on top of each other Furthermore and this is the important part it inserts a pause command after each graphic This command is defined in the ppower4 package and has the same effect as the pause command of BEAMER For this reason both ppower4 and also BEAMER will first display the basic graphic and will then additionally show the next graphic on each slide If you try to use mpmulti sty directly you will run into the problem that it includes a file called pause sty which is part of the ppower4 package You might also consider using the style xmpmulti sty that comes with BEAMER This file is mainly identical to mpmulti except for two differences First it does not include pause sty a style that concep tually clashes with BEAMER although BEAMER contains a workaround that sidesteps the problem Second it extends the multiinclude command by allowing a special default overlay specification to be given The effect of this is explained below usepackage x
260. ntly in force should not be changed Specifying a foreground this way will override any inherited foreground color e bg color does the same as the fg option but for the background e parent parent beamer color s specifies that beamer color name should inherit from the speci fied parent beamer color s Any foreground and or background color set by the parents will also be used when beamer color name is used If multiple parents specify a foreground the last one wins and likewise for the backgrounds Example setbeamercolor father fg red setbeamercolor mother bg green setbeamercolor child parent father mother begin beamercolorbox child Terrible red on green text end beamercolorbox setbeamercolor father fg blue begin beamercolorbox child Now terrible blue on green text since parent was changed end beamercolorbox Note that a change of the foreground or background of a parent changes the corresponding fore ground or background of the child unless it is overruled A BEAMER color cannot only have parents but also grandparents and so on e use another beamer color is used to make sure that another BEAMER color is setup correctly before the foreground or background color specification are evaluated Suppose you wish the foreground of items to be a mixture of 50 of the foreground of structural elements and 50 of the normal foreground color You could try setbeamercolor item fg stru
261. nts over plain text Use description when you define several things Do not use more than two levels of subitemizing BEAMER supports three levels but you should not use that third level Never put more than five items in an itemize or an enumerate Thus you need two frames to present the Ten Commandmends Emphasis is an important part of creating structure Use alert to highlight important things This can be a single word or a whole sentence However do not overuse hilighting since this will negate the effect Use columns Never use footnotes They needlessly disrupt the flow of reading Either what is said in the footnote is important and should be put in the normal text or it is not important and should be omitted especially in a presentation Use quote or quotation to typeset quoted text Do not use the option allowframebreaks except for long bibliographies Do not use long bibliographies Writing the Text Use short sentences Prefer phrases over complete sentences For example instead of The figure on the left shows a Turing machine the figure on the right shows a finite automaton try Left A Turing machine Right A finite automaton Even better turn this into an itemize or a description Punctuate correctly no punctuation after phrases complete punctuation in and after complete sen tences Never use a smaller font size to fit more on a frame Never ever use the evil option shrink Do
262. number specifies which section should be numbered as section 1 This is useful if you have a first section like an overview section that should not receive a number Section numbers are not shown by default To show them you must install a different table of contents templates hideallsubsections causes all subsections to be hidden This command is a shorthand for spec ifying the option subsectionstyle hide hideothersubsections causes the subsections of sections other than the current one to be hidden This command is a shorthand for specifying the option subsectionstyle show show hide part part number causes the table of contents of part part number to be shown instead of the table of contents of the current part which is the default This option can be combined with the other options although combining it with the current option obviously makes no sense pausesections causes a pause command to be issued before each section This is useful if you wish to show the table of contents in an incremental way pausesubsections causes a pause command to be issued before each subsection sections overlay specification causes only the sections mentioned in the overlay specification to be shown For example sections lt 2 4 handout 0 gt causes only the second third and fourth section to be shown in the normal version nothing to be shown in the handout version and everything to be shown in all other versions For conven
263. number of the part of the current section or subsection that is to be typeset in a navigation bar Beamer Template section in head foot shaded This template is used instead of section in head foot for typesetting sections that are currently shaded Such shading is usually applied to all sections but the current one Note that this template does not have its own color and font When this template is called the BEAMER font and color section in head foot will have been setup Then at the start of the template you will typically change the current color or start a colormixin environment The following template options are predefined 52 e default percentage The default template changes the current color to fg percentage bg This causes the current color to become washed out or shaded The default percentage is 50 Example You can use the following command to make the shaded entries very light setbeamertemplate section in head foot shaded default 20 Beamer Template Color Font section in sidebar This template is used to render a section entry if it occurs in the sidebar typically as part of a mini table of contents shown there The background of the BEAMER color is used as background for the entry Just like section in head foot you cannot usually use this template yourself and you should also use Ninsertsectionhead to insert the name of the section that is to be typeset For once no default is ins
264. o include the package graphics or graphicx Also the pgf package offers commands for including graphics Either will work fine in most situations so choose whichever you like Like pgfdeclareimage includegraphics also includes an image only once in a pdf file even if it used several times as a matter of fact the graphics package is even a bit smarter about this than pgf However currently only pgf offers the ability to include images that are partly transparent At the end of this section you will find notes on how to include specific graphic formats like eps or jpg You can use the usual Insert Graphic command to insert a graphic The commands includegraphics pgfuseimage and pgfimage are overlay specification aware in BEAMER If the overlay specification does not apply the command has no effect This is useful for creating a simple animation where each picture of the animation resides in a different file begin frame Vincludegraphics lt 1 gt height 2cm step1 pdf includegraphics lt 2 gt height 2cm step2 pdf includegraphics lt 3 gt height 2cm step3 pdf end frame A different way of creating graphics is to insert graphic drawing commands directly into your BT X file There are numerous packages that help you do this They have various degrees of sophistication Inlining graphics suffers from none of the disadvantages mentioned above for including external graphic files but the main disadvantage is that
265. o the last slide of the current frame hyperlinkframestartnext lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the next frame hyperlinkframeendprev lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the previous frame The previous four command exist also with frame replaced by subsection everywhere and also again with frame replaced by section hyperlinkpresentationstart lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the presentation hyperlinkpresentationend lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the presentation This excludes the appendix hyperlinkappendixstart lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the appendix If there is no appendix this will jump to the last slide of the document hyperlinkappendixend lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the appendix hyperlinkdocumentstart lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the presentation hyperlinkdocumentend lt overlay specification gt L link text Clicking the text jumps to the last slide of the presentation or if an appendix is present to the last slide of the appendix 87 10 2 Repeating a Frame
266. odes e beamer is the default mode e handout is the mode for creating handouts e trans is the mode for creating transparencies e article is the mode when control has been transferred to another class like article cls Note that the mode is also article if control is transferred to say book cls In addition to these modes BEAMER recognizes the following names for modes sets e all refers to all modes e presentation refers to the first three modes that is to all modes except for the article mode 127 Depending on the current mode you may wish to have certain text inserted only in that mode For example you might wish a certain frame or a certain table to be left out of your article version In some situations you can use the only command for this purpose However the command mode which is described in the following is much more powerful than only The command actually comes in three flavors which only slightly differ in syntax The first and simplest is the version that takes one argument It behaves essentially the same way as only mode lt mode specification gt text Causes the text to be inserted only for the specified modes Recall that a mode specification is just an overlay specification in which no slides are mentioned The text should not do anything fancy that involves mode switches or including other files In par ticular you should not put an include command inside text Use the arg
267. of the overlays This is what this option does When the new material of the ith overlay is shown the material of all previous overlays is also shown Example The following example is an extract of beamerexample seminar tex documentclass ignorenonframetext beamer usepackage accumulated beamerseminar usepackage beamerthemeclassic title A beamer presentation using seminar commands author Till Tantau let heading frametitle begin document begin frame maketitle end frame This is some text outside any frame It will only be shown in the article version begin frame begin slide heading This is a frame title beginfenumerate overlay1 item Overlays are a little tricky in seminar overlay2 item But it is possible to use them in beamer end enumerate end slide end frame end document You can use all normal BEAMER commands and concepts like overlay specifications in the file You can also create an article version by using the class article and including the package beamerarticle In the following the effect of SEMINAR commands in BEAMER are listed overlay number Shows the material till the end of the current T X group only on overlay numbered number 1 or if the accumulate option is given from that overlay on Usages of this command may be nested as in SEMINAR If an overlay command is given inside another it temporarily overrules the outer one as de
268. of civilization itself There are tens of thousands of fonts available these days some of which are the product of hundreds of years of optimization Choosing the right fonts for a presentation is by no means trivial and wrong choices will either just look bad or worse make the audience having trouble reading your slides This user s guide cannot replace a good book on typography but in the present section you ll find several hints that should help you setup fonts for a BEAMER presentation that look good A font has numerous attributes like weight family or size All of these have an impact on the usability of the font in presentations In the following these attributes are described and advantages and disadvantages of the different choices are sketched 35 5 6 1 Font Size Perhaps the most obvious attribute of a font is its size Fonts are traditionally measured in points How much a point is depends on whom you ask TEX thinks a point is the 72 27th part of an inch which is 2 54 cm On the other hand PostScript and Adobe think a point is the 72th part of an inch T X calls this a big point The are differences between American and European points Once it is settled how much a point is claiming that a text is in 11pt means that the height of the letters in the font are 11pt However this height stems from the time when letters where still cast in lead and refers to the the vertical size of the lead letters
269. of of the Main Theorem A variation on the Antibes theme that has a much smoother appearance It can be made less dominant by choosing a different color theme usetheme Montpellier Example There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number L results L Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem A There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics A University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A sober theme giving basic navigational hints The headline can be made more dominant by using a different color theme 136 15 4 Presentation Themes with a Table of Contents Sidebar usetheme options Berkeley Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No There Is No Largest Prime Largest Prime Number Te vee E ee NUN 7 With an introduction to a new proof technique T DET Euklid of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than
270. olor green 90 black colored alert text end colormixin end frame newcount opaqueness newdimen offset begin frame frametitle Flying Theorems You Really Shouldn t animate lt 2 14 gt animatevalue lt 1 15 gt opaqueness 100 0 animatevalue lt 1 15 gt offset Ocm 5cm begin colormixin the opaqueness averagebackgroundcolor hskip offset begin minipage textwidth begin theorem This theorem flies out end theorem end minipage end colormixin animatevalue lt 1 15 gt opaqueness 0 100 animatevalue lt 1 15 gt offset 5cm Ocm begin colormixin the opaqueness averagebackgroundcolor hskip offset begin minipage textwidth begin theorem This theorem flies in end theorem end minipage end colormixin end frame ARTICLE This command is ignored in article mode If your animation graphics reside in individual external graphic files you might also consider using the multiinclude command which is explained in Section 13 1 3 together with animate For example you 115 might create an animation like this assuming you have created graphic files named animation 1 through to animation 10 begin frame animate lt 2 9 gt multiinclude start 1 animation end frame 13 1 3 Including External Animations Residing in Multiple Image Files Some animations reside in external files in the following way For each stage of the animation there is an image file co
271. om of the current frame they will never be moved to other frames As usual one can give a number as options which will cause the footnote to use that number The BEAMER class adds one additional option e frame causes the footnote to be shown at the bottom of the frame This is normally the default behavior anyway but in minipages and certain blocks it makes a difference In a minipage the footnote is usually shown as part of the minipage rather than as part of the frame If an overlay specification is given this causes the footnote text to be shown only on the specified slides The footnote symbol in the text is shown on all slides Example footnote On a fast machine Example footnote frame 2 Not proved Example footnote lt gt Der Spiegel 4 04 S X 90 Beamer Template Color Font footnote This template will be used to render the footnote Inside this template the following two inserts can be used e insertfootnotetext Inserts the current footnote text e insertfootnotemark Inserts the current footnote mark like a raised number This mark is computed automatically Beamer Color Font footnote mark This BEAMER color font is used when rendering the footnote mark both in the text and at the beginning of the footnote itself 109 LYX 12 Graphics In the following the advantages and disadvantages of different possible ways of creating graphics for BEAMER presentations are discussed Much of the
272. omes right below it should be dark blue and at the bottom of the headline things should just be blue 167 Unfortunately different outer themes will put different things at the top One theme might put the author at the top another theme might put the document title there This makes it impossible to directly assign one of the three colors black dark blue and blue to the different elements that are typically rendered in the headline No matter how we assign them things will look wrong for certain outer themes To circumvent this problem BEAMER uses a layer of palette colors Color themes typically only change these palette colors For example a color theme might make the BEAMER color palette primary blue make palette secondary a dark blue and make palette tertiary black Outer themes can now setup things such that whatever they show at the top of the headline inherits from palette tertiary what comes below inherits from palette secondary and whatever is at the bottom inherits from palette tertiary This way color themes can change the way even complicated outer themes look and they can do so consistently Note that the user can still change the color of every element individually simply by overriding the color s of the elements in the headline In a sense the palette colors are just a suggestion how things should be colored by an outer theme In detail the following palette colors are used by outer themes Beame
273. ommand hypertarget or easier the command Mabel In some cases see below this step may be skipped 2 You render the button using beamerbutton or a similar command This will render the button but clicking it will not yet have any effect 3 You put the button inside a Nhyperlink command Now clicking it will jump to the target of the link hypertarget lt overlay specification gt t target name H text If the overlay specification is present the text is the target for hyper jumps to target name only on the specified slide On all other slides the text is shown normally Note that you must add an overlay specification to the hypertarget command whenever you use it on frames that have multiple slides otherwise pdflatex rightfully complains that you have defined the same target on different slides Example begin frame begin itemize item lt 1 gt First item item lt 2 gt Second item item lt 3 gt Third item end itemize hyperlink jumptosecond beamergotobutton Jump to second slide hypertarget lt 2 gt jumptosecond end frame ARTICLE You must say usepackage hyperref in your preamble to use this command in article mode The label command creates a hypertarget as a side effect and the label name option of the frame command creates a label named name lt slide number gt for each slide of the frame as a side effect Thus the above example could be written more easily as begin frame l
274. on and 5 means the same as 1 5 A complicated example is 3 6 8 10 12 15 which selects the slides 1 2 3 6 7 8 10 12 13 14 and 15 Overlay specifications can also be given in LyX You must give them in T amp X mode otherwise the pointed brackets may be escaped by LyX though this will not happen in all versions For example to add an overlay specification to an item simply insert a TRX mode text like lt 3 gt as the first thing in that item Likewise you can add an overlay specification to environments like theorem by giving them in TRX mode right at the start of the environment 62 8 3 Commands with Overlay Specifications For the following commands adding an overlay specification causes the command to be simply ignored on slides that are not included in the specification textbf textit Wtextsl textrm textsf color alert structure If a command takes several arguments like color the specification should directly follow the command as in the following example but there are exceptions to this rule begin frame color lt 2 3 gt rgb 1 0 0 This text is red on slides 2 and 3 otherwise black end frame For the following commands the effect of an overlay specification is special onslide modifier lt overlay specification gt text The behaviour of this command depends on whether the optional argument text is given or not note that the optional argument is given in normal braces not in
275. on not only when writing papers 1 1 Main Features The list of features supported by BEAMER is quite long unfortunately so is presumably the list of bugs supported by BEAMER The most important features in my opinion are e You can use BEAMER both with pdflatex and latex dvips e The standard commands of ATEX still work A tableofcontents will still create a table of contents section is still used to create structure and itemize still creates a list e You can easily create overlays and dynamic effects e Themes allow you to change the appearance of your presentation to suit you purposes e The themes are designed to be usable in practice they are not just for show You will not find such nonsense as a green body text on a picture of a green meadow e The layout the colors and the fonts used in a presentation can easily be changed globally but you still also have control over the most minute detail e A special style file allows you to use the IXT EX source of a presentation directly in other TX classes like article or book This makes it easy to create presentations out of lecture notes or lecture notes out of presentations e The final output is typically a PDF file Viewer applications for this format exist for virtually every platform When bringing your presentation to a conference on a memory stick you do not have to worry about which version of the presentation program might be installed there Also your presentat
276. on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow 2 7 2 Terms and Conditions For Copying Distribution and Modification 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted
277. on 1 2 4 Shown on 3 5 Shown 6 7 8 As a possible application of the temporal command consider the following example Example def colorize lt 1 gt temporal lt 1 gt color red 50 color black color black 50 begin frame 64 begin itemize colorize lt i gt item First item colorize lt 2 gt item Second item colorize lt 3 gt item Third item colorize lt 4 gt item Fourth item end itemize end frame item lt alert specification gt item label 1 lt alert specification gt PRESEN Only one alert specification may be given The effect of alert specification is described in Section 8 6 3 TATION ARTICLE LYX Example begin frame begin itemize item lt 1 gt First point shown on all slides item lt 2 gt Second point shown on slide 2 and later item lt 2 gt Third point also shown on slide 2 and later item lt 3 gt Fourth point shown on slide 3 end itemize end frame begin frame begin enumerate item lt 3 alert 3 gt 0 A zeroth point shown at the very end item lt 1 alert 1 gt The first an main point item lt 2 alert 2 gt The second point end enumerate end frame The action specification is currently completely ignored The action specification must be given in TfX mode and it must be given at the very start of the item The related command bibitenm is also overlay specification aware in the same way as item
278. on 18 2 3 usepackage fourier The package switches to a T1 encoding but it does not redefine all fonts such that outline fonts non bitmapped fonts are used by default For example the sans serif text and the typewriter text are not replaced To use outline fonts for these write usepackage lmodern before including the fourier package 12 usepackage HA prosper You cannot use this package with BEAMER However you might try to use the package beamerprosper instead see Section 20 1 usepackage hyperref PRESEN The hyperref package is automatically loaded by beamer cls and certain options are setup In order TATION pass additional options to hyperref or to override options you can use the following class option documentclass hyperref list of options beamer Causes the list of options to be passed on to the hyperref package Example documentclass hyperref bookmarks false beamer Alternatively you can also use the hypersetup command ARTICLE In the article version you must include hyperref manually if you want to use it It is not included automatically usepackage utf8 inputenc PRESEN When using Unicode you may wish to use one of the following class options TATION documentclass ucs beamer Loads the package ucs and passes the correct Unicode options to hyperref Also it preloads the Unicode code pages zero and one documentclass utf8 beamer Same as the option ucs but al
279. on are typeset This includes all elements that are at the inside the frame that is that are not part of the headline footline or sidebars This includes all enumerations itemize environments block environments theorem environ ments or the table of contents For example an inner theme might specify that in an enumeration the number should be typeset without a dot and that a small circle should be shown behind it The inner theme would not specify what color should be used for the number or the circle this is the job of the color theme nor which font should be used this is the job of the font theme Outer Themes An outer theme specifies what the outside or border of the presentation slides should look like It specifies whether there are head and footlines what is shown in them whether there is a sidebar where the logo goes where the navigation symbols and bars go and so on It also specifies where the frametitle is put and how it is typeset The different themes reside in the four subdirectories theme color font inner and outer of the directory beamer themes Internally a theme is stored as a normal style file However to use a theme the following special commands should be used usetheme options name list Installs the presentation theme named name Currently the effect of this command is the same as saying usepackage for the style file named beamertheme name sty for each name in the name
280. on name we ll come to that If setbeamertemplate is called with some predefined option name the children are called with the arguments for children instead Let s look at two examples Example The following is the typical simple usage defbeamertemplateparent itemize items itemize item itemize subitem itemize subsubitem The following command has the same effect as the three commands below setbeamertemplate itemize items circle setbeamertemplate itemite item circle actually the setbeamertemplate itemize subitem circle setbeamertemplate itemize subsubitem circle empty argument is added Example In the following case an argument is passed to the children defbeamertemplateparent sections subsections in toc shaded section in toc shaded subsection in toc shaded 1 20 1 The following command has the same effect as the two commands below setbeamertemplate sections subsection in toc shaded default 35 setbeamertemplate section in toc shaded default 35 setbeamertemplate subsection in toc shaded default 35 Again setbeamertemplate sections subsection in toc shaded default setbeamertemplate section in toc shaded default 20 setbeamertemplate subsection in toc shaded default 20 In detail the following happens When setbeamertemplate is encountered for a parent template BEAMER first checks whether a predefined option follows If not a single
281. on number is shown The BEAMER font and color section number projected is used for typesetting the circles that is the circle gets the background color and the text inside the circle the foreground color e square Similar to the circle option except that small squares are used instead of circles Small unnumbered squares are shown in front of the subsections e ball Like square the only difference being the balls are used instead of squares e ball unnumbered Similar to ball except that no numbering is used This option makes the table of contents look more like an itemize If none of the above options suits you you have to change the templates section in toc and subsection in toc directly Parent Beamer Template sections subsections in toc shaded A parent template with children section in toc shaded and subsection in toc shaded They are used to render section and subsection entries when they are currently shaded like all non current subsections in tableofcontents currentsubsection The following template options are predefined 81 e default opaquness In the default setting the templates section in toc shaded and subsection in toc shaded just show whatever the nonshaded versions of these templates show but only opaquness opaque The default is 20 Example setbeamertemplate table of contents shaded default 50 makes dimmed entries 50 transparent 9 6 Adding a Bibliography You can use the bibliography
282. onditions like a large room and a small only a small projection area However you may wish to enlarge or shrink the fonts a bit if you know this to be more appropriate in your presentation environment Once the size of the normal text is settled all other sizes are usually defined relative to that size For this reason ATX has commands like large or small The actual size these commands select depends on the size of normal text In a presentation you will want to use a very small font for text in headlines footlines or sidebars since the text shown there is not vital and is read at the audience pleasure Naturally the text should still be large enough that it actually can be read without binoculars However in a normal presentation environment the audience will still be able to even tiny text from time to time However using small fonts can be tricky Many PostScript fonts are just scaled down when used at small sizes When a font is used at less than its normal size the characters should actually be stroked using a slightly thicker pen than the one would expect when just scaling down characters For this reason high quality multiple master fonts or the Computer Modern fonts use a differents fonts for small characters and for normal characters However when you use a normal Helvetica or Times font the characters are just scaled down A similar problem arises when you use a light font on a dark background Even when printed on paper in
283. ons is given see also Section 7 5 The normal ATEX command frame is available inside frames with its usual meaning Both outside and inside frames it is always available as framelatex Example begin frame frametitle A title Some content end frame Example begin frame lt beamer gt frame is only shown in beamer mode frametitle Outline tabelofcontent current end frame Normally the complete environment contents is put on a slide If the text does not fit on a slide being too high it will be squeezed as much as possible a warning will be issued and the text just extends unpleasantly over the bottom You can use the option allowframebreaks to cause the frame text to be split among several slides though you cannot use overlays then See the explanation of the allowframebreaks option for details The default overlay specification is an optional argument that is detected according to the following rule If the first optional argument in square brackets starts with a lt then this argument is a default overlay specification otherwise it is a normal options argument Thus begin frame lt gt plain would be legal but also begin frame plain The effect of the default overlay specification is the following Every command or environment inside the frame that accepts an action specification see Section 8 6 3 this includes the item command the actionenv environment action and all b
284. ont theme 171 proof environment 101 200 section in sidebar shaded template color 53 toc template color font 76 toc shaded template color font 76 sections subsections in toc parent template 81 sections subsections in toc shaded parent template 81 seminar class 14 separation line color 169 serif font theme 172 setbeamercolor 166 setbeamercovered 170 setbeamerfont 176 setbeamersize 58 setbeamertemplate 153 set jobnamebeamerversion 126 shadow outer theme 150 short talks speaker_introduction ornate 2min solution 40 sidebar outer theme 148 sidebar canvas left template 50 canvas right template 51 left template color font 49 sidebar right template color font 50 sidebartab color theme 158 Singapore presentation theme 141 slide environment 189 slideCaption 185 slides environment 184 section in section in sidebar sidebar smaller class option 174 smoothbars outer theme 148 smoothtree outer theme 151 Solutions conference talks conference ornate 20min 40 generic talks generic ornate 15min 45min 40 short talks speaker_introduct ion ornate 2min 40 sound 118 split outer theme 149 step 192 steponce 192 stepwise 192 structure 96 structure color theme 157 structure color font 96 structure begin template 96 structure end template 96 structurebold font theme 172 structureenv environment 96 structureitalicserif font theme 173 structuresmallcapsser
285. ontents The left and right margin are setup such that they are the same as the margins of normal text The text is typeset inside an hbox while the headline is normally typeset in vertical mode Inside the template numerous inserts can be used e insertnavigation width Inserts a horizontal navigation bar of the given width into a tem plate The bar lists the sections and below them mini frames for each frame in that section insertpagenumber Inserts the current page number into a template e insertsection Inserts the current section into a template insertsectionnavigation width Inserts a vertical navigation bar containing all sections with the current section hilighted insertsectionnavigationhorizontal width left insert right insert Inserts a horizon tal navigation bar containing all sections with the current section hilighted The left insert will be inserted to the left of the sections the right insert to the right By inserting a triple fill a fi111 you can flush the bar to the left or right Example insertsectionnavigationhorizontal 5 textwidth hskipOpt plusifilll 47 Vinsertshortauthor options Inserts the short version of the author into a template The text will be printed in one long line line breaks introduced using the command are suppressed The following options may be given width width causes the text to be put into a multi line minipage of the given size
286. oof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 1 2 Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number ISPN 80 2 2 This theme installs a headline showing the current section and the current subsection It installs a footline showing the author s name the institution the presentation s title the current date and a frame count This theme uses only little space The colors used in the headline and footline are drawn from palette primary palette secondary and primary tertiary see Section 17 for details on how to change these useoutertheme options miniframes Example ets Results j Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theo
287. oot 53 subsection in sidebar 53 subsection in toc 76 subsection in toc shaded 76 subsubitem 95 subsubitem projected 95 tiny structure 96 title page 74 titlelike 169 verse 108 Beamer templates abstract begin 108 abstract end 108 abstract title 107 alerted text begin 97 alerted text end 97 background 58 background canvas 57 bibliography entry author 82 bibliography entry journal 83 section in section in sidebar sidebar bibliography entry note 83 bibliography entry title 83 bibliography item 83 block alerted begin 98 block alerted end 98 block begin 98 block end 98 block example begin 99 block example end 99 button 85 caption 105 description item 95 item 93 mini template 94 subitem 93 enumerate subsubitem 94 footline 49 footnote 109 frame begin 46 frame end 46 frametitle 56 frametitle continuation 43 headline 47 itemize item 92 itemize subitem 92 itemize subsubitem 92 itemize enumerate body begin 94 enumerate enumerate enumerate itemize enumerate body end 94 logo 55 mini frame 52 mini frame in current subsection 52 mini frame in other subsection 52 navigation symbols 54 note page 123 part page 78 qed symbol 101 quotation begin 108 quotation end 108 quote begin 108 quote end 108 in head foot 52 in head foot shaded 52 in sidebar 53 section in sidebar shaded 53 in toc 76 section in toc shaded 76 section
288. ords For example the word shape is mainly recognized by seing one normal letter one ascending letter a normal letter one descending letter and a normal letter One has much more trouble spotting a misspelling like shepe than spape Small caps destroy the shape of words since SHAPE SHEPE and SPAPE all have the same shape thus making it much harder to tell them apart You audience will read small caps more slowly than normal text This is by the way why legal disclaimers are often written in uppercase letters not to make them appear more important to you but to make them much harder to actually read 38 5 6 4 Font Weight The weight of a font refers to the thickness of the letters Usually font come as regular or as bold fonts There often also exist semibold ultrabold or black thin or ultrathin versions In typography using a bold font to create emphasis especially within normal text is frowned upon bold words in the middle of a normal text are referred to as dirt For presentations this rule of not using bold text does not really apply On a presentation slide there is usually very little text and there are numerous elements that try to attract the viewer s attention Using the traditional italics to create emphasis will often be overlooked So using bold text seems a good alternative in a presentation However an even better alternative is using a bright color like red to attract attention As
289. ore than one they are called overlays Normally everything between begin frame and end frame is put on a single slide No page breaking is performed So Euclid infers that the first frame is filled by the title page which seems quite logical The title page frame is created automatically by LyX All other frames start with the style BeginFrame and end either with the style EndFrame or automatically with the start of the next frame subsection or section 3 5 Creating the Presentation PDF File Eager to find out how the first page will look he invokes pdflatex on his file main tex twice He could also use latex twice followed by dvips and then possibly ps2pdf Then he uses the Acrobat Reader or xpdf to view the resulting main pdf Indeed the first page contains all the information Euclid has provided until now It even looks quite impressive with the colorful title and the rounded corners and the shadows but he is doubtful whether he should leave it like that He decides to address this problem later Euclid is delighted to find out that clicking on a section or subsection in the navigation bar at the tops hyperjumps there Also the small symbols at the bottom seem to be clickable Toying around with them for a while he finds that clicking on the arrows left or right of a symbols hyperjumps him backward or forward one slide frame subsection section Clicking on the left or right side of the symbol hyperjumps to the begin
290. ors and fonts are used instead e rounded shadow true Makes the blocks rounded This means that the corners of the backgrounds of the blocks are rounded off If the shadow true option is given a shadow is drawn behind the block begin block lt action specification gt block title lt action specification gt environment contents 97 end block ARTICLE LYX Only one action specification may be given Inserts a block like a definition or a theorem with the title block title If the action specification is present the given actions are taken on the specified slides see Section 8 6 3 In the example the definition is shown only from slide 3 onward Example begin block lt 3 gt Definition A alert set consists of elements end block The block name is typeset in bold The argument of the block must currently be given in TgX mode More precisely there must be an opening brace in TRX mode and a closing brace in TRX mode around it The text in between can also be typeset using LyX I hope to get rid of this some day Beamer Template block begin This template is inserted at the beginning of a block before the environment contents Inside this template the block title can be accessed via the following insert e insertblocktitle Inserts the block title into the template When the template starts no special color or font is installed for somewhat complicated reasons
291. osium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results m Proof of the Main Theorem In this theme itemize and enumerate items and table of contents entries start with small rectangles useinnertheme options rounded Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria e Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p 0 Results e Proof of the Main Theorem 145 In this theme itemize and enumerate items and table of contents entries start with small balls If a background is specified for blocks then the corners of the background rectangles will be rounded off The following options may be given e shadow adds a shadow to all blocks useinnertheme inmargin Example There Is No Largest Prime Number a The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique 2 a 3 DO Euicia of Alexandria Theorem There is no largest prime number From Department of Mathematios University of Alexandria Proof When 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers Ea ponse pwere thelagast
292. ot prime alert three divisors 1 2 and 4 end itemize end example end frame 3 9 Creating Simple Overlays The frame already looks quite nice though perhaps a bit colorful However Euclid would now like to show the three items one after another not all three right away To achieve this he adds pause commands after the first and second items 21 LYX LYX begin itemize item 2 is prime two divisors 1 and 2 pause item 3 is prime two divisors 1 and 3 pause item 4 is not prime alert three divisors 1 2 and 4 end itemize By showing them incrementally he hopes to focus the audience s attention on the item he is currently talking about You add a pause using the Pause style Euclid finds that he can also add a pause between the definition and the example So pauses seem to transcede environments which Euclid finds quite useful After some experimentation he finds that pause only does not work in align environments He immediately writes an email about this to BEAMER s author but receives a polite answer stating that the implementation of align does wicked things and there is no fix for this Also Euclid is pointed to the last part of the user s guide where a workaround is described 3 10 Using Overlay Specifications The next frame is to show his main argument and is put in a Results section Euclid desires a more complicated overlay behavior for this frame In an enumeration
293. ot worry about this when creating a presentation using BEAMER For including an animation in a PDF file you can use the command movie which is explained below Depending on the used options this command will either setup the PDF file such that the viewer application like the Acrobat Reader itself will try to play the movie or that an external program will be called The latter approach though much less flexible must be taken if the viewer application is unable to display the movie itself movie options poster text movie filename This command will insert the movie with the filename movie filename into the PDF file The movie file must reside at some place where the viewer application will be able to find it which is typically only the directory in which the final PDF file resides The movie file will not be embedded into the PDF file in the sense that the actual movie data is part of the main pdf file The movie file must hence be copied and passed along with the PDF file Nevertheless one often says that the movie is embedded in the document but that just means that one can click on the movie when viewing the document and the movie will start to play The movie will use a rectangular area whose size is determined either by the width and height options or by the size of the poster text The poster text can be any T X text for example it might be a pgfuseimage command or an includegraphics command or a pgfpict
294. otline e The sidebars e The logo e The frame title An outer theme will not specify how things like itemize environments should be rendered that is the job an inner theme In the following examples the color theme seahorse is used Since the default color theme leaves most backgrounds empty most of the outer themes look too unstructured with the default color theme useoutertheme default Example 146 There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique 5 g Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Department of Mathematics 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p The default layout theme is the most sober and minimalistic theme around It will flush left the frame title and it will not install any head or footlines However even this theme honours the background color specified for the frame title If a color is specified a bar occupying the whole page width is put behind the frame title A background color the frame subtitle is ignored Nuseouterthemetfinfolines Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new pr
295. page of the frame as an upper case Roman number insertcontinuationtext just inserts the text cont or possibly a translation thereof like Forts in German If a frame needs to be broken into several pages the material on all but the last page fills only 95 of each page by default Thus there will be some space left at the top and or bottom depending on the vertical placement option for the frame This yields a better visual result than a 100 filling which typically looks crowded However you can change this percentage using the optional argument fraction where 1 means 100 and 0 5 means 50 This percentage includes the frame title Thus in order to split a frame roughly in half you should give 0 6 as fraction Most of the fine details of normal TEX page breaking also apply to this option For example when you wish equations to be broken automatically be sure to use the allowdisplaybreaks command You can insert break nobreak and penalty commands to control where breaks should occur The commands pagebreak and nopagebreak also work including their options Since you typically do not want page breaks for the frame to apply also to the article mode you can add a mode specification like lt presentation gt to make these commands apply only to the presentation modes The command framebreak is a shorthand for pagebreak lt presentation gt and noframebreak is a shorthand for nopagebreak lt presentation gt
296. parentheses loop Causes the movie to start again when the end has been reached Normally the movie just stops at the end once Causes the movie to just stop at the end This is the default palindrome Causes the movie to start playing backwards when the end has been reached and to start playing forward once more when the beginning is reached and so on poster Asks the viewer application to show the first image of the movie when the movie is not playing Normally nothing is shown when the movie is not playing and thus the box containing the poster tert is shown For a movie that does not have any images but sound or for movies with an uninformative first image this option is not so useful repeat is the same as loop showcontrols true or false Causes a control bar to be displayed below the movie while it is playing Instead of showcontrols true you can also just say showcontrols By default no control bar is shown start time s Causes the first time seconds of the movie to be skipped For example start 10s duration 5s will show seconds 10 to 15 of the movie when you play the movie width TpXdimension works like the height option only for the width of the poster box Example The following example creates a background sound for the slide movie autostart test wav 113 Example A movie with two extra buttons for showing different parts of the movie movie label cells width 4cm height 3cm poster
297. piimenumbar 280 Results 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p E Proof of the Main Theorem The idea behind this theme is to have structuring information on the left and normal information on the right To this end blocks are redefined such that the block title is shown on the left and the block body is shown on the right The code used to place text in the margin is a bit fragile You may often need to adjust the spacing by hand so use at your own risk Itemize items are redefined such that they appear on the left However only the position is changed by changing some spacing parameters the code used to draw the items is not changed otherwise Because of this you can load another inner theme first and then load this theme afterwards This theme is a dirty an inner theme since it messes with things that an inner theme should not mess with In particular it changes the width of the left sidebar to a large value However you can still use it together with most outer themes Using columns inside this theme is problematic Most of the time the result will not be what you expect 16 2 Outer Themes An outer theme dictates roughly the overall layout of frames It specifies where any navigational elements should go like a mini table of contents or navigational mini frames and what they should look like Typically an outer theme specifies how the following elements are rendered e The head and fo
298. plate is called the BEAMER font and color description item are installed The following template options are predefined e default By default the description item text is just inserted without any modification The main insert that is useful inside this template is e insertdescriptionitem inserts the text of the current description item In order to simplify changing the color or font of items the different kinds of items inherit form or just use the following general BEAMER color and fonts Beamer Color Font item Color parents local structure Font parents structure This color font serves as a parent for the individual items of itemize and enumerate environments but also for items in the table of contents Since its color parent is the local structure a change of that color causes the color of items to change accordingly Beamer Color Font item projected Color font parents item This is a special version of the item color and font that should be used by templates that render items with text as in an enumeration and which to project this text onto something like a ball or a square or whatever While the normal item color typically has a transparent background the item projected typically has a colored background and say a white foreground Beamer Color Font subitem Color font parents item Same as item for subitems that is for items on the second level of indentation Beamer Color Font subitem projected Co
299. plate will persist until the end of the bibliography item or until one of the following templates undo the effect By default this template does nothing The default color is the structure color 82 Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry title This template is inserted before the title of a bibliography entry more precisely it is inserted after the first occurrence of the newblock command By default this template starts a new paragraph causing a line break The default color is the normal text color Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry journal This template is inserted before the journal of a bibliography entry the second newblock By default this template starts a new paragraph The default color is a slightly transparent version of the structure color Beamer Template Color Font bibliography entry note This template is inserted before any note text at the end of a bibliography entry it is inserted before the third newblock By default this template starts a new paragraph The default color is the same as for the journal WVbibitem lt overlay specification gt citation text 14 label name The citation text is inserted into the text when the item is cited using Acitet label name in the main presentation text For a BEAMER presentation this should usually be as long as possible Use newblock commands to separate the authors s names the title the book journal reference and any notes If th
300. pointed out earlier you should use bold text for small text unless you use an especially robust font like Futura 39 6 Solution Templates In the subdirectories of the directory beamer solutions you will find solution templates in different lan guages A solution template is a T X text that solves a specific problem Such a problem might be I need to create a 20 minute talk for a conference or I want to create a slide that introduces the next speaker or I want to create a table that is uncovered piecewise For such a problem a solution template consists of a mixture of a template and an example that can be used to solve this particular problem Just copy the solution template file or parts of it and freely adjust them to your needs The collecting of BEAMER solution templates has only begun and currently there are only very few of them I hope that in the future more solutions will become available and I would like to encourage users of the BEAMER class to send me solutions they develop I would also like to encourage users to help in translating solutions to languages other than English and German If you have written a solution or a translation please feel free to send it to me make sure however that it contains about the same amount of explanations and justifications as do the existing solutions The following list of solution templates is sorted by the length of the talks for which they provide a template As alwa
301. predefined option name existing predefined option name Causes the two predefined options to have the same effect There is no inheritance relation among templates as there is for colors and fonts This is due to the fact the templates for one element seldom make sense for another However sometimes certain elements behave similarly and one would like a setbeamertemplate to apply to a whole set of templates via inheritance For example one might want that setbeamertemplate items circle causes all items to use the circle option though the effects for the itemize item as opposed to the itemize subsubitem as opposed to enumerate item must be slightly different The BEAMER template mechanism implements a simple form of inheritance via parent templates In element descriptions parent templates are indicated via a check mark in parentheses 155 defbeamertemplateparent parent template name predefined option name 14 child template list argument number default optional argument 14 arguments for children The effect of this command is that whenever someone calls Asetbeamertemplatet parent template name args the command Msetbeamertemplatet child template name H args is called for each child template name in the child template list The arguments for children come into play if the setbeamertemplate command is called with a predefined option name not necessarily the same as the predefined opti
302. predefined option name means this argument for children applies to all predefined option names that have not been specially defined differently 156 17 Colors BEAMER s color management allows you to specify the color of every element like say the color of the section entries in a table of contents or say the color of the subsection entries in a mini table of contents in a sidebar While the system is quite powerful it is not trivial to use To simplify the usage of the color system you should consider using a predefined color theme which takes care of everything for you In the following color themes are explained first The rest of the section consists of explanations of how the color management works internally You will need to read these sections only if you wish to write your own color themes or if you are quite happy with the predefined themes but you absolutely insist that displayed mathematical text simply has to be typeset in a lovely pink 17 1 Color Themes In order to also show the effect of the different color themes on the sidebar in the following examples the color themes are used together with the outer theme sidebar 17 1 1 Default and Special Purpose Color Themes usecolortheme default Example There Is No There Is No Largest Prime gedim There Is No Largest Prime Number mos pub The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new
303. proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem The default color theme is very sober It installs little special colors and even less backgrounds The default color theme sets up the default parent relations between the different BEAMER colors The main colors set in the default color theme are the following e normal text is black on white e alerted text is red e example text is a dark green green with 50 black e structure is set to a light version of MidnightBlue more precisely 20 red 20 green and 70 blue Use this theme for a no nonsense presentation Since this theme is loaded by default you cannot reload it after having loaded another color theme usecolortheme options structure Example 157 There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria There Is No ureseimo There Is No Largest Prime Number peones The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th Internatio
304. proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Proof ofthe Main Theorem Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof A of Nexans 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Installs a near transparent backgrounds for the headline footline and sidebar Using this theme will cause navigational elements to be much less dominant than when using the whale theme see the discussion on contrast there though It goes well with the rose or the lily color theme Pairing it with the orchid overemphasizes blocks in my opinion 17 2 Changing the Colors Used for Different Elements of a Presentation This section explains how BEAMER s color management works 17 2 1 Overview of Beamer s Color Management In BEAMER s philosophy every element of a presentation can have a different color Unfortunately it turned out that simply assigning a single color to every element of a presentation is not such a good idea First of all we sometimes want colors of elements to change during a presentation like the color of the item indicators when they become alerted or inside an example block Second some elements naturally have two colors namely a foreground and
305. r Color palette primary Outer themes should base the color of navigational elements and possibly also of other elements on the four palette colors The primary palette should be used for the most important navigational elements which are usually the ones that change most often and hence require the most attention by the audience The secondary and tertiary are less important the quaternary one is least important By default the palette colors do not have a background and the foreground ranges from structure fg to black For the sidebar there is an extra set of palette colors see palette sidebar primary Beamer Color palette secondary See palette primary Beamer Color palette tertiary See palette primary Beamer Color palette quaternary See palette primary Beamer Color palette sidebar primary Similar to palette primary only outer themes should base the colors of elements in the sidebar of the four sidebar palette colors Beamer Color palette sidebar secondary See palette sidebar primary Beamer Color palette sidebar tertiary See palette sidebar primary Beamer Color palette sidebar quaternary See palette sidebar primary 17 5 Miscellaneous Colors In this section some basic colors are listed that do not belong to any special commands Beamer Color Font normal text The color is used for normal text At the beginning of the document the foreground color is installed
306. r names The names should be separated using the command and In case authors have different affiliations they should be suffixed by the command inst with different parameters Example author Hemaspaandra et al L Hemaspaandra inst 1 and T Tantau inst 2 ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode institute short institute institute If more than one institute is given they should be separated using the command and and they should be prefixed by the command inst with different parameters Example institute Universities of Rochester and Berlin inst 1 Department of Computer Science University of Rochester and inst 2 Fakult at f ur Elektrotechnik und Informatik Technical University of Berlin ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode The long form is also ignored except if the document class like 11ncs defines it date short date date Example date today or date STACS 2003 STACS Conference 2003 ARTICLE The short form is ignored in article mode titlegraphic tezt The text is shown as title graphic Typically a picture environment is used as tezt Example titlegraphic pgfuseimage titlegraphic ARTICLE The command is ignored in article mode subject tezt Enters the tezt as the subject text in the PDF document info It currently has no other effect keywords tezt Enters the text as keywords in the PDF document info It currently has no oth
307. r or different parts of it a colored differently the 1stlisting environment does this then you do not want the verbatim text to inherit its color from the outside In this case you should give the colored option e width dimension sets the width of the verbatim box The default is the text width at the moment when the defverbatim command is used but this will be too large if the box is used inside a columns environment later on In such a case you can use this option to specify the width the box will later need to have Example defverbatim algorithma begin verbatim int main void cout lt lt Hello world lt lt endl return 0 end verbatim defverbatim colored algorithmB begin 1stlisting language C backgroundcolor color yellow int main void cout lt lt Hello world lt lt endl return 0 end 1stlisting begin frame Our algorithm alert lt 1 gt algorithmA uncover lt 2 gt Note the return value end frame begin frame Same algorithm typeset using the lstlisting environment algorithmB end frame 60 8 Creating Overlays 8 1 The Pause Commands The pause command offers an easy but not very flexible way of creating frames that are uncovered piecewise If you say pause somewhere in a frame only the text on the frame up to the pause command is shown on the first slide On the second slide everything is shown up to the second pause and so
308. r to it again In my opinion the only situation in which numbered theorems make sense in a presentation is in a lecture in which the students can read lecture notes in parallel to the lecture where the theorems are numbered in exactly the same way If you do number theorems and definition number everything consecutively Thus if there are one theorem one lemma and one definition you would have Theorem 1 Lemma 2 and Definition 3 Some people prefer all three to be numbered 1 I would strongly like to discourage this The problem is that this makes it virtually impossible to find anything since Theorem 2 might come after Definition 10 or the other way round Papers and worse books that have a Theorem 1 and a Definition 1 are a pain e Do not inflict pain on other people Bibliographies You may also wish to present a bibliography at the end of your talk so that people can see what kind of further reading is possible When adding a bibliography to a presentation keep the following in mind e It is a bad idea to present a long bibliography in a presentation Present only very few references Naturally this applies only to the talk itself not to a possible handout e If you present more references than fit on a single slide you can be almost sure that none of them will not be remembered e Present references only if they are intended as further reading Do not present a list of all things you used like in a paper e You
309. rame of the presentation as follows begin frame frametitle What Are Prime Numbers A prime number is a number that has exactly two divisors end frame This yields the desired result It might be a good idea to put some emphasis on the object being defined prime numbers Euclid tries emph but finds that too mild an emphasis BEAMER offers the command alert which is used like emph and by default typesets its argument in bright red The alert command needs to be entered in TEX mode which is awkward It s easier to just paint the text in red Next Euclid decides to make it even clearer that he is giving a definition by putting a definition environment around the definition begin frame frametitle What Are Prime Numbers begin definition A alert prime number is a number that has exactly two divisors end definition end frame Other useful environments like theorem lemma proof corollary or example are also predefined by BEAMER As in amsmath they take optional arguments that they show in brackets Indeed amsmath is automatically loaded by BEAMER Since it is always a good idea to add examples Euclid decides to add one begin frame frametitle What Are Prime Numbers begin definition A alert prime number is a number that has exactly two divisors end def inition beginfexample begin itemize item 2 is prime two divisors 1 and 2 item 3 is prime two divisors 1 and 3 item 4 is n
310. re font often are not suitable For example it is often necessary to use a boldface version for them Also one might wish to have serif smallcaps structural text but still retain normal sans serif tiny structural text begin structureenv lt overlay specification gt environment contents end structureenv Environment version of the structure command Beamer Template structure begin This text is inserted at the beginning of a structureenv environment The following template options are predefined e default ARTICLE The text is typeset in boldface Beamer Template structure end This text is inserted at the end of a structureenv environment 96 alert lt overlay specification gt 1 hilighted text The given text is hilighted typically by coloring the text red If the overlay specification is present the command only has an effect on the specified slides Example This is alert important Internally this command just puts the hilighted text inside an alertenv ARTICLE Alerted text is typeset as emphasized text This can be changed by modifying the templates see below LYX You need to use TEX mode to insert this command which is not very convenient Beamer Color Font alerted text This color font is used when alerted text is typeset The background is currently ignored There is no template alerted text rather there are templates alerted text begin and alerted text end that are inserted before and after
311. rem 147 This theme installs a headline in which a horizontal navigational bar is shown This bar contains one entry for each section of the presentation Below each section entry small circles are shown that represent the different frames in the section The frames are arranged subsection wise that is there is a line of frames for each subsection If the class option compress is given the frames will instead be arranged in a single row for each section The navigation bars draws its color from section in head foot Below the navigation bar a line is put showing the title of the current subsection The color is drawn from subsection in head foot At the bottom two lines are put that contain information such as the author s name the institution or the paper s title What is shown exactly is influenced by the options given The colors are drawn from the appropriate BEAMER colors like author in head foot At the top and bottom of both the head and footline and between the navigation bar and the subsection name separation lines are drawn if the background color of separation line is set This separation line will have a height of 3pt You can get even more fine grained control over the colors of the separation lines by setting appropriate colors like lower separation line head The following options can be given e footline empty suppressed the footline default e footline authorinstitute shows the author s name and the institute in
312. rent way but rather it is not shown at all Thus for this command the transparency settings have no effect Example visible lt 2 gt Text shown from slide 2 on ARTICLE This command has the same effect as only invisible lt overlay specification gt text This command is the opposite of visible Example invisible lt 2 gt Text shown from slide 3 on alt lt overlay specification gt default text alternative text lt overlay specification gt Only one overlay specification may be given The default text is shown on the specified slides otherwise the alternative text The specification must always be present Example alt lt 2 gt On Slide 2 Not on slide 2 Once more giving the overlay specification at the end is useful when the command is used inside other commands Example Here is the definition of uncover newcommand uncover alt firstofone makeinvisible temporal lt overlay specification gt before slide text H default text H after slide text This command alternates between three different texts depending on whether the current slide is temporally before the specified slides is one of the specified slides or comes after them If the overlay specification is not an interval that is if it has a hole the hole is considered to be part of the before slides Example temporal lt 3 4 gt Shown on 1 2 Shown on 3 4 Shown 5 6 7 temporal lt 3 5 gt Shown
313. renumbering if you add a new item at the beginning A better approach is to temporarily use a different overlay specification and the dot notation begin itemize lt gt item First point item lt gt Second point item Third point end itemize You might wish to build your own macros based on these ideas like an itemstep environment or a itemlikeprevious command 19 2 Hilighting the Current Point in an Enumeration If you uncover an enumeration piecewise it is sometimes a good idea to hilight the last uncovered point to draw the audience s attention to it This is best achieved as follows begin itemize item lt 1 alert 1 gt First point item lt 2 alert 2 gt Second point item lt 3 alert 3 gt Third point end itemize or begin itemize lt alert gt item First point item Second point item Third point end itemize Note that this will draw the little item symbol also in red 179 19 3 Changing Symbol Before an Enumeration When uncovering a list of tasks or problems you may desire that the symbol in front of the last uncovered symbol is say a ballot X while for the previous items it is a check mark you ll find these characters in some Dingbats fonts The best way to achieve this is to implement a new action environment If this action is activated it temporarily changes the item symbol template to the other symbol newenvironment ballotenv only setbeamertempl
314. right bold face sans serif or serif text depending on whether mathsans or mathserif is used To produce an upright sans serif or serif text depending on whether mathsans or mathserif is used you can use for instance the command operatorname from the amsmath package Using this command instead of mathrm or mathsf directly will automatically adjust upright mathematical text if you switch from sans serif to serif or back usefonttheme professionalfonts This font theme does not really change any fonts Rather it suppresses certain internal replacements performed by BEAMER If you use professional fonts fonts that you buy and that come with a complete set of every symbol in all modes you do not want BEAMER to meddle with the fonts you use BEAMER normally replaces certain character glyphs in mathematical text by more appropriate versions For example BEAMER will normally replace glyphs such that the italic characters from the main font are used for variables in mathematical text If your professional font package takes care of this already BEAMER s meddling should be switched off Note that BEAMER s substitution is automatically turned off if one of the following packages is loaded mathtime mathpmnt lucidabr mtpro and hvmath If your favorite professional font package is not among these use the professionalfont option and write me an email so that the package can be added 171 usefonttheme options serif Example
315. rime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Proof Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem A not too sober theme with navigation that does not dominate usetheme Szeged Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Deparimnentot Malbentatcs 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number A sober theme with a strong dominance of horizontal lines 15 6 Presentation Themes with Section and Subsection Tables usetheme Copenhagen Example There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new
316. rity of the Acrobat Reader In particular one might expect other viewers like xpdf to support embedded movies in the future 112 Example movie pgfuseimage myposterimage mymovie avi Example Nmovie width 3cm height 2cm poster mymovie mpg If your viewer application is not able to render your movie but some external application is you must use the externalviewer option This will ask the viewer application to launch an application for showing the movie instead of displaying it itself Since this application is started in a new window this not nearly as nice as having the movie be displayed directly by the viewer unless you use evil trickery to suppress the frame of the viewer application Which application is chosen is left to the discreetion of the viewer application which tries to make its choice according to the extension of the movie filename and according to some mapping table for mapping extensions to viewer applications How this mapping table can be modified depends on the viewer application please see the release notes of your viewer The following options may be given autostart Causes the movie to start playing immediately when the page is shown At most one movie can be started in this way The viewer application will typically be able to show only at most one movie at the same time anyway When the page is no longer shown the movie immediately stops This can be a problem if you use the movie command to include
317. rmal text color font 168 normal text in math text color 167 note 123 note page template color font 123 notes environment 186 notes hide class option 124 notes only class option 124 notes onlyslideswithnotes class option 124 notes show class option 124 notheorems class option 101 only 63 onlyenv environment 66 onlyInPDF 186 onlyInPSs 186 OnlySlide 185 onlySlide 185 onslide 63 opaqueness 170 orchid color theme 162 Outer themes default 146 infolines 147 miniframes 147 shadow 150 sidebar 148 smoothbars 148 smoothtree 151 split 149 tree 150 overlay 188 overlayarea environment 67 overlays 184 overprint environment 67 Packages professional font package 14 AlDraTex 11 alltt 11 amsthm 12 babel 12 beamerarticle 124 beamerfoils 190 beamerprosper 183 beamerseminar 187 beamertexpower 192 CJK 12 color 12 deluxetable 12 DraTex 12 enumerate 12 fontenc 12 fourier 12 HA prosper 13 hyperref 13 inputenc 13 listings 13 msc 13 multimedia 112 musixtex 13 pdfpages 13 pstricks 14 texpower 14 textpos 14 ucs 14 xcolor 14 xmpmulti 116 page number in head foot color font 49 palette palette palette palette palette palette palette palette primary color 168 quaternary color 168 secondary color 168 sidebar primary color 168 quaternary color 168 secondary color 168 sidebar tertiary color 168 tertiary color 168 sidebar sidebar
318. romannumber 79 insertpartstartpage 48 insertpresentationendpage 48 insertpresentationstartpage 48 insertreturnsymbol 86 insertsection 47 insertsectionendpage 48 insertsectionhead 52 insertsectionheadnumber 52 insertsectionnavigation 47 insertsectionnavigationhorizontal 47 insertsectionnavigationsymbol 55 insertsectionstartpage 48 insertshortauthor 48 insertshortdate 48 insertshortinstitute 48 insertshortpart 48 insertshortsubtitle 48 insertshorttitle 48 insertskipsymbol 86 insertslideintonotes 123 insertslidenavigationsymbol 55 insertsubenumlabel 93 insertsubsection 48 insertsubsectionendpage 48 insertsubsectionhead 53 insertsubsectionheadnumber 53 insertsubsectionnavigation 48 insertsubsectionnavigationhorizontal 48 insertsubsectionnavigationsymbol 55 insertsubsectionstartpage 48 insertsubsubenumlabel 94 insertsubtitle 74 inserttheoremaddition 102 inserttheoremblockenv 102 inserttheoremheadfont 102 inserttheoremname 102 inserttheoremnumber 102 inserttheorempunctuation 102 inserttitle 74 inserttitlegraphic 74 inserttocsection 76 inserttocsectionnumber 76 inserttocsubsection 76 inserttocsubsectionnumber 76 inserttotalframenumber 48 insertverticalnavigation 48 institute 75 institution 184 invisible 64 item 65 item color font 95 item projected color font 95 Itemize environment 185 itemize environment 91 item te
319. round The following options can be given e lower beamer color sets the BEAMER color to be used for the lower main part of the box Its background is used for the background its foreground for the foreground of the main part of the box If either is empty the current background or foreground is used The box will never be transparent e upper beamer color sets the BEAMER color used for the upper head part of the box It is only used if the head is not empty e width dimension causes the width of the text inside the box to be the specified dimension By default the textwidth is used Note that the box will protrude 4pt to the left and right e shadow true or false If set to true a shadow will be drawn If no head is given the head part is completely suppressed Example begin beamerboxesrounded upper block head lower block body shadow true Theorem A Bf end beamerboxesrounded ARTICLE This environment is not available in article mode 11 6 Figures and Tables You can use the standard MIX environments figure and table much the same way you would normally use them However any placement specification will be ignored Figures and tables are immediately inserted where the environments start If there are too many of them to fit on the frame you must manually split them among additional frames or use the allowframebreaks option Example begin frame begin figure pgfuseimage myfigure caption
320. round will be setup The following template options are predefined default is empty grid grid options places a grid on the background The following grid options may be given step dimension specifies the distance between grid lines The default is 0 5cm color color specifies the color of the grid lines The default is 10 foreground 7 3 Margin Sizes The paper size of a BEAMER presentation is fixed to 128mm times 96mm The aspect ratio of this size is 4 3 which is exactly what most beamers offer these days It is the job of the presentation program like acroread or xpdf to display the slides at full screen size The main advantage of using a small paper size is that you can use all your normal fonts at their natural sizes In particular inserting a graphic with 11pt labels will result in reasonably sized labels during the presentation You should refrain from changing the paper size However you can change the size of the left and right margins which default to 1cm To change them you should use the following command setbeamersize options The following options can be given text margin left T X dimension sets a new left margin This excludes the left sidebar Thus it is the distance between the right edge of the left sidebar and the left edge of the text text margin right TpX dimension sets a new right margin sidebar width left T X dimension sets the size of the left
321. rst showing the document title the second showing the author s name begin beamercolorbox ht 2 5ex dp 1ex center title in head foot usebeamerfont title in head foot insertshorttitle end beamercolorbox begin beamercolorbox ht 2 5ex dp lex center author in head foot usebeamerfont author in head foot insertshortauthor end beamercolorbox Example Typesetting a postit setbeamercolor postit fg black bg yellow begin beamercolorbox sep 1em wd 5cm postit Place me somewhere end beamercolorbox The following options can be given e wd width sets the width of the box This command has two effects First T X s hsize is set to width Second after the box has been typeset its width is set to width no matter what it actually turned out to be Since setting the Mhsize does not automatically change some of PTEX s linewidth dimensions you should consider using a minipage inside this environment if you fool around with the width If the width is larger than the normal text width as specified by the value of textwidth the width of the resulting box is reset to the width textwidth but intelligent negative skips are 103 inserted at the left and right end of the box The net effect of this is that you can use a width larger than the text width for a box and can insert the resulting box directly into normal text without getting annoying warnings and having the box positioned sensibly e dp d
322. ry projector What looks good on your screen need not look good during a presentation e dynamic Makes all covered text quite transparent but in a dynamic way The longer it will take till the text is uncovered the stronger the transparency e highly dynamic Has the same effect as dynamic but the effect is stronger e still covered not yet list specifies how to render covered items that have not yet been uncov ered The not yet lest should be a list of opaqueness commands see the description of that command below Example setbeamercovered still covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 opaqueness lt 2 gt 10 opaqueness lt 3 gt 5 opaqueness lt 4 gt 2 again covered opaqueness lt 1 gt 15 e again covered once more list specifies how to render covered items that have once more been covered that is that had been shown before but are now covered again opaqueness lt overlay specification gt percentage of opaqueness The overlay specification specifies on which slides covered text should have which percentage of opaqueness Unlike other overlay specifications this overlay specification is a relative overlay specification For example the specification 3 here means things that will be uncovered three slides ahead respectively things that have once more been covered for three slides More precisely if an item is uncovered for more than one slide and then covered once more only the
323. s usecolortheme whale Example There Is No Largest Prime Number im There Is No Largest Prime Number Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof o Aranda 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Installs a white on dark palette for the headline footline and sidebar The backgrounds used there are set to shades between the structure BEAMER color and black The foreground is set to white While this color theme can appear to be aggressive you should note that a dark bar at the border of a frame will have a somewhat different appearance during a presentation than it has on paper During a presentation the projection on the wall is usually surrounded by blackness Thus a dark bar will not create a contrast as opposed to the way it does on paper Indeed using this theme will cause the main part of the frame to be more at the focus of attention The counterpart to the theme with respect to blocks is the orchid theme However pairing it with the rose color theme is also interesting usecolortheme seahorse Example 163 Danes eine esas There Is No Largest Prime Number Dios ambar The
324. s smal1 The following template options are predefined e default The default template shows the last slide in the upper right corner and some hints that should help you match a note page to the slide that is currently shown e compress The option produces an output that is similar to the default only more fits onto each note page at the price of legibility e plain Just inserts the note text no fancy hints The following two inserts are useful for note pages e insertnote Inserts the text of the current note into the template e insertslideintonotes magnification Inserts a mini picture of the last slide into the current note The slide will be scaled by the given magnification Example insertslideintonotes 0 25 This will give a mini slide whose width and height are one fourth of the usual size 123 14 3 2 Specifying Which Notes and Frames Are Shown Since you normally do not wish the notes to be part of your presentation you must explicitly specify the class option notes to include notes If this option is not specified notes are suppressed The notes class option takes several parameters whose effects are explained in the following documentclass notes hide beamer Notes are not shown This is the default in a presentation documentclass notes show beamer Include notes in the output file Normal slides are also included documentclass notes only beamer Include only the notes in
325. s you must use the overlay option when using textpos so that it will place boxes before everything Alternatively you can install an empty background template but this may result in an incorrect display in certain situtations with older versions of the Acrobat Reader usepackage ucs See Musepackage utf8 inputenc usepackage xcolor PRESEN The xcolor package is automatically loaded by beamer cls The same applies as to color TATION documentclass xcolor list of options beamer Causes the list of options to be passed on to the xcolor package When using BEAMER together with the pstricks package be sure to pass the xcolor pst option to BEAMER and hence to xcolor ARTICLE The color package is not loaded automatically if beamerarticle is loaded with the noxcolor option 2 7 License The GNU Public License Version 2 The BEAMER class is distributed under the GNU public license version 2 In detail this means the following the following text is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation 14 2 7 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it So
326. s an overlay specification like lt 3 gt it will call text with arguments 1 to argument number set to the normal arguments and the argument number argument number 1 set to lt 3 gt including the pointed brackets If no overlay specification is found the extra argument is empty If the default optional value is provided the first argument of command name is optional If no optional argument is specified in square brackets the default optional value is used Example The following command will typeset its argument in red on the specified slides newcommand lt gt makered 1 color 2 red 1 Example Here is BEAMER s definition of emph newcommand lt gt emph 1 only 2 itshape 1 Example Here is BEAMER s definition of transdissolve the command beamer dotrans mainly passes its argument to hyperref newcommand lt gt transdissolve 1 only 2 beamer dotrans 1 Dissolve 68 Xrenewcommand lt gt existing command name argument number default optional value 14 text Redeclares a command that already exists in the same way as newcommand lt gt Inside text you can still access to original definitions using the command beameroriginal see the example Example This command is used in BEAMER to make hyperlink overlay specification aware renewcommand lt gt hyperlink 2 only 3 beameroriginal hyperlink 1 2 newenvironment lt gt environment name arg
327. s contents to be stored under the name name for later resumption using the command againframe If this option is given you cannot directly include verbatim text in the frame The frame is still rendered normally See also againframe Furthermore on each slide of the frame a label with the name name lt slide number gt is created On the first slide furthermore a label with the name name is created so the labels name and name lt 1 gt point to the same slide Note that labels in general and these labels in particular can be used as targets for hyperlinks plain causes the headlines footlines and sidebars to be suppressed This is useful for creating single frames with different head and footlines or for creating frames showing big pictures that completely fill the frame Example A frame with a picture completely filling the frame begin frame plain begin centering pgf image height paperheight somebigimagefile Xpar end centering end frame Example A title page in which the head and footlines are replaced by two graphics setbeamertemplate title page pgfuseimage toptitle vskipOpt plus 1fi111 44 LYX LYX LYX LYX ARTICLE begin centering usebeamerfont title usebeamercolor fg title inserttitle insertdate end centering vskipOpt plus 1fi111 pgfuseimage bottomtitle begin frame plain titlepage end frame e shrink minimum shrink percentag
328. s option need not be specified e channels 1 or 2 Specifies whether the sound is mono or stereo If the sound is mono this option need not be specified e depth TRX dimension Overrides the depth of the sound poster text box and sets it to the given dimension e encoding method Specifies the encoding method which may be Raw Signed muLaw or ALaw If the method is muLaw this option need not be specified e height T X dimension Overrides the height of the sound poster text box and sets it to the given dimension e inlinesound causes the sound data to be stored directly in the PDF file e label sound label Assigns a label to the sound such that it can later be referenced by the command hyperlinksound which can be used to start a sound The sound label is not a normal label e loop or repeat Causes the sound to start again when the end has been reached e mixsound true or false If set to true the sound is played in addition to any sound that is already playing If set to false all other sounds though not sound from movies are stopped before the the sound is played The default is false e samplingrate number Specifies the number of samples per second in the sound file If this number is 44100 this option need not be specified e width T X dimension works like the height option only for the width of the poster box Example The following example creates a background sound for the slide assu
329. s possible in a text In particular typographic wisdom dictates that you should not use more than two different families on one page However when typesetting mathematical text it is often necessary and useful to use different font 37 families For example it used to be common practice to use Gothic letters do denote vectors Also program texts are often typeset in monospace fonts If your audience is used to a certain font family for a certain type of text use that family regardless of what typographic wisdom says A common practice in typography is to use a sans serif fonts for titles and serif fonts for normal text check your favorite magazine You can also use two different sans serif fonts or two different serif fonts but you then have to make sure that the fonts look sufficiently different If they look only slightly different the page will look somehow strange but the audience will not be able to tell why For example do not mix Arial and Helvetica they are almost identical or Computer Modern and Baskerville they are quite similar A combination of Gills Sans and Helvetica is dangerous but perhaps possible A combination like Futura and Optima is certainly ok at least with respect to the fonts being very different 5 6 3 Font Shapes Italics and Small Capitals IXT X introduces the concept of the shape of a font The only really important ones are italic and small caps An italic font is a font in which the text is
330. s the default resume Resumes playback of the movie if it has previously been paused If has not been paused but not started or is already playing nothing happens showcontrols true or false As for movie this causes a control bar to be shown or not shown during playback start time s As for movie this causes the given number of seconds to be skipped at the beginning of the movie if play is used to start the movie stop Causes the playback of the movie to be stopped Animations Created by Showing Slides in Rapid Succession create an animation in a portable way by using the overlay commands of the BEAMER package to create a series of slides that when shown in rapid succession present an animation This is a flexible approach but such animations will typically be rather static since it will take some time to advance from one slide to the next This approach is mostly useful for animations where you want to explain each picture of the animation When you advance slides by hand that is by pressing a forward button it typically takes at least a second for the next slide to show More lively animations can be created by relying on a capability of the viewer program Some programs support showing slides only for a certain number of seconds during a presentation for the Acrobat Reader this works only in full screen mode By setting the number of seconds to zero you can create a rapid succession of slides To f
331. se item 61 C end itemize end frame ARTICLE This command is ignored LYX LYX Use the Pause style with an empty line to insert a pause To unpause some text that is to temporarily suspend pausing use the command Nonslide see below 8 2 The General Concept of Overlay Specifications The approach taken by most presentation classes to overlays is somewhat similar to the above pause command These commands get a certain slide number as input and affect the text on the slide following this command in a certain way For example PROSPER s FromSlide 2 command causes all text following this command to be shown only from the second slide on The BEAMER class uses a different approach though the abovementioned command is also available onslide lt 2 gt will have the same effect as FromSlide 2 expect that onslide transcends environments likewise pause is internally mapped to a command with an appropriate overlay specifications The idea is to add overlay specifications to certain commands These specifications are always given in pointed brackets and follow the command as soon as possible though in certain cases BEAMER also allows overlay specification to be given a little later In the simplest case the specification contains just a number A command with an overlay specification following it will only have effect on the slide s mentioned in the specification What exactly having an effect me
332. se sections applies to other packages as well not just to BEAMER At the end of this part nonpresentation material is treated This includes handouts or lecture notes Several commands can be used to facilitate the creation of such handouts or lecture notes 41 7 Creating Frames 7 1 The Frame Environment A presentation consists of a series of frames Each frame consists of a series of slides You create a frame using the command frame or the environment frame which do the same The command takes one parameter namely the contents of the frame All of the text that is not tagged by overlay specifications is shown on all slides of the frame Overlay specifications is explain in more detail in later sections For the moment let s just say that an overlay specification is a list of number or number ranges in pointed brackets that is put after certain commands as in uncover lt 1 2 gt Text If a frame contains commands that have an overlay specification the frame will contain multiple slides otherwise it contains only one slide begin frame lt overlay specification gt lt default overlay specification gt options environment contents end frame The overlay specification dictates which slides of a frame are to be shown If left out the number is calculated automatically The environment contents can be normal TATFX text but may not contain verb commands or verbatim environments unless the containsverbatim opti
333. section section section sidebar canvas left 50 sidebar canvas right 51 sidebar left 49 sidebar right 50 structure begin 96 structure end 96 subsection in head foot 53 subsection in head foot shaded 53 sidebar 53 subsection in toc 76 subsection in toc shaded 76 theorem begin 102 theorem end 102 title page 74 verse begin 108 verse end 108 beamerarticle package 124 beamerboxesrounded environment 105 beamerbutton 85 beamercolorbox environment 103 beamerdefaultoverlayspecification 72 beamerfoils package 190 beamergotobutton 86 beamerprosper package 183 beamerreturnbutton 86 beamerseminar package 187 beamerskipbutton 86 beamertexpower package 192 beetle color theme 160 Bergen presentation theme 134 Berkeley presentation theme 137 Berlin presentation theme 139 bibitem 83 bibliography entry author template color font 82 bibliography entry journal template color font 83 bibliography entry note template color font 83 bibliography entry title template color font 83 bibliography item template color font 83 bigger class option 174 block environment 98 block alerted begin template 98 block alerted end template 98 block begin template 98 subsection in 196 block body color font 98 block body alerted color font 98 block body example color font 99 block end template 98 block example begin template 99 block example end template 99 block title color font 98 block title a
334. setbeamercolor setbeamercolor beamer color name H options Sets or changes a BEAMER color The beamer color name should be a reasonably simple text do not try too much trickery and avoid punctuation symbols but it may contain spaces Thus normal text is a valid beamer color name and so is My Color Number 2 In the most simple case you just specify a foreground by giving the fg option and possibly also a background using the bg option Example setbeamercolor normal text fg black bg mylightgrey Example setbeamercolor alerted text fg red 80 black The effect of this command is accumulative thus the following two commands setbeamercolor section in toc fg blue setbeamercolor section in toc bg white have the same effect as setbeamercolor section in toc fg blue bg white Naturally a second call with the same kind of option set to a different value overrides a previous call The starred version first resets everything thereby switching off the accumulative effect Use this starred version to completely reset the definition of some BEAMER color The following options may be given e fg color sets the foreground color of beamer color name to the given normal color The color may also be a color expression like red 50 black see the manual of the XCOLOR package If color is empty the beamer color name has no special foreground and when the color is used the foreground curre
335. should not present a long list of all your other great papers except if you are giving an application talk e Using the cite commands can be confusing since the audience has little chance of remembering the citations Tf you cite the references always cite them with full author name and year like Tantau 2003 instead of something like 2 4 or Tan01 NT02 e Tf you want to be modest you can abbreviate your name when citing yourself as in Nickelsen and T 2003 or Nickelsen and T 2003 However this can be confusing for the audience since it is often not immediately clear who exactly T might be recommend using the full name 31 5 1 3 Frame Structure Just like your whole presentation each frame should also be structured A frame that is solely filled with some long text is very hard to follow It is your job to structure the contents of each frame such that ideally the audience immediately seems which information is important which information is just a detail how the presented information is related and so on The Frame Title Put a title on each frame The title explains the contents of the frame to people who did not follow all details on the slide The title should really explain things not just give a cryptic summary that cannot be understood unless one has understood the whole slide For example a title like The Poset will have everyone puzzled what this slide might be about
336. sidebar Currently this command should be given before a shading is installed for the sidebar canvas sidebar width right T X dimension sets the size of the right sidebar description width T X dimension sets the default width of description labels see Section 11 1 description width of text sets the default width of description labels to the width of the text see Section 11 1 mini frame size T X dimension sets the size of mini frames in a navigation bar When two mini frame icons are shown alongside each other their left end points are TgX dimension far apart mini frame of set T X dimension set an additional vertical offset that is added to the mini frame size when arranging mini frames vertically ARTICLE This command has no effect in article mode 58 7 4 Restricting the Slides of a Frame The number of slides in a frame is automatically calculated If the largest number mentioned in any overlay specification inside the frame is 4 four slides are introduced despite the fact that a specification like lt 4 gt might suggest that more than four slides would be possible You can also specify the number of slides in the frame by hand To do so you pass an overlay specification the frame command The frame will contain only the slides specified in this argument Consider the following example begin frame lt 1 2 4 gt This is slide number only lt 1 gt 1 only lt 2 gt 2 only lt 3 gt 3 only lt 4
337. size from slide to slide which is a typographic nightmare Its usage can always be avoided by restructuring and simplifying frames which will result in a better presentation Example begin frame shrink 5 Some evil endless slide that is 5 too large end frame e squeeze causes all vertical spaces in the text to be squeezed together as much as possible Currently this just causes the vertical space in enumerations or itemizations to be reduced to zero Using this option is not good but also not evil Use the style BeginFrame to start a frame and the style EndFrame to end it A frame is automat ically ended by the start of a new frame and by the start of a new section or section but not by the end of the document You can pass options and an overlay specification to a frame by giving these in T X mode as the first thing in the frame title Some magic is performed to extract them in LyX mode from there The style BeginPlainFrame is included as a convenience It passes the plain option to the frame To pass further options to a plain frame you should use the normal BeginFrame style and specify all options including plain In LyX you can insert verbatim text directly even in overlayed frames The reason is that LyX uses a different internal mechanism for typesetting verbatim text that is easier to handle for BEAMER In article mode the frame environment does not create any visual reference to
338. slides This is useful for showing things incrementally as in the following example begin frame frametitle A Theorem on Infinite Sets begin theorem lt 1 gt There exists an infinite set end theorem begin proof lt 3 gt This follows from the axiom of infinity end proof begin example lt 2 gt The set of natural numbers is infinite end example end frame In the example the first slide only contains the theorem on the second slide an example is added and on the third slide the proof is also shown For each of the basic commands only alt visible uncover and invisible there exists envi ronment versions onlyenv altenv visibleenv uncoverenv and invisibleenv Except for altenv and onlyenv these environments do the same as the commands beginfonlyenv lt overlay specification gt environment contents end onlyenv If the overlay specification is given the contents of the environment is inserted into the text only on the specified slides The difference to Nonly is that the text is actually typeset inside a box that is then thrown away whereas only immediately throws away its contents If the text is not typesettable the onlyenv may produce an error where only would not Example begin frame This line is always shown begin onlyenv lt 2 gt This line is inserted on slide 2 end onlyenv end frame beginfaltenv lt overlay specification gt begin text end
339. so sets the input encoding to utf8 You could also use the option ucs and say usepackage utf8 inputenc in the preamble If you use a Unicode character outside the first two code pages which includes the Latin alphabet and the extended Latin alphabet in a section or subsection heading you have to use the command PreloadUnicodePage code page to give ucs a chance to preload these code pages You will know that a character has not been preloaded if you get a message like Please insert into preamble The code page of a character is given by the unicode number of the character divided by 256 usepackage listings PRESEN Note that you must treat 1stlisting environments exactly the same way as you would treat verbatim TATION environments When using defverbatim that contains a colored 1stlisting use the colored option of defverbatin usepackage msc PRESEN Since this packages uses pstricks internally everything that applies to pstricks also applies to msc TATION usepackage musixtex When using MusiX TRX to typeset musical scores your document must be compiled with pdfelatex or elatex instead of pdflatex or latex Inside a music environment the pause is redefined to match MusiX TpX s definition a rest during one quarter of a whole You can use the beamerpause command to create overlays in this environment usepackage pdfpages Commands like includepdf only work outside frames as they produce pages by thems
340. specifications for the trans version as needed An elaborated example of different overlay specifications for the presentation the handout and the transparencies can be found in the file beamerexamplei tex documentclass trans beamer Create a version that uses the trans overlay specifications When printing a presentation using Acrobat make sure that the option expand small pages to paper size in the printer dialog is enabled This is necessary because slides are only 128mm times 96mm 14 3 Adding Notes A note is a small piece of paper that is intended as a reminder to yourself of what you should say or should keep in mind when presenting a slide 14 3 1 Specifying Note Contents To add a note to a slide or a frame you should use the note command This command can be used both inside and outside frames but it has quite different behaviors then Inside frames note commands accumulate and append a single note page after the current slide outside frames each note directly inserts a single note page with the given parameter as contents Using the note command inside frames is usually preferably over using them outside since only commands issued inside frames profit from the class option onlyslideswithnotes see below In LyX only the inside frame note command with the option item is available in the form of the Noteltem style Inside a frame the effect of note text is the following When you use it somewhere inside
341. split into a left part showing the author s name and a right part showing the talk s title e text line tert The footline is typeset more or less as if it were a normal text line with the text as contents The left and right margin are setup such that they are the same as the margins of normal text The text is typeset inside an hbox while the headline is normally typeset in vertical mode Using the strut command somewhere in such a line might be a good idea The same inserts as for headlines can be used Beamer Color Font page number in head foot These BEAMER color and font are used to typeset the page number or frame number in the footline 7 2 2 The Sidebars Sidebars are vertical areas that stretch from the lower end of the headline to the top of the footline There can be a sidebar at the left and another one at the right or even both Sidebars can show a table of contents but they could also be added for purely aesthetic reasons When you install a sidebar template you must explicitly specify the horizontal size of the sidebar using the command setbeamesize with the option sidebar left width or sidebar right width The vertical size is determined automatically Each sidebar has its own background canvas which can be setup using the sidebar canvas templates Adding a sidebar of a certain size say 1cm will make the main text 1cm narrower The distance between the inner side of a side bar and the outer side of the text as
342. st Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University ot Mexancia Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 0 Results Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p e Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number A variation on the Berlin theme The same options may be given 139 usetheme Dresden Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem There is no largest prime number Euklid of Alexandria Proof Debate ol Vanemas 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid Univ Alexandria Euklid Univ Alexandria There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number A variation on the Berlin theme with a strong separation into navigational stuff at the top bottom and a sober main text The same options may
343. st Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem can be given There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p A very dominant variation of the Goettingen theme The same options may be given usetheme options Hannover Example There Is No Largest Prime Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 There Is No Largest Prime Eukld There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof Suppose p were the largest prime number Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p 138 In this theme the sidebar on the left is balanced by right fushed frame titles The following options may be given e hideallsubsections causes only sections to be shown in the sidebar This is useful if you need to save space e hideothersubsections causes only the subsections of the current section to be show
344. st Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Proof Department of Mathematics gt University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A more sober variation of the Copenhagen theme usetheme Warsaw Example Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique There is no largest prime number d Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics A University of Alexandria Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Q Results e Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number A dominant variation of the Copenhagen theme 142 15 7 Presentation Themes Included For Compatibility Earlier versions of BEAMER included some further themes These themes are still available for compatibility though they are now implemented differently they also mainly install appropriate color font
345. t e right puts the sidebar of the right side e width dimension specifies the width of the sidebar If it is set to Opt it is completely suppressed The default is 2 5 base line heights of the frame title font useoutertheme split Example 149 Results There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number This theme installs a headline in which on the left the sections of the talk are shown and on the right the subsections of the current section If the class option compress has been given the sections and subsections will be put in one line normally there is one line per section or subsection The footline shows the author on the left and the talk s title on the right The colors are taken from palette primary and palette fourth useoutertheme shadow Example There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Depar
346. t end foverprint LYX Use the style Overprint to insert an overprint environment You have to use T X mode to insert the onslide commands A similar need for dynamical changes arises when you have say a series of pictures named first pdf second pdf and third pdf that show different stages of some process To make a frame that shows these pictures on different slides the following code might be used begin frame frametitle The Three Process Stages includegraphics lt 1 gt first pdf includegraphics lt 2 gt second pdf includegraphics lt 3 gt third pdf end frame 67 The above code uses the fact the BEAMER makes the includegraphics command overlay specification aware It works nicely but only if each pdf file contains the complete graphic to be shown However some programs like xfig sometimes also produce series of graphics in which each file just contains the additional graphic elements to be shown on the next slide In this case the first graphic must be shown not on overlay 1 but from overlay 1 on and so on While this is easy to achieve by changing the overlay specification lt 1 gt to lt 1 gt the graphics must also be shown on top of each other An easy way to achieve this is to use T X s llap command like this begin frame frametitle The Three Process Stages includegraphics lt 1 gt first pdf llap includegraphics lt 2 gt second pdf llap includegraphics lt 3 gt th
347. t Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number 7 Proof Department of Mathematics E University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Results Proof of the Main Theorem This theme is similarly as the structurebold font theme but where structurebold makes text bold this theme typesets it in italics and in the standard serif font The same options as for the structurebold theme are supported See Section 5 6 3 for the pros and cons of using italics usefonttheme options structuresmallcapsserif Example 173 THERE IS NO LARGEST PRIME NUMBER THE PROOF USES reductio ad absurdum THERE IS NO LARGEST PRIME NUMBER WITH AN INTRODUCTION TO A NEW PROOF TECHNIQUE THEOREM Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number PROOF Department of Mathematics gt University of Alexandria 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p o RESULTS Proof of the Main Theorem Again this theme does exactly the same as the structurebold font theme only this time text is set using small caps and a serif font The same options as for the structurebold theme are supported See Section 5 6 3 for the pros and cons of using s
348. t get very personal using Times italics which everyone has seen a thousand times However it is harder to read than normal text so do not use it for text more than a line long The second font shape supported by T X are small capital letters Using them can create a conservative even formal impression but some words of caution e Small capitals are different from all uppercase text A small caps text leaves normal uppercase letters unchanged and uses smaller versions of the uppercase letters for normal typesetting lowercase letters Thus the word German is typeset as GERMAN using small caps but as GERMAN using all uppercase letters e Small caps either come as faked small caps or as real small caps Faked small caps are created by just scaling down normal uppercase letters This leads to letters the look too thin Real small caps are specially designed smaller versions of the uppercase letters that have the same stroke width as normal text e Computer Modern fonts and expert version of PostScript fonts come with real small caps though the small caps of Computer Modern are one point size too large for some unfathomable reason but your audience is going to pardon this since it will not notice anyway Simple PostScript fonts like out of the box Helvetica or Times only come with faked small caps e Text typeset in small caps is harder to read than normal text The reason is that we read by seeing the shape of w
349. t to default overlay specification Example You can create the same effect as in the previous example using multiinclude lt gt gra Example For a more interesting usage of the default overlay specification consider the following usage multiinclude lt alert gt gra This will always paint the most recently added part of the graphic in red assuming you do not use special colors in the graphic itself 116 Example In order to have each graphic completely replace the previous one you could use AXmultiinclude lt gt gra The following options may be given these are the same as for the original command from the ppower4 package e pause command replaces the default pausing command pause by command If a default overlay specification is given the default pausing command is empty otherwise it is pause Note that commands like pauselevel are not available in beamer e graphics options passes the options to the includegraphics command Example multiinclude graphics height 5cm gra e format extension will cause the file names for which we search change from base file name number to base file name number extension Note the change from the dot to a hyphen This option allows you to include say jpg files e start number specifies the start number The default is zero e end number specifies the end number The default is infinity Note that if you do not
350. t wish a certain text to appear only from the third slide on during your presentation but in a handout for the audience there should be no second slide and the text should appear already on the second slide In this case you could write only lt 3 handout 2 gt Some text The vertical bar which must be followed by a white space separates the two different specifications 3 and handout 2 By writing a mode name before a colon you specify that the following specification only applies to that mode If no mode is given as in 3 the mode beamer is automatically added For this reason if you write only lt 3 gt Text and you are in handout mode the text will be shown on all slides since there is no restriction specified for handouts and since the 3 is the same as beamer 3 It is also possible to give an overlay specification that contains only a mode name or several separated by vertical bars only lt article gt This text is shown only in article mode An overlay specification that does not contain any slide numbers is called a pure mode specification If a mode specification is given all modes that are not mentioned are automatically suppressed Thus lt beamer 1 gt means on all slides in beamer mode and also on all slides in all other modes since nothing special is specified for them whereas lt beamer gt means on all slides in beamer mode and not on any other slide Mode specifications can also be used outside frames
351. talled for this template The following template options are predefined e sidebar theme This template which is only available if the sidebar outer theme is loaded inserts a bar with the BEAMER color s foreground and background that shows the section name The width of the bar is the same as the width of the whole sidebar The same inserts as for section in head foot can be used Beamer Template Color section in sidebar shaded This template is used instead of section in sidebar for typesetting sections that are currently shaded Such shading is usually applied to all sections but the current one Differently from section in head foot shaded this template has its own BEAMER color The following template options are predefined e sidebar theme Does the same as for the nonshaded version except that a different BEAMER color is used Beamer Template Color Font subsection in head foot This template behaves exactly like section in head foot only for subsections e insertsubsectionhead works like insertsectionhead e insertsubsectionheadnumber works like insertsectionheadnumber Beamer Template subsection in head foot shaded This template behaves exactly like section in head foot shaded only for subsections The following template options are predefined e default percentage works like the corresponding option for sections Example setbeamertemplate section in head foot shaded default 20 setbeamertempl
352. tch Switches to a boldface typewriter font 193 Index This index is still very much under construction Currently it only contains automatically generated entries professional font package package 14 10pt class option 174 11pt class option 174 12pt class option 174 14pt class option 174 17pt class option 175 20pt class option 175 8pt class option 174 9pt class option 174 abstract color font 107 abstract environment 107 abstract begin template 108 abstract end template 108 abstract title template color font 107 action 72 actionenv environment 71 addfootbox 134 addheadbox 133 addtobeamertemplate 154 againframe 88 albatross color theme 159 AlDraTex package 11 alert 97 alertblock environment 98 alerted text color font 97 alerted text begin template 97 alerted text end template 97 alertenv environment 97 alltt package 11 a ltenv environment 66 amsthm package 12 animate 114 animatevalue 115 Antibes presentation theme 135 appendix 83 AtBeginLecture 79 AtBeginPart 79 AtBeginSection 77 AtBeginSubsection 77 author 75 babel package 12 background template color font 58 background canvas template color font 57 Beamer colors abstract 107 abstract title 107 alerted text 97 background 58 background canvas 57 bibliography entry author 82 bibliography entry journal 83 bibliography entry note 83 bibliography entry title 83 bibliography
353. tclass compress beamer Tries to make all navigation bars as small as possible For example all small frame representations in the navigation bars for a single section are shown alongside each other Normally the representations for different subsections are shown in different lines Furthermore section and subsection navigations are compressed into one line Some themes use the insertnavigation to insert a navigation bar into the headline Inside this bar small icons are shown called mini frames that represent the frames of a presentation When you click on such an icon the following happens e If you click on the icon of any frame other than the current frame the presentation will jump to the first slide of the frame you clicked on e If you click on the current frame and you are not on the last slide of this frame you will jump to the last slide of the frame e If you click on the current frame and you are on the last slide you will jump to the first slide of the frame By the above rules you can e Jump to the beginning of a frame from somewhere else by clicking on it once e Jump to the end of a frame from somewhere else by clicking on it twice e Skip the rest of the current frame by clicking on it once I also tried making a jump to an already visited frame jump automatically to the last slide of this frame However this turned out to be more confusing than helpful With the current implementation a double click
354. ted as a completely highlighted table of contents An appendix icon which is depicted as a completely highlighted table of contents consisting of only one section This icon is only shown if there is an appendix Back and forward icons depicted as circular arrows A search or find icon depicted as a detective s magnifying glass Clicking on the left arrow next to an icon always jumps to the last slide of the previous slide frame subsection or section Clicking on the right arrow next to an icon always jump to the first slide of the next slide frame subsection or section Clicking on any of these icons has different effects l If supported by the viewer application clicking on a slide icon pops up a window that allows you to enter a slide number to which you wish to jump Clicking on the left side of a frame icon will jump to the first slide of the frame clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the frame this can be useful for skipping overlays Clicking on the left side of a subsection icon will jump to the first slide of the subsection clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the subsection Clicking on the left side of a section icon will jump to the first slide of the section clicking on the right side will jump to the last slide of the section Clicking on the left side of the presentation icon will jump to the first slide clicking on the right side
355. the mini template is replaced by the current item number an occurrence of the letter A is replaced by the ith letter of the alphabet in uppercase for the th item and the letters a i and I are replaced by the corresponding lowercase letters lowercase Roman letters and uppercase Roman letters respectively So the mini template i would yield the items i ii iii iv and so on The mini template A would yield the items A B C D and so on For more details on the possible mini templates see the documentation of the enumerate package Note that there is also a template that governs the appearance of the mini template Example begin enumerate item This is important item This is also important end enumerate begin enumerate i item First Roman point item Second Roman point end enumerate begin enumerate lt gt i item First Roman point item Second Roman point uncovered on second slide end enumerate ARTICLE To use the mini template you have to include the package enumerate LYX The same constraints as for itemize apply Parent Beamer Template enumerate items Similar to itemize items this template is a parent template whose children are enumerate item enumerate subitem enumerate subsubitem and enumerate mini template These templates govern how the text the number of an enumeration is typeset The following template options are predefined e default The defa
356. the class option gray which ensures that all colors are converted to grayscale Also consider using the structurebold font theme usecolortheme fly Example Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Theorem Proof This theme is the consequent version of beetle and uses white black gray throughout It does not go particularly well with themes that use shadows usecolortheme seagul1 Example Desa teabe There Is No Largest Prime Number Num The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid Results There Is No Largest Prime Number ouis Po With an introduction to a new proof technique Eu Theorem Euklid of Alexandria There is no largest prime number Department of Mathematics Proof University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 I 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number Results ible t Proof of the Main Theorem 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p ae o 2 e M 2 Q Like the dove color theme this theme is useful for printing on a black and white printer However it uses different shades of gray extensively which may or may not look good on a transparency 161 17 1 3 Inner Color Themes Inner color themes only specify the colors of elements used in inner themes Most noticably they specify the colors used for blocks They can be used together with other color themes Tf they are use
357. the original frame no frame is drawn Rather the frame text is inserted into the normal text To change this you can modify the templates frame begin and frame end see below To suppress a frame in article mode you can for example specify lt presentation gt as overlay specification 45 Beamer Template frame begin The text of this template is inserted at the beginning of each frame in article mode and only there You can use it say to start a minipage environment at the beginning of a frame or to insert a horizontal bar or whatever Beamer Template frame end The text of this template is inserted at the end of each frame in article mode frame lt overlay specification gt lt default overlay specification gt options 14 contents This command does the same as putting the contents in a frame environment called Example The following two frame will be identical frame Hi begin frame Hi end frame Internally the frame command is what is actually executed The frame environment just collects its environment contents and then calls the frame command except if the option containsverbatim is specified in which case the contents is not collected but control is nevertheless passed on the frame the internals are a bit obscure You can use the frame environment inside other environments like this newenvironment myframe 1 begin frame frametitle 1 end frame However the actual mechanics ar
358. the output file and suppresses all frames Useful for printing them If you specify this command the aux and toc files are not updated So if you add a section and re TX your presentation this will not be reflected in the navigation bars which you do not see anyway since only notes are output documentclass notes onlyslideswithnotes beamer This includes all notes and those slides that contain a note Frames that are just followed by a note command will not be included If you use only note commands this option will cause the frames and the notes that apply to them to be nicely paired This is useful for printing 14 4 Creating an Article Version In the following the article version of your presentation refers to a normal T X text typeset using for example the document class article or perhaps llncs or a similar document class This version of the presentation will typically follow different typesetting rules and may even have a different structure Nevertheless you may wish to have this version coexist with your presentation in one file and you may wish to share some part of it like a figure or a formula with your presentation 14 4 1 Starting the Article Mode The article mode of a presentation is created by specifying article or book or some other class as the document class instead of beamer and by then loading the package beamerarticle The package beamerarticle defines virtually all of BEAMER s commands
359. thing else Since these numbers are not shown anyway it does not really matter whether they are given but it s a good practice and perhaps Euclid might need these numbers some other time An alternative would be nested itemize begin frame frametitle What s Still To Do begin itemize item Answered Questions begin itemize item How many primes are there end itemize item Open Questions begin itemize item Is every even number the sum of two primes end itemize end itemize end frame Pondering on the problem some more Euclid decides that it would be even nicer to have the Answered Questions on the left and the Open Questions on the right so as to create a stronger visual contrast For this he uses the columns environment Inside this environment column commands create new columns begin frame 23 frametitle What s Still To Do begin columns column 5 textwidth begin block Answered Questions How many primes are there end block column 5 textwidth begin block Open Questions Is every even number the sum of two primes end block end columns end frame Trying this he is not quite satisfied with the result as the block on the left has a different height than the one on the right He thinks it would be nicer if they were vertically top aligned So he adds the t option to the columns environment Euclid is somewhat please to find out that a pause at the end of t
360. this twice starred version the color used for the template is guaranteed to be independent of the color that was currently in use when the template is used Finally adding a third star will also cause a start to be added to the setbeamerfont command This causes the font used for the template also to be reset to normal text unless the BEAMER font element name specifies things differently This three star version is the most protected version available ifbeamertemplateempty beamer template name H executed if empty erecuted otherwise This command checks whether a template is defined and set to a non empty text If the text is empty or the template is not defined at all executed if empty is executed Otherwise executed otherwise is executed expandbeamertemplate beamer template name This command does the same as usebeamertemplate beamer template name The difference is that this command performs a direct expansion and does not scan for a star This is important inside for example an edef If you don t know the difference between def and edef you won t need this command 16 3 3 Setting Beamer s Templates To set a BEAMER template you can use the following command setbeamertemplate element name L predefined option args In the simplest case if no predefined option is given the args must be a single argument and the text of the template element name is setup to be this text Upon later in
361. tion This is the introduction text This text is not shown in the presentation but will be part of the article begin frame begin figure In the article this is a floating figure In the presentation this figure is shown in the first frame pgfuseimage myimage end figure end frame This text is once more not shown in the presentation section Main Part While this text is not shown in the presentation the section command also applies to the presentation We can add a subsection that is only part of the article like this subsection lt article gt Article Only Section With some more text 125 begin frame This text is part both of the article and of the presentation begin itemize item This stuff is also shown in both version item This too only lt article gt item This particular item is only part of the article version item lt presentation only 0 gt This text is also only part of the article end itemize end frame end document There is one command whose behaviour is a bit special in article mode The line break command Inside frames this command has no effect in article mode except if an overlay specification is present Then it has the normal effect dictated by the specification The reason for this behaviour is that you will typically inserts lots of commands in a presentation in order to get control over all line breaks These line breaks are mostly superfluous in article mode
362. tion subsection Overview of the Beamer Class subsection Overview of Similar Classes section Usage subsection subsection section Examples subsection subsection 26 PRESEN TATION LYX PRESEN TATION LYX PRESEN TATION begin frame end frame to enforce entries in the table of contents end document The empty frame at the end which should be deleted later ensures that the sections and subsections are actually part of the table of contents This frame is necessary since a section or subsection command following the last page of a document has no effect 4 3 Step Three Creating a PDF or PostScript File Once a first version of the structure is finished you should try to create a first PDF or PostScript file of your still empty talk to ensure that everything is working properly This file will only contain the title page and the table of contents Use View to check whether the presentation compiles fine Note that you must put the table of contents inside a frame but that the title page is created automatically 4 3 1 Creating PDF To create a PDF version of this file run the program pdflatex on main tex at least twice Your need to run it twice so that T X can create the table of contents It may even be necessary to run it more often since all sorts of auxiliary files are created In the following example the greater than sign is the prompt gt pdflatex
363. tle bigger which makes the text more readable The downside is that less fits onto each frame documentclass bigger beamer Same as the 12pt option documentclass 14pt beamer Makes all fonts somewhat bigger Requires extsize to be installed 174 documentclass 17pt beamer This is about the default size of PowerPoint Requires extsize to be installed documentclass 20pt beamer This is really huge Requires extsize to be installed 18 2 2 Choosing a Font Family By default BEAMER uses the Computer Modern fonts To change this you can use one of the prepared packages of TATEX s font mechanism For example to change to Times Helvetica simply add usepackage mathptmx usepackage helvet in your preamble Note that if you do not use the serif font theme Helvetica not Times will be selected as the text font There may be many other fonts available on your installation Typically at least some of the following packages should be available avant bookman chancery charter euler helvet mathtime mathptn mathptmx newcent palatino pifont utopia 18 2 3 Choosing a Font Encodings The same font can come in different encodings which are very roughly spoken the ways the characters of a text are mapped to glyphs the actual shape of a particular character in a particular font at a particular size In T X two encodings are often used with Latin characters the T1 encoding and the OT1 encoding old T1 e
364. tlisting to typeset listings He can also use them in BEAMER but he must add the containsverbatim option to the frame and he cannot use overlays on frames typeset using this option begin frame containsverbatim frametitle An Algorithm For Finding Primes Numbers begin verbatim int main void std vector lt bool gt is_prime 100 true for int i 2 i lt 100 i if is_prime i std cout lt lt i lt lt 24 for int j i j lt 100 is_prime j false j i return 0 end verbatim end frame Euclid is a bit alarmed that he cannot use verbatims together with overlays directly Fortunately there exists a slightly more complicated mechanism where the verbatim text has to be declared before the frame for using verbatims together with overlays 3 14 Changing the Way Things Look I Theming With the contents of this talk fixed Euclid decides to have a second look at the way things look He goes back to the beginning and finds the line usetheme Warsaw By substituting other cities he notices that these cities seem to have in common that there has been a workshop or conference on theoretical computer science there at which always the same person had a paper attended or gave a talk Euclid can change the way his presentation is going to look He decides to choose some theme that is reasonably simple but since his talk is not too short shows a bit of navigational information
365. tment of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number Results Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p Euklid There Is No Largest Prime Number This layout theme extends the split theme by putting a horizontal shading behind the frame title and adding a little shadow at the bottom of the headline useoutertheme options tree Example There Is No Largest Prime Number There Is No Largest Prime Number With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem 150 There Is No Largest Prime Number L Results L Proof of the Main Theorem There Is No Largest Prime Number The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p In this layout the headline contains three lines that show the title of the current talk the current section in this talk and the current subsection in the se
366. tosymbol somearrowcommand e insertskipsymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of skip buttons e insertreturnsymbol This text is inserted at the beginning of return buttons Beamer Color button border The foreground of this color is used to render the border of buttons beamergotobutton bution texrt Draws a button with the given button text Before the text a small symbol usually a right pointing arrow is inserted that indicates that pressing this button will jump to another area of the presentation Example hyperlink detour beamergotobutton Go to detour beamerskipbutton button texrt The symbol drawn for this button is usually a double right arrow Use this button if pressing it will skip over a well defined part of your talk Example frame begin theorem end theorem begin overprint onslide lt 1 gt hfill hyperlinkframestartnext beamerskipbutton Skip proof onslide lt 2 gt begin proof end proof end foverprint beamerreturnbutton button text The symbol drawn for this button is usually a left pointing arrow Use this button if pressing it will return from a detour Example frame lt 1 gt label mytheorem begin theorem end theorem begin overprint onslide lt 1 gt hfill hyperlink mytheorem lt 2 gt beamergotobutton Go to proof details onslide lt 2 gt begin proof end proof hfill hyperlink mytheorem lt 1 gt beamerre
367. turnbutton Return 86 Nendfoverprint appendix againframe lt 2 gt mytheorem To make a button clickable you must place it in a command like hyperlink The command hyperlink is a standard command of the hyperref package The BEAMER class defines a whole bunch of other hyperlink commands that you can also use hyperlink lt overlay specification gt target name H link text lt overlay specification gt Only one overlay specification may be given The link text is typeset in the usual way If you click anywhere on this text you will jump to the slide on which the hypertarget command was used with the parameter target name If an overlay specification is present the hyperlink including the link text is completely suppressed on the non specified slides The following commands have a predefined target otherwise they behave exactly like hyperlink In particular they all also accept an overlay specification and they also accept it at the end rather than at the beginning hyperlinkslideprev lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps one slide back hyperlinkslidenext lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps one slide forward hyperlinkframestart lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps to the first slide of the current frame hyperlinkframeend lt overlay specification gt link text Clicking the text jumps t
368. u copy parts of a presentation that is mixed with normal text add the ignorenonframetext option and place every slide environment inside a frame since BEAMER will not recognize the begin slide as the beginning of a frame Add a usepackage beamerseminar to start the emulation Add the option accumulate if you wish to create a presentation to be held with a video projector Possibly add commands to install themes and templates The should be not commands in the preamble having to do with page and slide styles They do not apply to beamer Ifa newslide command is used in a slide or similarly slide environment that contains an overlay you must replace it by a closing end slide and an opening begin slide Next for each slide or slide environment that contains an overlay you must place a frame environ ment around it You can remove the slide environment and hence effectively replace it by frame unless you use the accumulate option If you use section or subsection commands inside slides you will have to move them outside the frames It may then be necessary to add a frametitle command to the slide If you use pdfI4T X to typeset the presentation you cannot include PostScript files You should convert them to pdf or to png and adjust any usage of includegraphics accordingly When starting to change things you can use all of BEAMER s commands and even mix them with SEMINAR commands An example
369. u will need to insert an endfoil before the end of the document to end the last frame 6 If you use pdfl4TRX to typeset the presentation than you cannot include PostScript files You should convert them to pdf or to png and adjust any usage of includegraphics accordingly 7 Sizes of objects are different in BEAMER since the scaling is done by the viewer not by the class Thus a framebox of size 6 inches will be way too big in a BEAMER presentation You will have to manually adjust explicit dimension occurring in a foil T X presentation usepackage beamerfoils Include this package in a beamer presentation to get access to FOILS commands Use beamer as the document class not foils Example In the following example frames are automatically created The endfoil at the end is needed to close the last frame documentclass beamer usepackage beamerfoils begin document maketitle foilhead First Frame This is on the first frame pagebreak This is on the second frame which is a continuation of the first foilhead Third Frame This is on the third frame endfoil end document Example In this example frames are manually inserted No endfoil is needed documentclass beamer usepackage beamerfoils begin document frame maketitle frame foilhead First Frame This is on the first frame framet foilhead Second Frame This is on the second frame end document 190 In the fo
370. ucture foreground to a named color This color must pre viously have been defined using the DefineNamedColor command Adding the class option xcolor dvipsnames will install a long list of standard names See the file dvipsnam def for the list usecolortheme sidebartab Example ee ugereme There Is No Largest Prime Number Number ambar The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid Results There Is No Largest Prime Number Results root ot the Main With an introduction to a new proof technique Euklid of Alexandria Department of Mathematics University of Alexandria 27th International Symposium on Prime Numbers 280 Results Proof of the Main Theorem Prot ot Mal Treen Theorem There is no largest prime number Proof 1 Suppose p were the largest prime number 4 Thus q 1 is also prime and greater than p This theme changes the colors in a sidebar such that the current entry in a table of contents shown there gets hilighted by showing a different background behind it 17 1 2 Complete Color Themes A complete color theme is a color theme that completely specifies all colors for all parts of a frame It installs specific colors and does not derive the colors from say the structure BEAMER color Complete complete themes happen to have names of flying animals usecolortheme Example eime There Is No Largest Prime Number i The proof uses reductio ad absurdum Euklid Euklid There
371. ult enumeration marker uses the scheme 1 2 3 for the first level 1 1 1 2 1 3 for the second level and 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 for the third level e circle Places the numbers inside little circles The colors are taken from item projected or subitem projected or subsubitem projected e square Places the numbers on little squares e ball Projects the numbers onto little balls Beamer Template Color Font enumerate item This template governs how the number in front of a first level item is typeset The level here refers to the level of enumeration nesting only Thus an enumerate inside an itemize is a first level enumerate but it uses the second level itemize enumerate body When the template is inserted the BEAMER font and color enumerate item are installed The following command is useful for this template e insertenumlabel inserts the current number of the top level enumeration as an Arabic number This insert is also available in the next two templates Beamer Template Color Font enumerate subitem Like enumerate item only for second level items e insertsubenumlabel inserts the current number of the second level enumeration as an Ara bic number Example setbeamertemplate enumerate subitem insertenumlabel insertsubenumlabel 93 Beamer Template Color Font enumerate subsubitem Like enumerate item only for third level items e insertsubsubenumlabel inserts the current number of the second le
372. ument free form below instead Example mode lt article gt Extra detail mentioned only in the article version mode lt beamer trans gt frame tableofcontents currentsection The second flavor of the mode command takes no argument No argument means that it is not followed by an opening brace but any other symbol mode lt mode specification gt In the specified mode this command actually has no effect The interesting part is the effect in the non specified modes In these modes the command causes TEX to enter a kind of gobbling state It will now ignore all following lines until the next line that has a sole occurrence of one of the following commands mode mode begin document end document Even a comment on this line will make T X skip it Note that the line with the special commands that make TFX stop gobbling may not directly follow the line where the gobbling is started Rather there must either be one non empty line before the special command or at least two empty lines When T X encounters a single mode command it will execute this command If the command is mode command of the first flavor T X will resume its gobbling state after having inserted or not inserted the argument of the mode command If the mode command is of the second flavor it takes over Using this second flavor of mode is less convenient than the first but there are different reasons why you might need to
373. ument number default optional value begin text end text Declares a new environment that is overlay specification aware If this environment is encountered the same algorithm as for newcommand lt gt is used to parse the arguments and the overlay specification Note that as always the end text may not contain any arguments like 1 In particular you do not have access to the overlay specification In this case it is usually a good idea to use altenv environment in the begin text Example Declare your own action block newenvironment lt gt myboldblock 114 begin actionenv 2 textbf 1 par par end actionenv begin frame begin myboldblock lt 2 gt This theorem is shown only on the second slide end myboldblock end frame Example Text in the following environment is normally bold and italic on non specified slides newenvironment lt gt boldornormal beginfaltenv 1 begin bfseries end bfseries end altenv Incidentally since altenv also accepts its argument at the end the same effect could have been achieved using just newenvironment boldornormal begin faltenv begin bfseries end bfseries 00 end altenv renewenvironment lt gt ezisting environment name argument number default optional value begin text end text Redefines an existing environment The original environment is still available under the name orig
374. ura is in my opinion a beautiful font that is very well suited for presentations It s thick letters make it robust against scaling inversion and low contrast Unfortunately while it is most likely installed on your system somewhere in some for getting TX to work with it is a complicated process e Times is a possible alternative to Computer Modern Its main disadvantage is that it is a serif font which requires a high resolution projector Naturally it also used very often so we all know it very well Families that you should not use for normal text include e All monospaced fonts like Courier e Script fonts which look like handwriting Their stroke width is way too small for a presentation e More delicate serif fonts like Stempel and possibly even Garamond e Gothic fonts Only a small fraction of your audience will be able to read them fluently There is one popular font that is a bit special Microsoft s Comic Sans On the one hand there is a website lobbying for banning the use of this font Indeed the main trouble with the font is that it is not particularly well readable and that math typeset partly using this font looks terrible On the other hand this font does create the impression of a slide written by hand which gives the presentation a natural look Think twice before using this font but do not let yourself be intimidated One of the most important rules of typography is that you should use as little fonts a
375. ure environment or just plain text The poster text is typeset in a box the box is inserted into the normal text and the movie rectangle is put exactly over this box Thus if the poster text is an image from the movie this image will be shown until the movie is started when it will be exactly replaced by the movie itself However there is also a different sometimes better way of creating a poster image namely by using the poster option as explained later on The aspect ratio of the movie will not be corrected automatically if the dimension of the poster text box does not have the same aspect ratio Most movies have an aspect ratio of 4 3 or 16 9 Despite the name a movie may consist only of sound with no images In this case the posert text might be a symbol representing the sound There is also a different dedicated command for including sounds in a PDF file see the sound command in Section 13 2 Unless further options are given the movie will start only when the user clicks on it Whether the viewer application can actually display the movie depends on the application and the version For example the Acrobat Reader up to version 5 does not seem to be able to display any movies or sounds on Linux On the other hand the Acrobat Reader Version 6 on MacOS is able to display anything that QuickTime can display which is just about everything Embedding movies in a PDF document is provided for by the PDF standard and is not a peculia
376. ures of BEAMER while using the syntax of another class For example you can use the article mode to create a nice article version of a PROSPER talk 20 1 Prosper and HA Prosper The package beamerprosper maps the commands of the PROSPER package developed by Fr d ric Goualard to BEAMER commands Also some commands of the HA PROSPER package developed by Hendri Adriaens are mapped to BEAMER commands These mappings cannot perfectly emulate all of Prosper Rather these mappings are intended as an aid when porting parts of presentations created using PROSPER to BEAMER No styles are implemented that mimick Prosper styles Rather the normal BEAMER themes must be used although one could implement BEAMER themes that mimicks existing PROSPER styles I have not done that and do not intend to The workflow for creating a BEAMER presentation that uses PROSPER code is the following 1 Use the document class beamer not prosper Most options passed to prosper do not apply to beamer and should be omitted 2 Add a usepackage beamerprosper to start the emulation 3 If you add slides relying on HA PROSPER you may wish to add the option framesassubsections to beamerprosper though I do not recommend it use the normal subsection command instead it gives you more fine grained control 4 If you also copy the title commands it may be necessary to adjust the content of commands like title or author Note that in PROSPER the email command is g
377. use it e The line wise gobbling is much faster than the gobble of the third flavor explained below e The first flavor reads its argument completely This means it cannot contain any verbatim text that contains unbalanced braces e The first flavor cannot cope with arguments that contain include e Ifthe text mainly belongs to one mode with only small amounts of text from another mode inserted this second flavor is nice to use Note When searching line wise for a mode command to shake it out of its gobbling state TEX will not recognize a mode command if a mode specification follows on the same line Thus such a specification must be given on the next line Note When a T X file ends TeX must not be in the gobbling state Switch this state off using mode on one line and lt all gt on the next Example mode lt article gt This text is typeset only in larticlel mode verb verbatim text is ok mode 128 lt presentation gt 1 this text is inserted only in presentation mode frame tableofcontents currentsection Here we are back to article mode stuff This text is not inserted in presentation mode mode lt presentation gt This text is only inserted in presentation mode The last flavor of the mode command behaves quite differently mode The effect of this mode is to ignore all text outside frames in the presentation modes In article mode it has no effect This mode should only be enter
378. vel enumeration as an Arabic number Beamer Template Color Font enumerate mini template This template is used to typeset the number that arises from a mini template e insertenumlabel inserts the current number rendered by this mini template For example if the mini template is i and this command is used in the fourth item insertenumlabel would yield iv The following templates govern how the body of an itemize or an enumerate is typeset Beamer Template itemize enumerate body begin This template is inserted at the beginning of a first level itemize or enumerate environment Fur thermore before this template is inserted the BEAMER font and color itemize enumerate body is used Beamer Template itemize enumerate body end This template is inserted at the end of a first level itemize or enumerate environment There exist corresponding templates like itemize enumerate subbody being from second and third level itemize or enumerates Parent Beamer Template items This template is a parent template of itemize items and enumerate items Example setbeamertemplate items circle will cause all items in itemize or enumerate envi ronments to become circles of the appropriate size color and font begin description lt default overlay specification gt long text environment contents end description Like itemize but used to display a list that explains or defines labels The width of long text is used
379. vironment contents end slides Inserts a frame with the containsverbatim option set The frame title will be enclosed in a frametitle command The following options may be given e trans prosper transition installs the specified prosper transition as the transition effect when showing the slide e prosper transition has the same effect as trans prosper transition e toc entry overrides the subsection table of contents entry created by this slide by entry Note that a subsection entry is created for a slide only if the framesassubsections options is specified e template text is ignored Example The following two texts have the same effect begin slide trans Glitter toc short A Title Hi end slide and subsection short omitted if framesassubsections is not specified begin frame containsverbatim transglitter frametitle A Title Hi end frame overlays number slide environment This will put the slide environment into a frame that does not have the containsverbatim option and which can hence contain overlayed text The number is ignored since the number of necessary overlays is computed automatically by BEAMER Example The following code fragments have the same effect overlays 2 begin slide A Title begin itemstep item Hi item Ho end itemstep end slide 184 and subsection A Title omitted if framesassubsections is not specified begin fr
380. vocation of the template by the command usebeamertemplate this text is used Example 153 setbeamertemplate answer correct Your answer is usebeamertemplate answer If you specify a predefined option this command behaves slightly differently In this case someone has used the command defbeamertemplate to predefined a template for you By giving the name of this predefined template as the optional parameter predefined option you cause the template element name to be set to this template Example setbeamertemplate bibliography item book causes the bibliography items to become little book icons This command cause a subsequent call of usebeamertemplate bibliography item to insert the predefined code for inserting a book Some predefined template options take parameters themselves In such a case the parameters are given as args Example The predefined option grid for the template background takes an optional argument setbeamertemplate background grid step 1cm In the example the second argument in square brackets is the optional argument In the descriptions of elements if there are possible predefined option the description shows how the predefined option can be used together with its arguments but the setbeamertemplate xxxx is omitted Thus the above example would be documented in the description of the background element like this e grid step options causes a light grid to be V
381. which defines the following commands shadowbox doublebox ovalbox and Ovalbox Please consult the ATEX Companion for details on how to use these commands The BEAMER class also defines two environments for creating coloured boxes begin beamercolorbox options beamer color environment contents end beamercolorbox This environment can be used to conveniently typeset some text using some BEAMER color Basically the following two command blocks do the same begin beamercolorbox beamer color Text end beamercolorbox usebeamercolor beamer color colorbox bg color fg Text In other words the environment installs the beamer color and uses the background for the background of the box and the foreground for the text inside the box However in reality numerous options can be given to specify in much greater detail how the box is rendered If the background color of beamer color is empty no background is drawn behind the text that is the background is transparent This command is used extensively by the default inner and outer themes for typesetting the headlines and footlines It is not really intended to be used in normal frames for example it is not available inside article mode You should prefer using structuring elements like blocks or theorems that automatically insert colored boxes as needed Example The following example could be used to typeset a headline with two lines the fi
382. xample To get an extremely shaded rendering of the frames outside the current subsection you can use the following setbeamertemplate mini frame in other subsection default 20 Example To render all mini frames other than the current one in the same way use setbeamertemplate mini frame in other subsection default 100 Some themes show sections and or subsections in the navigation bars By clicking on a section or subsection in the navigation bar you will jump to that section Clicking on a section is particularly useful if the section starts with a tableofcontents currentsection since you can use it to jump to the different subsections Beamer Template Color Font section in head foot This template is used to render a section entry if it occurs in the headline or the footline The back ground of the BEAMER color is typically used as the background of the whole area where section entries are shown in the headline You cannot usually use this template yourself since the insert insertsectionhead is setup correctly only when a list of sections is being typeset in the headline The default template just inserts the section name The following inserts are useful for this template e insertsectionhead inserts the name of the section that is to be typeset in a navigation bar e insertsectionheadnumber inserts the number of the section that is to be typeset in a navigation bar e insertpartheadnumber inserts the
383. xt Proof is replaced by whatever is appropriate in the selected language Example begin proof lt 2 gt Sketch of proof Suppose end proof Beamer Template Color Font ged symbol The symbol is shown at the end of every proof You can define new environments using the following command newtheorem environment name numbered same as head text number within This command is used exactly the same way as in the amsthm package as a matter of fact it is the command from that package see its documentation The only difference is that environments declared using this command are overlay specification aware in BEAMER and that when typeset are typeset according to BEAMER s templates ARTICLE Environments declared using this command are also overlay specification aware in article mode ARTICLE Example newtheorem observation theorem Observation You can also use amsthm s command newtheoremstyle to define new theorem styles Note that the default template for theorems will ignore any head font setting but will honor the body font setting If you wish to define the environments like theorem differently for example have it numbered within each subsection you can use the following class option to disable the definition of the predefined environments documentclass notheorems beamer Switches off the definition of default blocks like theorem but still loads amsthm and makes theorems overlay spec
384. y mixing the color of the object you want to show with the current background color the color bg which has hopefully been setup such that it is the average color of the background on which the object should be placed To install this effect you can use setbeamercovered transparent 169 This commands allows you to specify in a quite general way how a covered item should be rendered You can even specify different ways of rendering the item depending on how long it will take before this item is shown or for how long it has already been covered once more The transparency effect will automatically apply to all colors except for the colors in images For images there is a workaround see the documentation of the PGF package Xsetbeamercoveredi options This command offers several different options the most important of which is transparent All options are internally mapped to the two options still covered and again covered In detail the following options may be given e invisible is the default and causes covered text to completely disappear e transparent opaqueness causes covered text to be typset in a transparent way By default this means that 85 of the background color is mixed into all colors or that the opaqueness of the text is 15 You can specify a different percentage where O means totally transparent and 100 means totally opaque Unfortunately this value is kind of specific to eve
385. you want to have overlay specifications that follow a pattern similar to the following begin itemize item lt 1 gt Apple item lt 2 gt Peach item lt 3 gt Plum item lt 4 gt Orange end itemize The problem starts if you decide to insert a new fruit say at the beginning In this case you would have to adjust all of the overlay specifications Also if you add a pause command before the itemize you would also have to update the overlay specifications BEAMER offers a special syntax to make creating lists as the one above more robust You can replace it by the following list of incremental overlay specifications begin itemize item lt gt Apple item lt gt Peach item lt gt Plum Vitem lt gt Orange end itemize The effect of the sign is the following You can use it in any overlay specification at any point where you would usually use a number If a sign is encountered it is replaced by the current value of the TATpX counter beamerpauses which is 1 at the beginning of the frame Then the counter is increased by 1 though it is only increased once for every overlay specification even if the specification contains multiple signs they are replaced by the same number In the above example the first specification is replaced by lt 1 gt Then the second is replaced by lt 2 gt and so forth We can now easily insert new entries without having to change anything We might also write the followi
386. your text 11 1 Itemizations Enumerations and Descriptions There are three predefined environments for creating lists namely enumerate itemize and description The first two can be nested to depth three but nesting them to this depth creates totally unreadable slides The item command is overlay specification aware If an overlay specification is provided the item will only be shown on the specified slides see the following example If the item command is to take an optional argument and an overlay specification the overlay specification can either come first as in item lt 1 gt Cat or come last as in item Cat lt 1 gt begin frame There are three important points begin enumerate item lt 1 gt A first one item lt 2 gt a second one with a bunch of subpoints begin itemize item first subpoint Only shown from second slide on item lt 3 gt second subpoint added on third slide item lt 4 gt third subpoint added on fourth slide end itemize item lt 5 gt and a third one end enumerate end frame begin itemize lt default overlay specification gt environment contents end itemize Used to display a list of items that do not have a special ordering Inside the environment use an item command for each topic If the optional parameter default overlay specification is given in every occurrence of an item com mand that does not have an overlay specification attached to it the default ov
387. ys the solutions can be found in the directory beamer solutions Solution Template short talks speaker_introduction ornate 2min e Introducing another speaker e Talk length is about 2min e Ornate style PRESEN T X version available in languages de and en TATION Lyx LyX version available in languages de and en Solution Template generic talks generic ornate 15min 45min e Generic solution template for talks on any subject e Talk length is between 15min and 45min e Ornate style PRESEN T X version available in languages de and en TATION LYX LyX version available in languages de and en Solution Template conference talks conference ornate 20min e Talk at a conference colloquium e Talk length is about 20 minutes e Ornate style PRESEN T X version available in languages de and en TATION Lyx LyX version available in languages de and en 40 Part II Building a Presentation This part contains an explanation of all the commands that are used to create presentations It starts with a section treating the commands and environments used to create frames the basic building blocks of presentations Next the creation of overlays is explained The following three sections concern commands and methods of structuring a presentation In order the static global structure the interactive global structure and the local structure are treated Two further sections treat graphics and animations Much of the material in the

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Fijación directa Direct fixing Fixation directe  CD5 - CEC  Tripp Lite N125-010-GY User's Manual    LV8D : Reference and Installation Manual  Weltron 10m LC/SC  JVC LST0601-001B User's Manual    USBDAC_2704 取扱説明書    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file